JP7134520B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing an effect based on whether or not to execute a special game.

For example, in a pachinko game machine, when a game ball enters a predetermined starting hole, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player. Some gaming machines of this type are capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a premium effect) for notifying that a jackpot game will be executed prior to being informed that it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed. There is (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-96091 A

By the way, it cannot be said that the effects performed by the conventional gaming machines are highly entertaining, and there is room for improvement in terms of improving the interestingness.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

The present invention employs the following configurations in order to solve the above problems.
That is, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. Before the determination is made, it is provided with a prior determination means for determining in advance whether or not to execute the special game, and an effect control means for controlling an effect, the effect control means is the pre-determining means. A preliminary effect can be executed based on the determination result, a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display is variably displayed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, and the corresponding display is displayed in accordance with the derivation display of the determination result. is stopped, and a specific effect using the corresponding display and a suggestive effect suggesting that the special game will be executed are executed from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display. At any one of a plurality of timings, it is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed, and the notice effect includes the correspondence There are a first notice effect executed when the display is in the normal mode and a second notice effect executed when the corresponding display is in the special mode, and the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode. It is possible to execute a first effect and a second effect, which is a different aspect of the effect from the first effect and in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the special mode, and the end of the first notice effect. Later, the first effect or the second effect can be executed, and the same special effect can be executed when the first effect is executed and when the second effect is executed. Yes, the ratio of execution of the special effect is different between the case where the suggestive effect is executed after the end of the first notice effect and the case where the suggestive effect is not executed after the end of the first notice effect. When the article pre-performance is executed, the announcement performance is more likely to be executed than when the pre-performance is not executed.

According to this invention, it is possible to execute a highly entertaining presentation.

Schematic front view of gaming machine 1 A plan view showing a part of the gaming machine 1 Enlarged view of indicator 4 in FIG. Block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device provided in the game machine 1 Explanatory diagram for explaining the game state Explanatory diagram for explaining various random numbers used for special symbol determination A flow diagram illustrating the flow of production in the normal game state A flow diagram illustrating the flow of production in the probability variable gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining the decorativeness of decorative patterns Screen diagram showing a specific example of production that develops into SPSP reach via normal reach (Part 1) Screen diagram showing a specific example of production that develops into SPSP reach via normal reach (Part 2) A time chart showing a specific example of the display mode of the decorative pattern when the promotion effect is executed Screen diagram showing a specific example of character SP reach A screen diagram showing a specific example of a hit production in the normal game state Screen diagram showing a specific example of battle reach in the variable probability gaming state Screen diagram showing a specific example of a hit effect in the variable probability game state Explanatory diagram for explaining the variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbols in the normal game state Explanatory diagram for explaining the variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in the probability variation gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining the reliability of reach symbols in the normal game state Explanatory diagram for explaining the reliability of the reach pattern in the variable probability gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining various jackpot notices Screen diagram showing a specific example of premium character production Screen diagram showing a specific example of rainbow color title display Screen diagram showing specific examples of blue title display and red title display Screen diagram showing a specific example of rainbow color character display Screen diagram showing a specific example of cut-in performed according to the operation Schematic front view of game machine 1 showing specific example of one-shot notification A screen diagram exemplifying how the premium character effect is performed multiple times within the same variation Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot notice type selection table A time chart showing a specific example of the production in the normal game state Time chart showing a specific example of production in the probability variable gaming state Explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of the pending icon A screen diagram exemplifying a customer waiting menu screen Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot notice type selection table used when the jackpot notice up mode is set FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of a main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103; A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100 Detailed flowchart of switch processing in step S2 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the first start opening switch process in step S21 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the second start opening switch process in step S22 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of pre-determination processing in steps S218 and S228 of FIGS. Detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of big hit determination processing in step S309 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of variation pattern selection processing in step S310 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of stop processing in step S319 of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of game state setting processing executed at the end of the jackpot game in the game control board 100 Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the effect control board 130 Detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of hold command reception processing in step S13 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S15 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of big hit notice effect pattern setting process in step S153 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the variable effect pattern setting process in step S154 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of reliability suggestive effect pattern setting process in step S155 of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control board 140 Detailed flowchart of image output control processing in step S41 of FIG. Screen diagram showing a specific example of the first mission production Screen diagram showing a specific example of the second mission production Explanatory diagram for explaining the variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in the normal game state in the second embodiment A time chart showing a specific example of a period in which the pending icon change effect can be executed and a period in which it cannot be executed Explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the icon at the time of the big win Explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the icon at the time of losing A time chart showing a specific example of a period during which the icon change effect can be executed and a period during which the icon change effect cannot be executed Explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a series of effects in the pseudo-continuous effect Explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect and the reliability Explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a series of effects when a background effect is executed. Explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the operation-promoting effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the effect after the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect at the time of the big win. Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the effect after the operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the background effect starts at the time of losing. Time chart for explaining chance eye production and pattern change production Explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reliability suggestive effects A screen diagram exemplifying how the background effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. Screen diagram exemplifying how the icon change effect (jackpot announcement), background effect, and normal simulated continuous effect are executed in normal mode A A screen diagram illustrating how the icon change effect, the background effect, and the normal simulated continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. Screen diagram exemplifying how the icon change effect (jackpot announcement), background effect, and normal simulated continuous effect are executed in normal mode A A screen diagram exemplifying how the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect are executed in the normal mode A A screen diagram exemplifying how the chance eye effect, the symbol change effect, and the icon change effect are executed in the normal mode A. Explanatory diagram for explaining the mode of SPSP reach (battle effect) Explanatory drawing for explaining a modified example of the additional display displayed in addition to the numbers forming the decorative pattern. Explanatory drawing for explaining the modification of the decorative design of the first mode and the second mode

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with appropriate reference to the drawings.

[Example of schematic configuration of gaming machine 1]
First, an example of a schematic configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. Here, FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the gaming machine 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing part of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 includes a game board 2 on which accessories related to winning and judgment are provided, and a frame member 3 surrounding the game board 2 . The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged parallel to the game board 2 at a predetermined interval, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which game balls can flow down. It is

When the player grips the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 clockwise, game balls stored in the upper tray 28 are guided to a shooting device (not shown), and are played with a hitting force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 20. Launched into area 10 . The game area 10 is provided with game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown), and the shot game ball is guided to an upper position in the game area 10, and touches the game nails, the windmills, etc. It falls in the game area 10 along the game board 2 while changing the movement direction. It should be noted that the shooting of game balls is temporarily stopped when the player operates the stop button 22 .

The upper tray 28 stores game balls and prize balls supplied to the shooting device. Below the upper plate 28, a lower plate 29 for storing prize balls is provided. When the player operates the take-out button 23, a part of the lower surface of the lower tray 29 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the lower tray 29 drop into a box (not shown) arranged below the lower tray 29. - 特許庁In addition, the upper plate 28 and the lower plate 29 may be composed of one plate.

When the player performs so-called "left-handed hitting", in which the player rotates the handle 20 at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 31 . On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called "right-handed hit" in which the player keeps rotating the handle 20 at a large rotation angle, the game ball is hit with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32 .

A first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two normal winning ports 14, a first gate 15, and an electric tulip 17 are provided on the passage path of the left-handed game ball as accessories related to winning and judgment. It is In addition, on the passage path of the game ball hit to the right, there are the second starting port 12, the big winning port 13, the two normal winning ports 14, the second gate 16, and the electric tulip as accessories related to winning and judgment. 17 are provided.

The game ball launched into the game area 10 enters any one of the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, the big winning hole 13, and the normal winning hole 14 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2. may win prizes. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 28 or the lower tray 29 according to the place where the prize was won. The game balls that did not win a prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18. - 特許庁

The first starting port 11 is a starting region that is always open, and the second starting port 12 is a starting region that is opened only when an electric tulip 17 as a normal electric accessory is operating. In the gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first start port 11 and wins, or when the game ball passes through the second start port 12 and wins, a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player is played. It is determined whether or not to execute, and the symbol indicating the determination result is displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 of the display 4, which will be described later. Then, when a symbol indicating a big win is stopped and displayed, a big win game for opening the big winning opening 13 is executed.

In the following description, the judgment executed on the condition that the game ball enters the first start port 11 is called "first special symbol judgment", and the condition that the game ball enters the second start port 12. The judgment to be executed is called "second special symbol judgment", and these judgments are collectively called "special symbol judgment".

The big winning opening 13 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the big winning opening 13 is provided at the opening of the big winning opening 13 . The big winning opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined big winning symbol indicating that the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "big winning" is stopped and displayed on the display device 4, the big winning game to open the big winning opening 13 by actuating the plate. is executed. During the jackpot game, a large winning opening until a predetermined condition (in this embodiment, 8 game balls enter the big winning opening 13, or 29.5 seconds elapse after the opening of the big winning opening 13) is satisfied. 13 is maintained in an open state and then closed, and a long open round game is executed a predetermined number of times at predetermined time intervals.

In this way, since the big winning opening 13 is opened for a long time during the big winning game, the player can win more prizes than when the big winning game is not performed by hitting right during the big winning game. you can get the ball.

The electric tulip 17 is arranged close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 has a closed posture (see the solid line in FIG. 1) in which the pair of blade members closes the second start port 12, and an open posture in which the second start port 12 is opened (see the broken line in FIG. 1). It is possible to change the posture to

The second starting port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17, as illustrated in FIG. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16, it is determined whether or not to open the second start port 12, although the prize ball is not paid out. Here, when it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened, the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 maintain the open posture for a specified time and then return to the closed posture for a specified number of times. In this way, the second starting port 12 is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the electric tulip 17 is not operating, whereas it is in a state in which the game ball can easily pass when the electric tulip 17 is operated. Become.

In the following description, the judgment executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 is called "normal symbol judgment".

The normal winning opening 14 is always open like the first starting opening 11, and is a winning opening from which a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out by winning of game balls. In addition, unlike the first starting hole 11 and the like, even if a game ball enters the normal winning hole 14, no determination is made.

[Configuration example of effect means of gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 is provided with a liquid crystal display device 5, a speaker 24, a production accessory 7, a board lamp 25, and the like for performing various effects. The frame member 3 also incorporates a frame lamp 37 (see FIG. 4) not shown in FIG.

The liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter referred to as "liquid crystal screen 5") is provided at a position that is easily visible to the player. On the liquid crystal screen 5, for example, decorative symbols for notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination, characters and items, pending images (suspended icons) displayed for the number of times the special symbol determination is suspended, and variable display of the special symbols. An effect image including various display objects such as the icon indicating that the game is in progress is displayed. Note that the image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

The speaker 24 outputs musical pieces, voices, sound effects, etc., in synchronization with or asynchronously with the display effects performed by the liquid crystal display device 5, and performs sound effects.

The performance accessory 7 is arranged in front and to the side of the liquid crystal screen 5. - 特許庁The production accessory 7 has a built-in light-emitting element (for example, an LED). The production accessory 7 performs a predetermined production by both or one of the movement of the accessory itself and the light. In this embodiment, the performance accessory 7 is configured in a shape that imitates a sword, and the initial posture (Fig. 1 (see FIG. 11(A)), and a rotating posture in which the sword appears to be substantially horizontal (see FIG. 11(A)).

The board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects with light, such as changing the lighting or blinking pattern and changing the emission color.

[Input Means of Gaming Machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 2, the frame member 3 is provided with a performance button 26 and a performance key 27 as input means for the player to make an input. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information when pressed by the player. The performance key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform selection operation, cursor movement, etc., and is composed of an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key. In the gaming machine 1, there are cases where an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 26 and the effect key 27 is performed. In addition, the gaming machine 1 is capable of adjusting the volume, adjusting the amount of light, and changing the rate of appearance of a predetermined effect by operating the effect button 26 and the effect key 27. These are described with reference to FIG. will be detailed later.

[Configuration example of display 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The display 4 mainly displays information about special symbol determination and normal symbol determination, and as illustrated in FIG. It comprises a special symbol reservation display 43, a second special symbol reservation display 44, a normal symbol display 45, a normal symbol reservation display 46, a game state display 47, a round display 48 and the like.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display device 41 variably displays the symbol and then stops and displays the symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination to determine the first special symbol determination. Notify the results. When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display device 42 displays the symbol in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination to determine the second special symbol determination. Notify the results. On the first special symbol display device 41 and the second special symbol display device 42, as symbols indicating the determination result, a jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is "big hit", or a determination result of the special symbol determination A losing symbol indicating that is "losing" is stopped and displayed.

The first special symbol reservation display 43 displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination. The second special symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination. In addition, in this embodiment, both upper limits of the number of reservations are set to "4".

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by variably displaying the symbol and then stop-displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination. The normal symbol reservation display 46 displays the number of normal symbol determination pending. The game state display 47 displays the game state at the time when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. The round display device 48, when the first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42 stops displaying the jackpot pattern, displays the opening pattern of the jackpot game opening 13 (the number of times of the round game). number).

In the following description, the symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42 are called "special symbols", and the symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 45 are "normal symbols". shall be called Also, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is called "first special symbol", and the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is called "second special symbol". may be distinguished.

[Configuration of control device of gaming machine 1]
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device provided in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.
A control device for controlling the operation of the game machine 1 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 . As illustrated in FIG. 4 , the control device of the gaming machine 1 includes a game control board 100 for controlling the progress of the game such as transmission of various judgments and commands, and overall effects based on the commands received from the game control board 100. , an image sound control board 140 that controls the effects of images and sounds, and a lamp control board 150 that controls the effects of various lamps and movable bodies. The configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 may be configured by one board.

[Configuration example of game control board 100]
The game control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 , a main ROM 102 and a main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to determination and the number of awarded balls to be paid out, based on programs stored in the main ROM 102 . The main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 101 executes the above programs or as a work area for data processing.

The game control board 100 includes a first starter switch 111, a second starter switch 112, an electric tulip control unit 113, a first gate switch 114, a second gate switch 115, a large winning port switch 116, and a large winning port control unit. 117, a normal prize winning port switch 118, and respective indicators 41 to 48 constituting the indicator 4 are connected. Incidentally, the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is provided with four normal winning prize opening switches 122 corresponding to the four normal winning prize openings 14 (see FIG. 1), but in FIG. is indicated only.

The first starting port switch 111 detects that a game ball has entered the first starting port 11 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100 . The second starting port switch 112 detects that a game ball has entered the second starting port 12 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100 . The electric tulip control unit 113 opens and closes the second starting port 12 by activating an electric solenoid connected to a pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 so as to be able to transmit drive in response to a control signal from the game control board 100. do. The first gate switch 114 detects passage of the game ball with respect to the first gate 15 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100 . The second gate switch 115 detects passage of the game ball with respect to the second gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100 .

The big winning hole switch 116 detects the winning of the game ball to the big winning hole 13 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100 . The large winning opening control unit 117 opens and closes the large winning opening 13 by activating an electric solenoid connected to a plate that closes the large winning opening 13 so as to be able to transmit drive based on a control signal from the game control board 100. do. The normal winning opening switch 118 detects that the game ball has entered the normal winning opening 14 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100 .

When a detection signal is input from the first starter switch 111, the second starter switch 112, the big winswitch 116, or the normal winswitch 118, the main CPU 101 receives a predetermined number of balls according to the place where the game ball has won. A payout control board (not shown) is instructed to pay out prize balls, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on information from the payout control board. Although detailed description is omitted, the payout control board supplies game balls to the upper tray 28 or the lower tray 29 by controlling a drive motor that sends out game balls from a ball tank provided on the back side of the game board 2. .

The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquired information at the timing when the detection signal is input from the first starting switch 111, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. In addition, various random numbers are acquired as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the second starting port switch 112 is input, and the second special symbol determination is executed using the acquired random numbers. Various random numbers are, specifically, jackpot random numbers, pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers.

Here, the jackpot random number is a random number for determining a jackpot or a loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game ends, etc.) when it is determined to be a jackpot. The ready-to-win random number is a random number for determining whether to perform a ready-to-win effect or not to perform a ready-to-win effect when it is determined that the game is lost. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern when the special symbols are variably displayed.

When the main CPU 101 acquires these random numbers, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on whether or not the acquired jackpot random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102 . judge. Here, when it is determined that a jackpot game is to be executed, the type of jackpot is determined based on which random number of predetermined random numbers stored in the main ROM 102 matches the acquired pattern random number. Here, as the types of jackpots, for example, after the jackpot game is over, the game is controlled in the probability variable game state, and after the jackpot game is over, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state. An example would be the "regular jackpot." The gaming state and the types of jackpots will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines not to execute the jackpot game based on the judgment based on the jackpot random number, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the acquired ready-to-win random number matches the predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether to carry out a performance with reach or a performance without reach. In addition, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbols when the special symbols are variably displayed regardless of whether or not the jackpot game is performed. Thereby, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined.

When the main CPU 101 determines to execute a jackpot game and determines the type of jackpot, the main CPU 101 controls the opening and closing of the jackpot 13 via the jackpot controller 117 to play a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type. to run.

Further, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the first gate switch 114 or the second gate switch 115 is input, and uses the acquired random number to execute normal symbol determination. When it is determined to open the second starting port 12 , the second starting port 12 is temporarily opened by operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip control section 113 .

Further, the main CPU 101 causes the display devices 41 to 48 constituting the display device 4 to execute the processing described above with reference to FIG.

[Configuration example of production control board 130]
The performance control board 130 includes a sub CPU 131 , a sub ROM 132 , a sub RAM 133 and an RTC (real time clock) 134 . The sub CPU 131 performs arithmetic processing when controlling effects based on programs stored in the sub ROM 132 . The sub-RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub-CPU 131 executes the above programs and as a work area for data processing. The RTC 134 measures the current date and time (date and time).

The sub CPU 131 sets the effect contents based on the game information regarding the special symbol determination, the normal symbol determination, the jackpot game and the like transmitted from the game control board 100 . At that time, the input of the operation information from the production button 26 or the production key 27 may be received, and the contents of production corresponding to the operation information may be set. The sub CPU 131 transmits to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 a command instructing execution of the set effect content.

[Configuration example of image sound control board 140]
The image sound control board 140 includes a general CPU 141, a control ROM 142, a control RAM 143, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144, an audio DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 145, a signal output section 147 (not shown), and the like. ing. The supervising CPU 141 performs arithmetic processing when controlling images and sounds for realizing effects for which the contents of effects are set in the effect control board 130 based on programs stored in the control ROM 142 . The control RAM 143 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the overall CPU 141 executes the above programs and as a work area for data processing.

The VDP 144 generates an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 . Acoustic DSP 145 generates acoustic data output from speaker 24 . The overall CPU 141 generates control signals based on commands from the production control board 130 and programs stored in the control ROM 142 and outputs them to the VDP 144 and the sound DSP 145 to control these operations.

Although not shown in the figure, the VDP 144 includes an image ROM that stores material data necessary for generating effect images, a drawing engine that executes drawing processing of the effect images, and a liquid crystal display of the effect images drawn by the drawing engine. It is configured to have an output circuit and the like for outputting to the device 5 . Based on the control signal from the general CPU 141, the drawing engine draws the effect image in the frame buffer using the material data stored in the image ROM. The output circuit outputs the effect image drawn in the frame buffer to the liquid crystal display device 5 at a predetermined timing.

Also, although not shown in the figure, the audio DSP 145 includes an audio ROM for storing various audio data related to sound effects such as music, voice, and sound effects, and a work area for data processing by the audio DSP 145. SDRAM is connected. The audio DSP 145 reads the audio data corresponding to the control signal from the general CPU 141 from the audio ROM to the SDRAM, executes data processing, and outputs the processed audio data to the speaker 24 .

The signal output unit 147 outputs a predetermined signal to the overall CPU 141 for a predetermined time (eg, 0.5 seconds) at predetermined time intervals (eg, 1-second intervals). For example, the signal output section 147 may output a predetermined signal at regular time intervals. The general CPU 141 executes different processes depending on whether the predetermined signal is input from the signal output section 147 or not.

[Configuration Example of Lamp Control Board 150]
The lamp control board 150 includes a lamp CPU 151 , a lamp ROM 152 and a lamp RAM 153 . The lamp CPU 151 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operations of the production accessory 7, the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, etc. based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 152. FIG. The lamp RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the lamp CPU 151 executes the above programs and as a work area for data processing.

The lamp ROM 152 stores light emission pattern data and operation pattern data. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating the respective light emission patterns of the light emitting elements built in the production accessory 7, the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the like. The action pattern data is data indicating the action pattern of the performance accessories 7 and the like.

The lamp CPU 151 reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the production control board 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 to the lamp RAM 153, and outputs the light emitting element of the production accessory 7, the board lamp 25, Light emission of the frame lamp 37 is controlled. In addition, the lamp CPU 151 reads the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the production control board 130 from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 to the lamp RAM 153, and drives the motor for operating the production accessory 7. to control.

Further, when the player operates the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, the lamp CPU 151 transmits an operation command notifying the effect to the effect control board 130. FIG.

[About variable production]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Outline explanation of fluctuation production is given.

In the gaming machine 1, when the game ball wins in the first starting hole 11, the first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is variably displayed, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination is displayed. Stop is displayed. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, along with the variable display of the first special symbol, a variable effect including the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed (for example, see FIG. 10). Then, when the first special symbol is variably displayed for the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected when the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, A decorative symbol is stop-displayed in a mode indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (see, for example, FIG. 11(H)). Thus, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol are synchronized. In addition, the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner with the start of the variable display of the second special design, and is stopped in accordance with the stop display of the second special design. The variable display of decorative patterns is also synchronized. That is, the decorative symbol is a display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed (hereinafter referred to as "corresponding display").

During the variable display of such symbols, a so-called ready-to-win effect may be performed. Specifically, on the liquid crystal screen 5, for example, a part of the pattern row of the decorative pattern in which the numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction from the bottom to the top is displayed in three rows in the horizontal direction. , when the variable display of the first special symbols is started, these symbol rows are variably displayed so as to scroll from top to bottom (for example, see FIGS. 10A and 10B). On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect is performed, before all the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, first, for example, the left and right decorative patterns (left and right patterns) are completely displayed. Pseudo-stop so as not to stop. The pseudo-stop is an effect in which the decorative pattern is moved slightly on the spot without being moved. When distinguishing, it may be called a pseudo stop.

When the left pattern and the right pattern are pseudo-stopped, if the same decorative pattern is pseudo-stopped on the effective line as these patterns, the reach is established, and a combination that indicates a big hit (for example, the same decoration such as "333" or "777" A ready-to-win performance is performed to make the player feel expectation for the pseudo stop (and the real stop) of the decorative symbols when three symbols are aligned (double). In this ready-to-win effect, the same decorative symbols that are pseudo-stopped as left and right symbols (hereinafter referred to as "ready-to-win symbols") are pseudo-stopped. It is an effect of scrolling at a low speed so as to be identifiable, and finally stopping a middle pattern common to the ready-to-win pattern or a middle pattern different from the ready-to-win pattern on the effective line to notify the winning or losing.

In this ready-to-win effect, there are cases where other effect images such as characters and items are used in addition to the decoration pattern (see FIG. 10(G)). In addition, in the following description, in the pattern variation in which the ready-to-win effect is performed, the effect performed before the ready-to-win is established may be called "pre-reach effect". The before-reach production and the ready-to-win production are the case of pseudo-stop (and main stop) in a combination mode in which decorative patterns indicate a big win, and the case of a real stop in a combination mode other than a combination mode indicating a big win (that is, a combination mode in which a failure is indicated). It is a viable production in both

The reach effect will be described in detail later, but if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss", the loss symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. Three decorative patterns are finally stopped in the combination mode shown. For example, when the ready-to-win effect is performed, the three decorative symbols indicating the winning winning symbols (for example, "343") are actually stopped as the losing symbols are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect is not performed, the three decorative symbols indicating the loose stitches (for example, "154") are actually stopped as the losing symbols are stopped and displayed. In this way, when it is determined that the big winning game is not to be executed, there is a losing notification effect in which the three decorative symbols are artificially stopped in a manner indicating the losing, and then the real stop is made to notify the losing (that the big winning game is not executed). executed.

When this loss notification performance is executed, the jackpot game is not executed, and if the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the first special symbol determination and the variable display of the first special symbol are immediately started. .

On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the ready-to-win effect is usually executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and the big winning symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. Then, after the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating a big win (for example, ``333'' or ``777''), the game is actually stopped. In this way, when it is determined that a big win game is to be executed, there is a winning notification effect in which the three decorative symbols are stopped in a simulated manner in a manner indicating a big win, and then actually stopped to notify the big win (execution of the big win game). executed. When this winning notification effect is executed, a big winning game is executed.

[About icons]
Even if the game ball wins the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 during the variable display of the special symbols or during the jackpot game, the special symbol determination and the variable display of the symbols triggered by the winning are immediately performed. cannot be executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if the game ball wins the first start port 11 (or the second start port 12), the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) and the symbol fluctuation display are immediately performed. If it cannot be executed, the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) is reserved within a range not exceeding a predetermined number ("4" in this embodiment), and the number of reservations is the first special symbol reserved display. It is displayed on the device 43 (or the second special symbol reservation display device 44).

On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, a first pending icon display area 51 and a first pending icon display area 51 and a A second pending icon display area 52 is provided (see FIG. 1).

The first pending icon display area 51 is an area in which a pending icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is pending is displayed. The first reserved icon display area 51 displays the same number of reserved icons as the number of reserved first special symbol determination indicated by the first special symbol reserved display 43 (see FIG. 3).

The second pending icon display area 52 is an area where a pending icon indicating that the second special symbol determination is pending is displayed. The second reserved icon display area 52 displays the same number of reserved icons as the number of reserved second special symbol determination indicated by the second special symbol reserved display 44 (see FIG. 3).

In FIG. 1, three pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 to suggest that the pending number of the first special symbol determination is "3", and the second special symbol determination A state in which two pending icons are displayed in the second pending icon display area 52 to indicate that the pending number is "2" is illustrated.

In addition, on the liquid crystal screen 5, as a display area for displaying a variation suggestive image (hereinafter referred to as "the icon") that suggests that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the area 53 is provided (see FIG. 1).

In the gaming machine 1, at the time of starting the variable display of the symbols in order to digest the reserved first special symbol determination right, it is displayed first among the suspended icons displayed in the first suspended icon display area 51. The suspended icon (the closest suspended icon to the area 53) moves from the first suspended icon display area 51 to the area 53 and is displayed as the icon. Then, when another suspended icon is displayed in the first suspended display area 51 , the other suspended icon is shifted to the area 53 side within the first suspended icon display area 51 .

Note that such shift processing is similarly performed for the pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 52 . The icon is an image displayed along with the variable display of the special symbols, and is a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols being executed. In addition, the pending icon is during the variable display of the special symbols (or before a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses from the start of the stop display of the special symbols). This is an image to notify that the food cannot be digested immediately. Therefore, the pending icon is an image displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols, and can be said to be a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols being executed.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are suspended, the second special symbol determination is preferentially digested over the first special symbol determination. . Therefore, the shift processing for the pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 52 is performed with priority over the shift processing for the pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 .

First special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) is performed based on acquired information such as a jackpot random number acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 11 (or second start port 12). Previously, the suspended icon corresponding to the acquired information is displayed in the first suspended icon display area 51 (or the second suspended icon display area 52). Then, based on the acquired information corresponding to the pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 (or the second pending icon display area 52), when the special symbol determination and the special symbol variable display are performed, The pending icon moves to the area 53 and is displayed in the area 53 as the icon suggesting that the special symbol is being variably displayed.

Note that, for example, a normal icon and a special icon are displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 . Here, the normal icon is a default pending icon, for example, a white pending icon. The special icon is a pending icon suggesting the reliability of the big win, and a pending icon displayed in a color other than white corresponds to this. The special icons in the present embodiment are arranged in order from low to high reliability of the suggested jackpot, blue pending icon (blue pending), green pending icon (green pending), red pending icon (red pending) , gold reserve icon (money reserve), rainbow color reserve icon (rainbow reserve), and the reliability of each jackpot is 5%, 15%, 50%, 75%, 100% (see FIG. 32) ).

The normal icon may not change its display mode until the special symbol determination corresponding to the reserved icon is completed, that is, until the normal icon is erased from the area 53 after the normal icon is moved to the area 53. . Further, when the suspended icon is displayed in the first suspended icon display area 51, it may be displayed as a special icon from the beginning. Further, for example, when the normal icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 51 changes to the special icon in the first reserved icon display area 51 or the area 53, or when the icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 51 A special icon may change to a higher-level special icon in the first reserved icon display area 51 or the area 53 once or multiple times. In the following description, the effect of displaying a special icon as a pending icon and suggesting the reliability of a big hit is called "pre-production".

On the other hand, the second reserved icon display area 52 displays normal icons and special icons in the same way as the first reserved icon display area 51 . Therefore, description of the pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 52 will be omitted.

[About game status]
The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game state. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is controlled in one of three gaming states of "normal gaming state", "probability variable gaming state", and "time saving gaming state".

"Normal game state" is a normal game state in which special symbol determination is performed in a low-probability state in which the probability of being determined to execute a jackpot game is relatively low, and the electric chew support function is not provided. That is, in the normal game state, the probability that the special symbol determination determines that the big winning game is executed is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/200) (see FIG. 6A). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal design determination is set to a relatively low probability (eg 1/12), and the fluctuation time of the normal design is relatively long (eg 25 seconds) and the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds×1 time).

"Probability variation gaming state" is a gaming state in which special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state with a relatively high probability of being determined to execute a jackpot game, and an electric chew support function is provided. That is, in the variable probability gaming state, the probability of being determined to execute a big hit game by special symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 1/50) (see FIG. 6(A)). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal design determination is set to a relatively high probability (eg 12/12), and the fluctuation time of the normal design is relatively short (eg 2 seconds). and the opening time of the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.6 seconds×3 times) when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 .

"Time-saving game state" is a game state in which special symbol determination is performed in the above-described low-probability state and an electric chew support function is provided. That is, in the time-saving gaming state, the probability that the special symbol determination determines that the big winning game is executed is set to a relatively low probability (for example, about 1/200). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal design determination is set to a relatively high probability (eg 12/12), and the fluctuation time of the normal design is relatively short (eg 2 seconds). and the opening time of the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.6 seconds×3 times) when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 .

Comparing each game state with respect to the variation time of the special symbols, the variation time of the special symbols in the "probability variable game state" and the "time-saving game state" is relatively shorter than the variation time of the special symbols in the "normal game state". Easy to set on time.

In addition, the probability of being determined to execute a special game (jackpot probability), the probability of being determined to open the second start port 12 (winning probability of normal symbol determination), and the variation of normal symbols The time and the opening time of the second starting port 12 are merely examples, and it goes without saying that other probabilities and times may be used.

In the following description, the state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 12 due to the provision of the electric chew support function is called a "high base state", and the electric chew support function is provided. A state in which it is not easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 12 due to the lack of the base state is called a "low base state".

A game ball hit to the right by the player does not enter the first starting hole 11, but enters the second starting hole 12. - 特許庁However, in the low base state, it is difficult to open the second starting port 12, and even if it is opened, the opening time is short. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the low base state (corresponding to the "normal game state" in the present embodiment), the player will play the game by hitting the first start port 11 to the left. Become.

When the game ball struck left in the normal game state wins the first starting port 11, the first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is variably displayed, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is displayed. As the first special symbol to be shown, a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol is stopped and displayed.

Here, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big win game is not performed, and the game state does not change. On the other hand, when a jackpot symbol indicating "probability variable jackpot" is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a jackpot game is executed in which a long open round game is performed a predetermined number of times according to the jackpot pattern, and after the jackpot game ends, The game is controlled in the probability variable game state. In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured as a gaming machine called a probability variable loop type, and after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable game state basically continues until the next jackpot.

When the game state shifts to the variable probability game state, that is, when the low base state shifts to the high base state, the second start port 12 makes it easier for the game ball to win than the first start port 11. . Therefore, when the game is controlled in the high base state, the player plays the game by hitting the right hand aiming at the second starting hole 12 . This is the same when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, and basically, the second special symbol determination is performed in the variable probability game state and the normal game state.

When the jackpot symbol indicating "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state, the game is controlled again in the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game ends, and "normal jackpot" is displayed as the second special symbol. When the big winning pattern shown is stopped and displayed, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state after the big winning game ends.

On the other hand, in the normal game state, when a jackpot symbol indicating "normal jackpot" is stop-displayed as the first special symbol, a jackpot game is executed in which a long open round game is performed a predetermined number of times according to the jackpot symbol, and the jackpot game is played. After the end, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state. And, in this time-saving game state, even if the special symbol determination (basically the second special symbol determination) is performed 50 times (an example of the prescribed number of times in FIG. 5), if it is not determined to be a big hit, the game state shifts from the time-saving game state to the normal game state.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, when it is determined as a big hit in the second special symbol determination within 50 times, and when the big hit symbol indicating "probability variable big hit" is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, it is determined according to the big hit symbol. After the jackpot game is finished, the game is controlled in the variable probability game state. In addition, when the jackpot pattern indicating "normal jackpot" is stopped and displayed as the second special pattern, after the jackpot game including the long opening round game for a predetermined number of times according to the jackpot pattern is finished, the time saving game state is resumed. The game will be controlled by

As is clear from the description so far, the main CPU 101 can control the game in one of the three game states of the normal game state, the variable probability game state, and the time saving game state. In addition, after executing the jackpot game, it is possible to control the game in one of the two types of game states, the variable probability game state and the time-saving game state.

In another embodiment, for example, a new jackpot in which the game is controlled in the normal game state after the jackpot game ends is provided, and after the jackpot game ends, the variable probability game state, the time-saving game state, and the normal game state. You may employ|adopt the structure which can control a game in one of the game states of a game state.

[Regarding special symbol judgment using random numbers]
Next, referring to FIG. 6, the special symbol determination using the jackpot random number and the symbol random number will be described. Here, FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various random numbers used for special symbol determination.

The jackpot random numbers exemplified in FIG. 6(A) are random numbers used in the jackpot determination process (step S309 in FIG. 41) for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game, and the probability that the jackpot game will be executed is A relatively low low-probability state and a high-probability state with a relatively high probability of being determined to execute a jackpot game are individually set.

In this embodiment, two winning values "0" and "1" are stored in the main ROM 102 for the low-probability state, and the main CPU 101 acquires the winning value when the game is controlled in the low-probability state. When the jackpot random number matches one of these two winning values, it is determined that the jackpot game is executed. In addition, regarding the high probability state, in this embodiment, eight winning values of "0" to "7" are stored in the main ROM 102, and the jackpot random number obtained when the game is controlled in the high probability state is If it matches with any one of these eight winning values, it is determined that a big win game is to be executed.

Incidentally, the possible range of the jackpot random number is "0" to "399" in this embodiment in both the low probability state and the high probability state. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/200 (=2/400), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/50 (=8/400). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the probability is high, the jackpot is four times more likely to occur than when the probability is low.

When the main CPU 101 determines that a jackpot game is to be executed, the symbol random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used for the determination matches which random number among the random numbers set in advance for each type of jackpot. to determine the type of jackpot.

It should be noted that, for example, the jackpot probability may be set to a different probability by the hall clerk performing a predetermined operation. For example, when the game machine 1 is powered on, a set value switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game control board 100 is operated (for example, pressed), and a set value related to the probability of a big hit is set. (for example, any value from "1" to "3"). The set value switch is, for example, a switch for setting the jackpot probability to different probabilities.

For example, the larger the set value is, the easier it is to win a big win, and the ratio between the big win probability in the high probability state and the big win probability in the low probability state may be fixed regardless of the set value. For example, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is set to 1/220 when the set value is "1", is set to 1/200 when the set value is "2", and is set to " 3" is set to 1/180. Also, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is set to 1/27.5 (= 1/220 x 8 times) when the set value is "1", and when the set value is "2" It is set to 1/25 (=1/200×8 times), and when the set value is "3", it is set to 1/22.5 (=1/180×8 times).

(Types of jackpots related to the first special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6(B), in this embodiment, three types of "16R probability variable jackpot", "6R probability variable jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot" are prepared as types of jackpots by winning the first starting gate. It is Here, the "16R probability variable jackpot" (16R probability variable) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in the probability variable gaming state after the jackpot game in which the long opening round game is performed 16 times is executed. "6R probability variable jackpot" (6R probability variable) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in the probability variable game state after the jackpot game performing six long open round games is executed. The “6R normal jackpot” (6R normal) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in a time-saving game state after a jackpot game of six long open round games is executed.

As illustrated in FIG. 6B, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, a random value for determining the type of jackpot is stored in the main ROM 102. ing. Specifically, 10 random numbers of "0" to "9" are stored for the 16R probability variation, 110 random values of "10" to "119" are stored for the 6R probability variation, and 6R 80 random numbers from "120" to "199" are stored for normal.

In this embodiment, the possible range of symbol random numbers is set to "0" to "199". Therefore, when it is determined that the jackpot is determined according to the first starting gate winning prize, the percentage of the jackpot type determined to be 16R probability variation is 5% (= 10/200 × 100), and the jackpot type is 6R probability variation The percentage determined is 55% (=110/200×100), and the percentage that the type of jackpot is normally determined as 6R is 40% (=80/200×100).

For this reason, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, the ratio of stop-displaying the big hit symbol X1 indicating the 16R probability variation as the first special symbol is 5%, and the jackpot symbol X2 indicating the 6R probability variation is 5%. The percentage of stop-display is 55%, and the percentage of stop-display of the jackpot symbol X3 indicating 6R normal is 40%.

When these three types of jackpots are compared in terms of the number of winning balls that the player can obtain, the following can be said. That is, for example, assuming that 15 prize balls are paid out each time a game ball enters the big winning hole 13, and that one long open round game ends when 8 game balls win, 16R In probability variation, the player can win 1920 (=15×8×16) prize balls. Also, in the same assumption, the player can win 720 (=15×8×6) prize balls in 6R normal and 6R variable probability.

(Types of jackpots related to second special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6 (C), in the present embodiment, the types of jackpots by the second starting gate winning are "16R variable jackpot", "8R variable jackpot", "4R variable jackpot", and "8R normal jackpot". ” are available. Here, the big win game performed when "16R probability variable big win" (16R probability variable) is achieved and the game state after that are the same as when the big win symbol X1 is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the "8R probability variable jackpot" (8R probability variable) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in the probability variable gaming state after the jackpot game performing eight long open round games is executed. "4R probability variable jackpot" (4R probability variable) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in a probability variable gaming state after a jackpot game that performs a long open round game four times is executed. The "8R normal jackpot" (8R normal) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in a time-saving game state after the jackpot game of eight long open round games is executed.

As illustrated in FIG. 6(C), in this embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, a random value for determining the type of jackpot is stored in the main ROM 102. ing. Specifically, 80 random numbers of "0" to "79" are stored for the 16R probability variation, 20 random values of "80" to "99" are stored for the 8R probability variation, and 4R 20 random numbers from "110" to "119" are stored for the probability variation, and 80 random numbers from "120" to "199" are stored for the 8R normal.

Here, in the present embodiment, the possible range of the symbol random numbers related to the second special symbol determination is common to the possible range of the symbol random numbers related to the second special symbol determination. Therefore, when it is determined that the jackpot is determined according to the second starting gate winning prize, the percentage of the jackpot type determined to be 16R probability variation is 40% (= 80/200 × 100), and the jackpot type is 8R probability variation. The percentage determined is 10% (=20/200×100), the percentage of the jackpot type determined to be 4R probability variable is also 10% (=20/200×100), and the jackpot type is 8R normal is 40% (=80/200×100).

For this reason, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit, the percentage of stop display of the big hit symbol Y1 indicating the 16R probability variation as the second special symbol is 40%, and the jackpot symbol Y2 indicating the 8R probability variation is 40%. The rate of static display is 10%, the rate of static display of the jackpot symbol Y3 indicating 4R probability variation is 10%, and the rate of static display of the jackpot symbol Y4 indicating 8R normal is 40%.

When these four types of jackpots are compared with the number of winning balls that the player can obtain, the following can be said. That is, for example, assuming that 15 prize balls are paid out each time a game ball enters the big winning hole 13, and that one long open round game ends when 8 game balls win, 16R In probability variation, the player can win 1920 (=15×8×16) prize balls, as in the case where the jackpot symbol X1 is stopped and displayed. Further, in the same assumption, the player can win 960 (=15×8×8) prize balls in the 8R variable probability and the 8R normal. Also, in the 4R probability variation, the player can win 480 (=15×8×4) prize balls.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment provides 4R jackpot games in which the player can win 480 prize balls and 6R jackpot games in which the player can win 720 prize balls. A game, an 8R jackpot game in which the player can win 960 prize balls, and a 16R jackpot game in which the player can win 1920 prize balls can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the odd number patterns (1 pattern, 3 patterns, 5 patterns, 7 patterns, 9 patterns) in which the numbers constituting the decorative patterns are green odd numbers function as probability variation patterns. In addition, the even number patterns (2 patterns, 4 patterns, 6 patterns, 8 patterns) in which the numbers constituting the decorative patterns are blue even numbers function as normal patterns. The 7 symbols are used for the winning notification effect only when the 16R probability variation is achieved. Therefore, in the normal game state or the variable probability game state, when the jackpot patterns X1 and Y1 corresponding to the 16R probability variable are actually stopped, the three decorative patterns showing the double eyes of "777" are actually stopped, and other probability variable jackpots. When the jackpot symbols X2, Y2, Y3 corresponding to . will stop. Also, when the jackpot symbols X3 and Y4 corresponding to the 6R normal and 8R normal are permanently stopped, the three decorative symbols representing the even-numbered symbols are permanently stopped.

Incidentally, the type of jackpot is not limited to those described above, and any mode may be used as long as the player can be in an advantageous state according to the determination result of the special symbol determination. For example, the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbols X1 and Y1 is performed 10 times of long open round games (for example, the player can win 1500 (=15×8×10) prize balls), and immediately after the jackpot game ends. It may be a jackpot in which the game is controlled in the variable probability game state.

[Flow of production in normal game state]
Hereinafter, referring to FIG. 7, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, an effect performed between the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the stop display of the first special symbol I will explain the flow of Here, FIG. 7 is a flow chart illustrating the flow of effects in the normal game state.

As described above, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the player hits to the left with the aim of winning the game ball into the first start hole 11 . On the other hand, the main CPU 101 executes the first special symbol determination when the game ball wins in the first starting port 11 . In this first special symbol determination, in addition to the process of determining whether or not the jackpot is determined based on FIG. 6 and the process of determining the type of the jackpot in the case of a jackpot, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected. Processing is included, and the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

In response to this, the sub CPU 131 receives a variation start command including information indicating the result of the first special symbol determination from the game control board 100, and based on this information, the liquid crystal screen 5, the speaker 24, the board lamp 25, A performance pattern of performance performed using various performance means such as a frame lamp 37 and a performance accessory 7 is set. Then, the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 perform processing for realizing effects based on these settings.

When the first special symbol determination is made, on the liquid crystal screen 5, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started (see FIG. 7A). Here, if it is determined at the start of symbol variation to perform a no-reach production, for example, a no-reach production is performed in which the left pattern and the right pattern do not form a ready-to-win state and are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 7(B) ). Examples of this non-reach production include a production in which 2 patterns as left patterns are pseudo-stopped, followed by a production in which 5 patterns as the right pattern are pseudo-stopped, and a production in which 6 patterns as the left pattern and 4 patterns as the right pattern are pseudo-stopped at the same time. mentioned. When this no-reach effect is performed, in most cases, a loss notification effect is performed in which the three decorative patterns showing loose stitches are stopped after a false stop (see FIG. 7(C)). In this embodiment, the same (or similar) effect as the pre-reach effect is executed as the non-reach effect, except that the reach does not occur. For this reason, until the variation display indicates that there is no possibility of establishment of the ready-to-win state by the actual stop of the decorative pattern, the game is checked whether the no-to-reach effect is being executed or the effect before the ready-to-win state is being executed. person cannot distinguish.

On the other hand, if it is determined at the start of symbol variation that the ready-to-win effect is to be performed, for example, the decoration symbols common to each other as the left and right symbols are pseudo-stopped and ready-to-win is established (see FIG. 7(D)). A normal reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "normal reach") is performed (see FIG. 7(E)). This normal ready-to-win effect is a ready-to-win effect that heightens the player's expectation for the middle symbol, which is the same as the ready-to-win symbol, to stop on the effective line connecting the two ready-to-win symbols (see FIG. 10(D)). When this normal reach is performed, the scroll speed of the middle pattern row scrolled at high speed gradually decreases. For example, when ready-to-win is established with 3 symbols (see FIG. 10(C)), when 3 symbols as medium symbols are pseudo-stopped on the effective line and then real stop is made with 2 ready-to-win symbols, "333 , and the jackpot is announced (see FIG. 7(H)). On the other hand, when a middle symbol different from the ready-to-win symbol on the active line is pseudo-stopped and then the real stop is made along with two ready-to-win symbols, for example, a winning losing number such as "343" is stopped and notified of the loss (Fig. 7(C)).

On the other hand, if the scroll display in the middle row continues even after the decoration pattern same as the ready-to-win pattern has passed the effective line, the normal reach to character SP ready-to-reach production (hereinafter abbreviated as "character SP ready-to-win") will be produced. will develop (see FIG. 7(F)). This character SP reach is a reach production with a higher reliability for big hits than normal reach. In the character SP reach in this embodiment, the following effects are performed. That is, when the game develops into character SP reach, a title related to character SP reach is displayed, which is not shown in the figure, and which displays a message such as "Take back the treasure box from the enemy!". Then, a scramble effect is performed in which the user's character (hereinafter referred to as "own character") and the enemy character (hereinafter referred to as "enemy character") compete for the treasure box (FIG. 7 (F-1), FIG. 13(A)).

As a result effect of this contest effect, a contest failure effect (see FIG. 7 (F-2)) or a contest success effect (see FIG. 7 (F-5)) is performed. Here, the contention failure effect is configured, for example, as an effect display showing how the character loses the contention with the enemy character (see FIG. 13(B)). When this capture failure production is executed, a development suggestive production (Fig. 7 (F) -4)), or a non-development suggestive effect (see FIG. 7 (F-3)) that suggests that character SP reach will not develop into SP SP reach. This non-expansion-suggesting effect is configured, for example, as a effect display showing how the enemy character who has stolen the treasure box escapes (see FIG. 13(C)). When this non-development suggestive effect is performed, there is no possibility that a big win will be reported, and a loss will be reported by making a real stop after the reach losing eye (for example, "343") stops artificially (Fig. 7). (G)). On the other hand, the development suggestion production is configured as a production display showing, for example, a situation in which an ally character (ally character) comes to help the own character, the own character stands up, and then chases after the escaped enemy character (Fig. 13(E) and (F)). Then, when this development suggestion production is performed, it develops into SPSP Reach, which shows how your character discovers the escaped enemy character and the battle between your character and the enemy character unfolds (Fig. 7 (I) )reference).

This SPSP reach is a reach effect with a higher degree of hit reliability than normal reach and SP reach, and when your character wins a battle with an enemy character, the patterns are aligned and a big hit is announced (see FIG. 7 (H)). , When the player's character is defeated by the enemy character, the reach-losing eye is pseudo-stopped, then the real stop is made, and the loosing is announced (see FIG. 7(G)).

As is clear from the description so far, the capture failure effect (see FIG. 7 (F-2)) can be executed both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit and when it is a loss. However, once the performance progresses to the non-development suggestive performance, the jackpot notification is not performed thereafter. On the other hand, when the presentation progresses from the take-failure presentation to the development-suggestion presentation, in the subsequent SPSP reach, there are cases where a big win announcement is made and a loss announcement is made. In other words, when the production progresses to a non-development-suggestion production, there is no possibility of a big win, whereas when the production progresses to a development-suggestion production, the possibility of a big win remains. ing.

Therefore, when the contention failure effect is performed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the development-suggestion effect will be performed instead of the non-development-suggestion effect.

On the other hand, the capture success effect (see FIG. 7(F-5)) is configured as a effect display showing, for example, how the self character wins the enemy character and successfully captures the treasure box (FIGS. 13(A) and 13(F-5)). (See (H)), when this capture success effect is performed, a double number is formed immediately after the capture success effect without performing the effect display showing that the scroll speed of the middle pattern row is decreasing. After the three decorative symbols to be stopped are pseudo-stopped, they are immediately stopped (see FIGS. 13(H) and (I)).

In this way, when the seizure success effect is performed, the hit notification effect for notifying that it is determined to execute the jackpot game is executed. For this reason, when the contest develops, the player can first enjoy the game while expecting that the capture success presentation will be performed instead of the capture failure presentation.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effect called "next notice" may be performed during normal reach (see FIG. 7(K)). This next notice is a production that suggests that it will develop into SPSP reach later, and when the next notice is given, normal reach will develop directly into SPSP reach without going through character SP reach (Fig. 7 ( E), (K), (I)).

On the other hand, as a result of the first special symbol determination, in a part of the case where the probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation in FIG. 6 (B)) is won, no reach effect (see FIG. 7 (B)) is performed. After that, there is a case where a hit performance (see FIG. 7(J)) is performed and a big hit notification (see FIG. 7(H)) is performed immediately after that. This hitting effect is one of the advance notice effects for notifying that the jackpot game will be executed prior to the stop display of the jackpot pattern as the first special pattern, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. However, it is configured as an effect that suddenly the pattern (probability variation pattern in this embodiment) is aligned. Since the hit performance is configured as a performance in which three probability variable patterns forming double eyes suddenly pop out, it is a suggestive performance suggesting that the game is controlled in a probability variable game state after the jackpot game is completed. have a function.

In this way, by performing the sudden hit effect immediately after performing the no reach effect, it is possible to make the player, who was not expecting a big win at all based on the fact that the reach is not established, feel unexpectedness and surprise. It is possible, and as a result, it is possible to obtain a high performance effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation or 6R probability variation, it is possible to execute a collision production, but when it is 6R normal, a configuration that does not execute a collision production is adopted. In other words, the hit effect can be executed when the odd numbered symbol matching is permanently stopped with the stop display of the first special symbol, but is not executed when the even numbered symbol matching is permanently stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a surprise that the symbols have suddenly come together, and after the jackpot game ends, a more advantageous game state (probability variable game state) compared to the 6R normal. Since the game is controlled, it is possible to effectively improve the player's joy of winning the jackpot.

On the other hand, in another embodiment, it is possible to employ a configuration in which a collision effect can be executed only in the case of 16R probability variation, and a collision effect is not executed in the case of 6R probability variation or 6R normal. Moreover, regardless of the type of jackpot, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, a configuration that can execute a hit performance may be adopted. However, in the case of adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player who desires a certain variable big win feel sufficient joy when performing a sudden hit production in which the even-numbered patterns that function as normal patterns are suddenly aligned. As a result, there is a possibility that a high production effect cannot be obtained. For this reason, it is preferable to employ a configuration in which at least the sudden hit effect can be executed in the case of the variable probability jackpot, but the sudden hit effect is not executed in the case of the normal jackpot.

Regarding the series of effects illustrated in FIG. 7, the flow of effects from the start of fluctuation in FIG. 7 (A) to the notification of the big hit in FIG. C) and (G) flow of production up to notification of loss is the result of determination of whether or not to execute a jackpot game, the result of determination of whether or not to perform a reach production, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Based on this, the sub CPU 131 sets.

Also, the specific effects described with reference to FIG. 7 are merely examples, and each effect may be another effect. For example, the scramble effect may be an effect that displays a display showing that the player character is about to be robbed of the mobile phone by the enemy character, but is trying to take it back. In this case, a production display showing how your character successfully recaptures the mobile phone from the enemy character is executed as a takeover success production, and conversely, it shows how your character has the mobile phone stolen by the enemy character. It is conceivable to execute an effect for performing an effect display as a capture failure effect. In addition, the character SP reach is not a production that starts with a contest production, but a production display that simply shows that your character is trying to destroy a middle pattern that is different from the reach pattern. In this case, the pattern may be aligned, and if the destruction fails, the reach failure may be displayed.

Further, in another embodiment, an effect pattern may be prepared in which reach establishment directly progresses to character SP reach or SP SP reach without going through normal reach.

[Flow of production in variable probability game state]
Next, referring to FIG. 8, when the game is controlled in the variable probability game state, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Explain the flow of production. Here, FIG. 8 is a flow chart illustrating the flow of production in the variable probability gaming state.

As described above, when the game is controlled in the variable probability game state, the player hits to the right with the aim of winning the game ball into the second starting hole 12 . On the other hand, the main CPU 101 executes the second special symbol determination when the game ball wins in the second starting port 12 . In this second special symbol determination, in addition to the process of determining whether or not the jackpot is the above based on FIG. 6 and the process of determining the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected. Processing is included, and the variation time of the second special symbol is determined by selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 receives a variation start command including information indicating the result of the second special symbol determination from the game control board 100, and based on this information, the liquid crystal screen 5, the speaker 24, the board lamp 25, A performance pattern of performance performed using various performance means such as a frame lamp 37 and a performance accessory 7 is set. Then, the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 perform processing for realizing effects based on these settings.

When the second special symbol determination is made, the liquid crystal screen 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols along with the start of the variable display of the second special symbols (see FIG. 8A). Here, if it is determined at the start of the pattern variation to perform the no-reach production, for example, the no-reach production is performed in which the left pattern and the right pattern do not form the ready-to-win state and are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 8 (B) ). Since this no-reach effect can be similar to the no-reach effect described based on FIG. 7(B), detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In this way, when the no-reach effect is performed in the variable probability game state, the three decorative patterns forming the loose eyes are mostly stopped after the false stop, and then the loss notification effect is performed (Fig. 8 (C) )reference).

On the other hand, if it is decided at the start of the symbol variation to perform the ready-to-win effect, for example, the decorative symbols common to each other as the left and right symbols are pseudo-stopped to establish the ready-to-win (see FIG. 8(D)). A battle reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as “battle reach”) is performed (see FIG. 8(E)). This battle reach is a reach production in which the player character and the enemy character battle, and when a victory suggestive production (see FIG. 8 (F)) showing the player character winning the enemy character is performed, the probability variable jackpot is generated. It is notified (see FIG. 8(G)). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, odd patterns (1 pattern, 3 patterns, 5 patterns, 7 patterns, 9 patterns) function as probability variation patterns, and even patterns (2 patterns, 4 patterns, 6 patterns) , 8 symbols) function as normal symbols. For this reason, in the variable probability jackpot notification of FIG. 8(G), an effect display is performed in which the three decorative symbols, which are odd-numbered symbols and are aligned, are stopped after pseudo-stopping.

In addition, the victory suggesting effect is performed when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is the probability variable jackpot, and when the probability variable jackpot is notified by performing this victory suggesting effect, the probability variable gaming state is continued. .

On the other hand, following the battle reach, there is a case where a defeat suggestive effect (see FIG. 8(H)) showing how the player's character is defeated by the enemy character is performed. Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a normal jackpot, a normal winning notification is performed in which the three decorative symbols, which are even-numbered symbols and are aligned, are stopped after pseudo-stopping (Fig. 8) (I)). In addition, the display mode of the decorative pattern used for the normal jackpot notification is not limited to this. may be used.

Further, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probability variable jackpot, a resurrection effect (see FIG. 8(J)) may be performed following the defeat suggestion effect. This resurrection effect is configured as a effect display showing how the own character, which was defeated by the enemy character and fell down, is revived by the appearance of the ally character and stands up. When this resurrection effect is performed, the above-described victory suggesting effect (see FIG. 8(F)) is performed, and the probability variable jackpot notification (see FIG. 8(G)) is performed.

In the present embodiment, the revival effect is performed only when the jackpot symbol Y1 (see FIG. 6(C)) is stopped and displayed at a 16R probability variation, and the revival effect is performed. At that point, the winning of the 16R probability variation becomes rich. Therefore, the resurrection effect can be regarded as an advance notice effect (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot notice") that foretells that a jackpot game will be executed. In addition, the jackpot notice is a production that can be executed when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "big hit", and is not executed when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "loss", the reliability of the jackpot is It is 100% production. In this embodiment, many jackpot notices are prepared in addition to the resurrection effect, and these jackpot notices will also be explained as appropriate in this specification.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured as a gaming machine called a battle type, and in the variable probability game state, it is configured so that reach is not established unless some kind of jackpot such as a variable probability jackpot or a normal jackpot is won. If your character wins the enemy character, the variable game state will continue, and if your character is defeated by the enemy character, the variable game state will end and you will fall into a time-saving game state. there is

On the other hand, as a result of the second special symbol determination, in a part of the case where the probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation in FIG. 6 (C)) is won, no reach effect (see FIG. 8 (B)) is performed. After that, there is a case where the hit effect (see FIG. 8(K)) is performed and the probability variable jackpot notification (see FIG. 8(G)) is performed immediately after that. In other words, the hit effect can be executed when the 7-symbol matching is permanently stopped with the stop display of the second special symbol, but is not executed when the other symbols than the 7-symbol matching are permanently stopped. This hit effect is one of the advance notice effects for notifying that the big win game will be executed prior to the stop display of the big win pattern as the second special pattern, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. However, it is configured as a production that suddenly has patterns (variable patterns).

In this way, by performing the sudden hit effect immediately after performing the no reach effect, it is possible to make the player, who was not expecting a big win at all based on the fact that the reach is not established, feel unexpectedness and surprise. It is possible, and as a result, it is possible to obtain a high performance effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, when the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, and 4R probability variation, it is possible to execute a collision effect, and when it is 8R normal It adopts a configuration that does not execute a hit production. On the other hand, in another embodiment, in the variable probability game state, it is possible to execute a hit performance only when it is a 16R probability change, and when it is another jackpot such as an 8R probability change, a 4R probability change, or an 8R normal hit. You may employ|adopt the structure which does not perform production|presentation. In addition, regardless of the type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination, a configuration that can execute a hit production may be adopted.

Regarding the series of effects illustrated in FIG. 8, the flow of effects from the start of fluctuation in FIG. 8A to the loss notification in FIG. ), the flow of effects from the start of variation in FIG. 8A to the normal hit notification in FIG. As a result, it is set by the sub CPU 131 based on the determination result of whether or not to perform the effect with reach, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

[Regarding the decorativeness of decorative patterns]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the decorativeness of the decorative symbols in the normal game state and the variable probability game state will be described. Here, FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the decorativeness of the decorative design.

(Decorativeness of decorative patterns in normal game state)
When the game is controlled in the normal game state, decorative symbols with the following display modes are displayed in each performance section during the variable display of the first special symbols. That is, before ready-to-win, which is a presentation period from the start of the variable display of decorative patterns to establishment of ready-to-win, decorative patterns with characters attached to large numbers are displayed, although they are not shown in the drawing. This is the same during the normal reach accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10(D)).

On the other hand, during the character SP reach or SPSP reach accompanying the variable display of the first special pattern, a decoration pattern consisting of small numbers with no characters attached is displayed. That is, when normal reach develops into character SP reach or SP reach, the character deviates from the decorative pattern consisting of a large number to which the character is attached, and the decorative pattern (number) decreases from the center of the screen to the screen. Move to the periphery (see, for example, FIGS. 10(E) to 10(G)). This character is a display (hereinafter referred to as "additional display") that is superimposed behind the numbers (green or blue in this embodiment) that make up the decorative pattern. different.

In the following description, the decorative pattern consisting of large numbers with characters attached is called "decorative pattern of the first mode", and the decorative pattern consisting of small numbers without characters is referred to as "second mode decorative pattern". call.

For example, when the decorative pattern of the first mode is pseudo-stopped, and when the decorative pattern of the first mode changes to the decorative pattern of the second mode (and vice versa), it is an additional display. The character's hands and feet move, and poses are decided in style. However, when scrolling, the hands and feet of the character, which are additional displays, do not move or take a pose regardless of the scrolling speed. Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the numerals constituting the decorative symbol become a static image, and the character, which is the additional display, does not move at all and becomes a static image. In another embodiment, while the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the numbers that make up the decorative symbols become static images, while the characters that are additionally displayed may be dressed up and pose.

In addition, at the time of winning/losing notification to stop display of the decorative pattern in the form of notifying the jackpot or loss along with the stop display of the first special pattern, the decorative pattern in the display mode common to before reach is displayed (for example, FIG. 11 (E ), see (H)). Therefore, when the winning notification effect or the losing notification effect is performed following the character SP ready-to-reach or SPSP ready-to-reach, for example, the display mode of the decorative pattern is opposite to that illustrated in FIG. 10(F). change occurs. That is, the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the second mode) consisting of small numbers without characters is moved from the periphery of the screen to the center of the screen while increasing, and the characters are attached to the decorative patterns (numbers). be done. The decorative pattern is expanded from the state of the decorative pattern of the second mode to the state of the decorative pattern of the second mode enlarged three times, and then becomes the state of the decorative pattern of the first mode. The decorative pattern of the second mode, which is magnified three times, and the decorative pattern of the first mode may have approximately the same vertical and horizontal sizes.

As is clear from the description so far, in the normal game state, the normal reach is displayed before the reach to display the decorative patterns in which the numbers constituting the decorative patterns are large and the characters are attached (that is, the decorative patterns of the first mode) are displayed. It can be said that the decoration of the decorative pattern is high at the middle and at the time of winning/losing notification. On the other hand, in Character SP Reach and SPSP Reach, since the production using objects different from decorative patterns such as characters and items is developed, small numbers without characters are used so as not to interfere with this production. (that is, the decorative pattern of the second mode) is displayed on the periphery of the screen, the decorative pattern is suppressed from lowering the visibility of the effect image used for the above effect.

(Decorativeness of decorative patterns in variable probability gaming state)
When the game is controlled in the variable probability game state, for example, the decorative symbols of the second mode are variably displayed in synchronization with the variably displayed second special symbols. Concretely, as shown in FIG. 9, in each performance section during the variable display of the second special symbol, decorative symbols having the following display modes are displayed. That is, before reach, which is a production period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the establishment of reach, is not shown in the figure, but a decorative pattern in which a character is not attached to a large number (specifically , a decorative design obtained by enlarging the decorative design of the second mode by a factor of three) is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 15(C)). This is the same for the hit-or-lose notification when the decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is permanently stopped along with the final stop of the second special symbol. The "decorative design in which the decorative design in the second mode is enlarged three times" may be displayed by enlarging the decorative design in the second mode, or in a state in which the decorative design in the second mode is enlarged by three times. is prepared in advance in the control ROM 144 of the image sound control board 140 separately from the image data relating to the decorative pattern of the second aspect, and this data may be used for display.

It should be noted that, in the variable probability gaming state, whether the reach is established with the variable probability pattern or whether the reach is established with the normal pattern is the object of the first interest of the player. Also, in the probability variation gaming state, the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 6 (A)), and the variation time of the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is more than the variation time of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. is relatively short, and in the variable probability game state, the performance is developed at a good tempo, and the winning or losing is reported in a relatively short time after the big winning game is finished. For these reasons, in the variable probability gaming state, there is little need to increase the decorativeness of the decorative symbols more than necessary, and in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which characters are not attached to the numbers constituting the decorative symbols.

On the other hand, in the probability variable game state, when reach is established and develops into battle reach, a battle between the self character and the enemy character develops on the screen center of the liquid crystal screen 5.例文帳に追加For this reason, if a decorative pattern with a large number is displayed in the center of the screen, even though it does not have a character, it will hinder the performance of the battle. For this reason, during battle reach, the size and display position of the decoration pattern are changed in order to display the decoration pattern of the second mode in the same manner as during character SP reach and SPSP reach in the normal game state. That is, the state of the decorative pattern of the second mode enlarged by 3 times is reduced to the same size as the decorative pattern of the second mode during character SP reach or SPSP reach, when the battle reach is developed. The decorative pattern of the second mode, which is not enlarged, is displayed on the periphery of the screen.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 9, before reach and at the time of winning and losing notification in the variable probability game state, although the numbers that make up the decorative pattern are displayed large, it is common to before reaching and at the time of winning and losing notification in the normal game state. , differ in that no characters are attached. In addition, when compared to character SP reaching and SPSP reaching in the normal game state, the fact that no character is attached is common, but the difference is that the numbers constituting the decorative symbols are large. From these things, it can be said that the decoration design displayed before the reach in the variable probability gaming state or at the time of the hit-or-lose notification has moderate decorativeness. On the other hand, during battle reach, the numbers that make up the decorative patterns are small and characters are not given, which is the same as during character SP reach and SPSP reach, so the decoration of the decorative patterns displayed during battle reach sex can be said to be low.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment performs control to change the display mode of the decorative symbols in order to change the decorativeness of the decorative symbols in accordance with the display effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 . Specifically, the state of the decorative design of the first mode becomes the state of the decorative design of the second mode, or the state of the decorative design of the second mode becomes the state of the decorative design of the first mode. do. Both the decorative design of the first mode and the decorative design of the second mode may be displayed at the same time. For example, in normal reach, the pseudo-stopped left and right symbols are the decorative symbols of the first mode, and the middle symbols that are slowly scrolled downward are the decorative symbols of the second mode (for example, enlarged with scrolling). or may be reduced).

[Specific example: Pattern that develops from normal reach to SPSP reach]
10 and 11 are screen diagrams showing a specific example of an effect that develops into SPSP reach via normal reach. FIG. 12 is a time chart showing a specific example of the display mode of the decorative symbols when the promotion effect is executed.

In FIG. 10(A), two reserved icons are displayed in the first reserved icon display area 51, and the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is lost. A state in which a failure notification effect is performed in which a decorative pattern in a mode indicating that there is a winning state is stopped and displayed is exemplified. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as green pending.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the start of the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, the first Special symbol determination is executed. Accordingly, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 is shifted to the area 53, and the second pending icon is shifted to the position where the first pending icon was displayed. A shift process is performed to cause the number to shift, and along with this, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started (see FIGS. 10A and 10B).

Here, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started, if a variable performance pattern is set to develop SPSP reach via normal reach, the following performance is performed, for example.

That is, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the variable display of the decorative symbols, first the three left symbols are simulated to stop, and then the same three symbols are simulated to stop as the right symbols, and the ready-to-win state is established (Fig. 10(C)). reference). When reach is established in this way, the above-described normal reach is performed (see FIG. 10(D)).

During this normal reach, when the same middle symbols (three symbols in this case) as the ready-to-win symbols pass through the active line as a result of the scroll display of the middle row of symbols, the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols increases after that. It may develop into SPSP reach (see FIGS. 10E to 10G). At that time, the three pattern rows displayed large in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 are reduced while maintaining the reach state and moved to the upper left area of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 10(F)). The decorative pattern is the decorative pattern of the first mode, first becomes the decorative pattern of the second mode enlarged three times, and then reduced to the decorative pattern of the second mode that is not enlarged. be in a certain state. When the size and the display area of the three pattern rows are changed in this way (that is, when the state of the decorative pattern of the first mode is changed to the state of the decorative pattern of the second mode), the liquid crystal screen SPSP reach is executed using the screen center area of 5 (see FIG. 10(G)).

In the present embodiment, while the ready-to-win pattern (decorative pattern of the second mode) is pseudo-stopped in the upper left area of the liquid crystal screen 5, the middle pattern continues to be scrolled at high speed. When the decorative patterns of the first mode are displayed, the scroll speed is slowed down or sped up in order to draw attention to the movement of the medium patterns. Even if the scroll speed is changed, it is difficult to understand, and there is a possibility that the production effect cannot be effectively improved. Therefore, when the decorative pattern of the second mode is displayed, the display mode of the middle pattern is different from that when the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed. Specifically, when the decoration pattern of the second mode is displayed, the scroll speed of the medium pattern is made constant (high speed fluctuation). In another embodiment, when the decoration pattern of the second mode is displayed, the scroll speed of the middle pattern may be slowed down (or fast), or the middle pattern during high speed fluctuation may be hidden. good too. Further, the speed at which the decorative symbols of the second aspect are scrolled at high speed may be faster (or slower) than the speed at which the decorative symbols of the first aspect are scrolled at high speed, or both may be the same speed.

Also, the ready-to-win pattern (decorative pattern of the second mode) displayed in the upper left area of the liquid crystal screen 5 is displayed in front of other effect images. Therefore, for example, when another effect image is displayed on the entire screen, the ready-to-win pattern is superimposed and displayed on the near side. Incidentally, by displaying only the ready-to-win symbols in the upper left area of the liquid crystal screen 5, the ready-to-win symbols may be visible even if another effect image is displayed.

FIG. 10(G) shows two self-characters and an enemy character facing each other. Title display for displaying a ready-to-win title related to the ready-to-win effect is performed. Then, a battle production is started showing how the self character and the enemy character battle.

While the SPSP reach is being performed in this way, at the end of the SPSP reach, an operation prompting effect is performed (see FIG. 10(H)). This operation promotion effect is a effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26. Specifically, for example, a button image imitating the effect button 26, a message such as "Press!" It is configured as an effect of displaying a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period in which the button operation is valid.

Here, when the player performs an operation within the valid period, an effect called cut-in is performed as an effect corresponding to the operation (see FIG. 10(I)). Here, the cut-in is configured as an effect in which a specific effect image is displayed superimposed on the effect image related to the SPSP ready-to-win, and the display mode of the specific effect image suggests the reliability of the big win. As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, a blue cut-in that suggests that the jackpot reliability is about 10%, a red cut-in that the jackpot reliability is about 60%, and a jackpot reliability of 100% A rainbow cut-in suggesting is prepared, and one of these three cut-ins is executed according to the operation based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which cut-in does not occur unless the player performs an operation. A configuration that automatically generates a cut-in may be employed. Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the operation promotion effect and the cut-in according to the operation occur during the SPSP reach but do not occur during the character SP reach. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which a cut-in can also occur in reach effects other than reach (for example, during character SP reach).

When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big win, at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, that is, at the end of the SPSP reach, the victory notification production to notify that the own character defeated the enemy character and won the battle. is performed (see FIG. 11(A)). In this victory notification effect, for example, the characters "Victory!!" are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the voice "Victory!!" One example is a production that makes It should be noted that when this victory notification effect is performed, the same decorative pattern as the ready-to-win pattern (decorative pattern of the second mode) as the medium pattern is suspended between the ready-to-win patterns (decorative patterns of the second mode) (Fig. 11) (A) and timing T1 in FIG. 12A). Along with this, although not shown in the drawing, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in rainbow colors.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol comes to an end, three decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first mode) in which characters are attached to large numbers stop at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 11). (B) and timing T2 in FIG. 12(A)). In addition, in FIG. 11(B), for convenience of explanation, the notation of the characters attached to the numbers forming the decorative pattern is omitted.

When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the three decorative symbols of the first mode forming double eyes stop in a simulated manner, the "first reflex effect" is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). (See FIG. 12(A)). The “first reflection effect” is a effect in which highlight light such as metallic luster is added to each decorative pattern, and a sound such as “Pishaan!” is output from the speaker 24 . In the first reflection effect, for example, highlight light is added from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the left pattern, and at the same time, the highlight light is similarly added to the middle pattern and the right pattern. As a result, the light applied to the decorative pattern can be made to appear as if it is mirror-reflected on the front surface of the decorative pattern, and the three same decorative patterns can be emphasized as if they were objects having metallic luster, so that the patterns are uniform. can be emphasized more.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first reflection effect is an effect executed using the decorative pattern of the first mode, and is an effect not executed using the decorative pattern of the second mode.

In some cases, the three decorative symbols (“333” in the example shown in FIG. 11(B)) are actually stopped as they are, while the three decorative symbols forming doublets are pseudo-stopped. After that, a promotion effect (see FIG. 11(C)) may be performed (timing T3 in FIG. 12(A)). This promotion production is a production to inform whether or not the three decorative patterns forming the double eyes change to the three decorative patterns forming the double eyes of "777", and whether or not the promotion is promoted to the 16R probability variation. . This promotion production is composed of the first half and the second half, and the production of the first half is common in both the case where promotion failure production is performed and the case where promotion success production is carried out in the second half. In the first half of this promotion production, specifically, for example, as illustrated in FIG. , and the state in which the three decorative patterns are reduced is maintained for several seconds (for example, 3 seconds).

In the example shown in FIG. 11(B), the three decorative symbols representing double eyes of "333" are pseudo-stopped. Therefore, as the jackpot symbol X2 as the first special symbol is permanently stopped, these decorative symbols are permanently stopped, so that it is notified that the player has won the 6R probability variation.

Here, if the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is a 6R probability variation, following the first half of the promotion production, promotion failure production is performed as the latter half of the promotion production (FIGS. 11 (C) and (D), FIG. 12(A) timing T4). This promotion failure performance is a performance in which the three decorative patterns that have become smaller in the first half of the promotion performance return without changing to the other decoration patterns while increasing in size, and are pseudo-stopped, and the promotion failure is notified. Accompanied by the output of sound effects. In the example shown in FIG. 11, following the promotion failure effect, a hit notification effect is performed in which the three decorative patterns forming the doublet of "333" are actually stopped as they are (FIG. 11 (E), FIG. 12 (A). ) timing T5). Then, when this hit notification effect is performed for a predetermined time, the opening period of the jackpot game is started, and during the opening period, the effect of notifying the type of jackpot and the suggestion of hitting right to prompt the player to hit to the right are performed (Fig. 11(F)). Specifically, the characters "BIG BONUS" are displayed and the voice is output to notify that the type of jackpot is 6R probability variation, and the voice "Please hit to the right" is output. An effect is performed in which a character "hit" and an arrow pointing to the right are displayed at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal screen 5.例文帳に追加During the subsequent round game, one decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the second mode) showing the same number as the stopped decorative pattern is displayed, and this decorative pattern is erased when the ending is started. .

On the other hand, when the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, following the first half of the promotion production, promotion success production is performed as the second half of the promotion production (FIGS. 11(C) and (G), FIG. 12). See timing T4 in (A)). In this promotion success effect, the three decorative patterns (here, "333") that faded out to the back of the liquid crystal screen 5 and became small changed to three decorative patterns of "777", which indicates that the 16R probability is variable. It is an effect that the player stops largely in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5, accompanied by the output of an effect sound that informs of the success of the promotion. When this promotion success effect is performed, a winning notification effect is performed in which the three decorative patterns showing doubles of "777" are actually stopped as they are (see timing T5 in FIG. 11(H) and FIG. 12(A)). Then, during the opening period of the jackpot game, an effect for notifying the type of jackpot and a suggestion of hitting to the right to prompt the player to hit to the right are performed (see FIG. 11 (I)). Note that the effect during this opening period is the same as the opening effect described above based on FIG. It is something to do. During the round game, one 7 symbols (decorative symbols of the second mode) are displayed, and these 7 symbols are erased when the ending starts.

In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the promotion failure effect or the promotion success effect is started, the "second reflex effect" is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second) (Fig. 12 (A )reference). In the "second reflection effect", for example, highlight light is added to each decorative pattern in the same manner as in the first reflection effect, and the character's words attached to the numbers that make up the decorative pattern (for example, "Time is full" ”) is output from the speaker 24 . In the second reflection effect, for example, highlight light is added from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the numbers that make up the left pattern, and at the same time, the numbers that make up the middle and right patterns are similarly highlighted. Add light. Thus, in the second reflection effect, the numbers are highlighted while the characters are not highlighted. It is different from reflex production. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the decoration patterns in the form of matching patterns to be finally stopped without degrading the visibility of the character that emits the lines.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second reflection effect is an effect executed using the decorative pattern of the first mode, and is an effect not executed using the decorative pattern of the second mode.

As illustrated in FIG. 12(A), in this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) has passed since the end of the second reflection effect, the stop display timing of the first special symbol comes. ing. That is, when a predetermined time (four seconds in the example of FIG. 12(A)) elapses after the end of the second reflection effect, the decoration pattern starts to stop. By setting a predetermined time between the second reflex effect and the main stop, for example, even if frames are dropped due to double buffering in the second reflex effect, it can be prevented from affecting the main stop.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 1, when executing image data drawing processing, the general CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140 provides two image data development areas, and alternately develops the image data in each development area. Do double buffering. For example, if the amount of image data during execution of the second reflection effect is large, it will take time to generate the image, and the previously displayed screen may be redisplayed, resulting in dropped frames. There is

In this embodiment, the image sound control board 140, when a predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 (not shown) is input, the image determined at the start of the variable effect (determined by the effect control board 130) is generated and output. On the other hand, when a predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147, the image sound control board 140 does not generate the image determined at the start of the variable production (determined by the production control board 130). For example, the signal output unit 147 does not output a predetermined signal when the previously displayed screen is redisplayed (when frames are dropped). In this case, the image sound control board 140 may generate and output an image different from the image determined at the start of the variable effect (determined by the effect control board 130).

For example, by selecting the variation pattern D or I, it is decided to permanently stop the decorative pattern of the jackpot mode (decorative pattern of the first mode) at the timing when 70 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the first special pattern. In this case, when a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147, the image sound control board 140 can actually stop the decoration pattern at the above timing. On the other hand, even if it is decided to output an image in which the decoration pattern is actually stopped at the above timing, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is not input, the image sound control board 140 The decorative symbols are not actually stopped at the above timing. In this case, the image sound control board 140 may output an image other than the permanently stopped decorative pattern. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern may not be displayed in a situation where frames are dropped.

This embodiment adopts a configuration in which a predetermined period of time is provided between the second reflex effect and the main stop, so that after the second reflex effect ends, a period (the above-mentioned predetermined time) in which the amount of image data is small is set. You can actually stop the decorative pattern through. As a result, the decorative pattern can be definitely stopped without being affected by the dropped frames.

As illustrated in FIG. 12 (B), in the present embodiment, even in the probability variation gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (that is, during the variable display of the second special symbol), when in the normal gaming state (that is, the first special symbol During the variable display of) promotion effect similar to may be executed. Specifically, for example, when the variable display of the second special pattern approaches the end, three decorative patterns (for example, a decorative pattern obtained by enlarging the decorative pattern of the second mode three times) is displayed at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. (see, for example, timing T6 in FIGS. 28(H) and 12(B)). When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed after the simulated stop, the same effect as the first half of the promotion effect in the normal game state is performed in a shorter execution time (for example, 2 seconds) than in the normal game state ( Timing T7) in FIG. 12(B).

When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after promotion failure performance or promotion success performance is started following the first half of the promotion performance, the ``third reflex performance'' is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). (Timing T8 in FIG. 12(B)). "Third reflection effect" is the same effect as the first reflection effect, but the decorative pattern in which the decorative pattern in the second mode is enlarged three times is added with highlight light, and the decorative pattern in the first mode is enlarged. It differs from the first reflection effect in that it is not a decorative pattern. When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed since the end of the third reflex effect, the stop display timing of the second special symbol arrives, and along with this, the decorative symbol is actually stopped (timing T9 in FIG. 12 (B) ). The predetermined time between the third reflex effect and the main stop is a period for preventing the main stop from being affected even if frames are dropped in the third reflex effect. By suppressing this period to the minimum time that can prevent the influence of dropping frames, it can be configured to be shorter than the period between the reflex performance and the main stop in the normal game state, and the progress of the game in the variable probability game state and the short time game state. can be speeded up.

In addition, referring to FIG. 11, the case where the promotion effect is performed to make it look as if the 6R probability variation has been promoted to the 16R probability variation by changing the odd number pattern (probability variation pattern) other than the 7 pattern to 7 patterns was explained. A promotion performance may be performed to make it look as if the normal jackpot has been promoted to the probability variable jackpot by changing the even-numbered symbols to the odd-numbered symbols. In addition, in this embodiment, these promotion effects are performed just before the first special symbol is actually stopped, but in other embodiments, these promotion effects may be performed during the jackpot game.

During the jackpot game, the promotion performance to make it look as if the normal jackpot has been promoted to the probability variable jackpot is, for example, an operation promoting performance to prompt the player to operate the performance button 26 during the round game of the predetermined round. An example of an effect is to display characters such as "Probability change get!" or output a predetermined notification sound in response to button operation.

In addition, during the jackpot game, as a promotion effect to make it look as if the 6R probability variable or 6R normal probability has been promoted to 16R probability probability, for example, in the 6th long open round game, characters such as "EXTRA ROUND get!" One example is an effect in which the effect accessory 7 is operated while outputting the sound. Incidentally, such a round promotion effect may be performed not during the sixth round long open round game, but when the seventh round long open round game is started.

In addition, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probability variable jackpot, compared to the case of a normal jackpot, a configuration is adopted in which the jackpot notice is easier to execute (always may be executed). can be considered. By adopting such a configuration, when the big win notice performance is executed, the promotion success performance is more likely to be executed than when the big win notice performance is not executed, and the player's response to the execution of the big win notice performance becomes easier. It can effectively raise expectations. In addition, when the jackpot announcement is executed, the promotion success effect may be executed without fail.

In addition, when the variation pattern A is selected, the design is suddenly aligned and the final stop is performed as it is. is never done.

It should be noted that, in another embodiment, the second decorative pattern may be used to execute the first reflection effect. For example, immediately after the end of the victory notification effect (timing T2 in FIG. 12(A)), the decoration pattern, which is the decoration pattern of the second mode enlarged to 3 times, is pseudo-stopped at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 . By executing the first reflection effect using such a decoration pattern, the continuity with the victory notification effect can be enhanced and the sense of unity can be improved. After the first reflex effect, the second reflex effect may be executed using the above decorative symbols. In this case, since no character is attached to the decorative pattern, the entire decorative pattern is highlighted in the second reflection effect as in the first reflection effect. Alternatively, after the first reflex effect, when a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) has passed since the first half of the promotion effect is completed, the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 instead of the above decorative pattern. A pseudo-stop may be performed, and the second reflex effect may be executed using this decorative pattern.

Further, in another embodiment, for example, a second reflection effect is performed in which the numbers forming the decorative pattern are not highlighted, while the characters forming the decorative pattern are highlighted. may be As a result, it is possible to emphasize the decorative pattern in the form of matching patterns without lowering the visibility of the numbers.

Further, in other embodiments, for example, the effect of highlighting the entire decorative pattern (specifically, the entire number and characters that make up the decorative pattern), the effect of highlighting the entire screen centered on the decorative pattern, It may be a second reflex effect. As a result, for example, compared to highlighting only numbers, it is possible to achieve a more dynamic effect, and to emphasize decorative patterns in the form of matching patterns.

Also, in another embodiment, only the second reflex effect may be executed without executing the first reflex effect. In addition, the period from the end of the second reflection effect to the final stop of the decorative pattern (normal game state) and the period from the end of the third reflection effect to the final stop of the decorative pattern (probable variable game state or time saving game state) The same time (for example, 4 seconds) may be used.

In addition, the period from the end of the second reflection production to the main stop of the decorative pattern (normal game state), the period from the end of the third reflection production in the variable probability game state to the main stop of the decorative pattern, and the second in the time saving game state The period from the end of the 3 reflection effect to the final stop of the decorative pattern may be different or the same.

Each performance executed from the simulated stop of the decorative patterns in the form of matching patterns to the actual stop can be regarded as a jackpot announcement that definitely announces the execution of the jackpot game. Furthermore, each performance from the start of promotion failure performance or the start of promotion success performance to the final stop of the decorative pattern has a function of foretelling which kind of jackpot game will be executed and a game state after the jackpot game ends. It can be regarded as a jackpot announcement with a function to announce.

It should be noted that not only when the jackpot is reported in the SPSP reach, but also when the jackpot is reported in the normal reach or the character SP reach, as described with reference to FIG. A similar effect is executed.

In addition, the production described with reference to FIG. 11 (B) and later and FIG. 12 may be executed when the ready-to-win pattern is 7 patterns (that is, when it is 16R probability variation), or may not be executed. . In the former case, there is no need to change the length of the production after pattern matching according to the type of ready-to-win pattern, and in the latter case, it is possible to suppress the execution of the promotion production that has no possibility of changing the mode of pattern matching. can.

Also, depending on the type of jackpot, the period from the end of the second reflex effect (or the third reflex effect) to the final stop of the decorative pattern may be changed or may be the same. For example, the period from the end of the second reflection effect (or the third reflection effect) to the actual stop of the decorative pattern may be longer or shorter than when the 16R probability variation is the other jackpot. may

[Specific example of character SP reach]
Next, a specific example of character SP reach in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 13 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of character SP reach.

During the variable display of the first special symbol, when the normal reach (see FIG. 7(E)) develops into a character SP reach performance (see FIG. 7(F-1)), three symbols forming the reach. With the row displayed small in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5, a scramble effect is performed showing how the self character and the enemy character scramble for a treasure box (an example of an item) (see FIG. 13(A)). Although not shown in FIG. 13(A), when the scramble effect is started, characters such as "Take back the treasure chest from the enemy!" A title display that displays the reach title is performed.

Following this competition effect, there is a case where a takeover failure effect is performed showing that the player character collapses after the treasure box is stolen by the enemy character (see FIG. 13(B)). Here, if the judgment result of the first special pattern judgment performed at the start of the pattern fluctuation is a failure, the enemy character who stole the treasure box leaves and displays the characters "Escape ...". is performed (see FIG. 13(C)). This non-development suggestion production is a production that suggests that character SP reach does not develop into SP SP reach, and when the non-development suggestion production is performed, the reach failure (for example, "343") is simulated and then the main stop. A loss notification effect is performed (see FIG. 13(D)).

On the other hand, following the scramble production, the player's companions come to help him and his character, who has fallen down, stands up, and a development suggestive production is performed in which characters such as "I will chase the enemy!" are displayed (Fig. 13 (E) and (F)). This development-suggesting production is a production that suggests development from character SP reach to SP SP reach. When the development suggestion production is performed, a title display that displays the reach title related to the SPSP reach such as “Decisive Battle 〇〇〇 VS XXX” is displayed, and the battle production in which the player character and the enemy character battle begins. (See FIG. 13(G)).

In this way, if the SPSP reach is developed, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a big hit, the hit notification effect is executed following the SPSP reach, and if it is a loss, the SPSP reach is performed. Subsequently, the loss notification effect is executed.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a big hit, following the competition production, there is a case where a capture success production showing how the player character successfully captures the treasure box from the enemy character may be performed (Fig. 13(H)). In this capture success production, a production display is performed in which three decorative patterns (probable variable patterns or normal patterns) that form double eyes from the recaptured treasure box pop out, and these three decorative patterns stop the jackpot. It is notified (see FIG. 13(I)).

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment provides a capture success effect (see FIG. 13(H)) or a capture failure effect (see FIG. 13(B)) as a result effect of the contest effect (see FIG. 13(A)). ) can be executed, and the capture success effect is executed when the variation pattern C is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and thereafter the winning notification effect is always executed (for example, FIG. 17 (A) and (B)).

On the other hand, when the capture failure effect (see FIG. 13B) is executed, a development suggestion effect (see FIG. 13 ( E) and (F)) are performed, and there are times when a non-development suggestive effect (see FIG. 13(C)) is performed to suggest that character SP reach will not develop into SP SP reach.

If this non-development suggestive production is performed, there is no possibility that the hit notification effect will be performed after that, but if the development suggestive effect is performed, the hit notification effect will be performed later in the SPSP reach. (F-4), (I), (H) flow in FIG. 7, see column of variation pattern E in FIG. 17). In this way, even if the capture failure effect is performed following the contest effect, there is still a possibility that the hit notification effect will be performed after that, so even if the capture failure effect is performed, the player will: The player can enjoy the game while anticipating that the development-suggesting performance will be performed without losing the hope of a big win.

[Concrete example of impact effect in normal game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a specific example of the hitting effect in the normal game state will be described. Here, FIG. 14 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a hit effect in the normal game state.

In FIG. 14(A), two reserved icons are displayed in the first reserved icon display area 51, and the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is lost. A state in which a failure notification effect is performed in which a decorative pattern in a mode indicating that there is a winning state is stopped and displayed is exemplified. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as white pending.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the start of the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, the first Special symbol determination is executed. Accordingly, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 51 is shifted to the area 53, and the second pending icon is shifted to the position where the first pending icon was displayed. A shift process is performed to cause the display to shift, and along with this, the high-speed scrolling display of decorative patterns is started (see FIGS. 14A and 14B).

Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probability variable jackpot and a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a hit performance is executed.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the start of the high-speed scrolling display of the decorative symbols, a dark effect is performed in which a black effect image is displayed on the entire screen of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 14(C)). In the present embodiment, this darkening effect is performed until two seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. It is possible to make the player feel that 1 has failed.

The dark effect is, for example, a full-screen display of a black effect image in front of the decorative pattern. Therefore, during the darkening effect, although the decorative symbols of the first mode continue to be variably displayed, the decorative symbols cannot be visually recognized (state in which the decorative symbols of the first mode are not displayed). In addition, along with the start of the dark effect, from the state in which the decorative pattern of the first mode is variably displayed, a small decorative pattern (for example, the decorative pattern of the second mode) is changed to the second mode during character SP reach and SPSP reach. It is also possible to variably display at a position different from the position where the decorative pattern is displayed (for example, the lower left corner of the display screen 5).

This darkening effect may be accompanied by turning off the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the light-emitting elements built in the effect accessories 7. In addition, as in the present embodiment, when a darkening effect is performed to hide the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal screen 5, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to recognize whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. be. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a small pattern called a fourth pattern, which is different from the decorative pattern, is displayed on the periphery of the liquid crystal screen 5 to notify that the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. The symbol is continuously variably displayed at a constant speed while the special symbol is variably displayed, and is stop-displayed in a manner indicating a hit or drop as the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, as the fourth design, two corresponding to the first special design and one corresponding to the second special design are prepared separately. The fourth pattern is a small image of the same shape in red, yellow, green, and blue (for example, a square with a side of 5 mm), and these are in the same position in the order of red → yellow → green → blue → red → . A variable display is performed by displaying the For example, when the red fourth symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop display of the first special symbol, it is 16R probability variation, and when the yellow fourth symbol is stopped and displayed, it is 6R probability variation, and green fourth symbol. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is 6R normal, and when the blue fourth symbol is stopped and displayed, it is lost. The fourth symbol is an image displayed along with the variable display of the special symbols, and is a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols being executed. The fourth pattern is displayed on the front side of the other effect images, and is displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized even if the effect accessory 7 is operated, so that part or all of it is not visually recognized. However, if such a configuration is adopted, there is a possibility that the interest of the dark transition effect will be reduced. For this reason, in another embodiment, instead of displaying the fourth pattern on the liquid crystal screen 5, a fourth pattern lamp (for example, an LED) for displaying the fourth pattern is separately provided, and the black color is displayed during the darkening effect. A configuration may be adopted in which no effect image other than the effect image is displayed.

The fourth pattern and the decorative pattern start to be variably displayed as the special symbols are variably displayed, and are stop-displayed as the special symbols are stopped. Here, the fourth symbol that is stopped and displayed informs the player of the same content (jackpot or loss) as the content that the special symbol stops and informs the player, and in this respect is the same as the decorative symbol. . However, since the fourth symbol is smaller than the decorative symbol and is displayed in an inconspicuous position and manner, it is a symbol that is difficult for the player to notice. In addition, the fourth pattern has a smaller number of patterns that are variably displayed than the decorative patterns. It can be said that the display modes of the two are different because the display mode is slowed down or sped up. The speed at which the fourth pattern is variably displayed may be faster (or slower) than the speed at which the decorative patterns of the first mode and the second mode are scrolled at high speed.

Next, following the darkening effect, the effect display in which the three decorative patterns that make up the double eyes of "777" suddenly pop out and pseudo-stop in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 is performed, for example, for about 3 seconds (Fig. 14(D)). Then, the three decorative symbols of "777" are actually stopped as they are, and a hit notification effect is performed to notify the 16R probability variation (see FIG. 14 (E)).

Such a hit effect can be executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probability variable jackpot, but is not performed when the determination result is a loss. Therefore, the hit production can be regarded as a jackpot announcement that definitely announces that the jackpot game will be executed.

In addition, the hit production is a production that foretells a big hit without going through the ready-to-win establishment. Therefore, the decorative pattern is not displayed in a small size when the hitting performance is performed. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that he has suddenly won the character SP reach or the SP reach, which is expected to give a big win, even though the character SP reach or SPSP reach has not yet developed, and a high production effect can be obtained.

In addition, since the hit performance is a performance that makes the player feel that a big hit has been suddenly announced immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the hit performance is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. The time until and the time required for the impact production are preferably short, but as long as these conditions are not greatly deviated, the impact production will start after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The time until the start and the time from the start of the hit effect to the time when the hit notification effect is performed may be different from the time exemplified in the present embodiment.

Also, here, a case where the impact effect is composed of a black effect (see FIG. 14(C)) and a effect in which double eyes suddenly appear (see FIG. 14(D)) has been described as an example. In another embodiment, a collision effect that does not include a blackout effect may be performed. That is, as long as the player can feel that the game has suddenly become a big hit, the effect display related to the hit effect may be any effect display.

[Specific example of battle reach in probability variable gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a specific example of battle reach in the variable probability gaming state will be described. Here, FIG. 15 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of battle reach in the variable probability gaming state.

In FIG. 15(A), three reserved icons are displayed in the second reserved icon display area 52, and the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is lost. A state in which a failure notification effect is performed in which a decorative pattern in a mode indicating that there is a winning state is stopped and displayed is exemplified. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as green pending.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the stop display of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the second corresponding to the earliest pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 52 Special symbol determination is executed. Accordingly, the earliest pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 52 is shifted to the area 53, and the remaining pending icons are shifted to the area 53 side within the second pending icon display area 52. A shift process is performed to cause the display to shift, and along with this, the high-speed scrolling display of decorative patterns is started (see FIGS. 15A and 15B).

When the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the icon shifted to the area 53 is 16R probability variation, that is, the second special symbol indicating the jackpot symbol Y1 (see FIG. 6(C)) is stopped and displayed. In that case, the following production may be performed.

That is, when a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, 7 symbols (decorative symbols of the first mode) are pseudo-stopped in the left column, and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column. A ready-to-win establishment inciting effect is performed to stir up the player's sense of expectation (see FIG. 15(C)). This ready-to-reach establishment fanning production is a production in which a decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) showing a number common to the left pattern (here, 7 patterns) is slowly moved from top to bottom in the right column, and the left pattern. When a decorative pattern showing a number common to the above is pseudo-stopped in the right column, reach establishment is established (see FIG. 15(D)). Conversely, if a decorative symbol showing a number different from the left symbol stops in the right column in a simulated manner, the reach is not established in most cases, and a loss is reported.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration capable of establishing a reach with 7 symbols only when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation. In other words, if reach is established with 7 symbols in the variable probability game state, a configuration is adopted in which a hit notification effect in which 7 symbols are aligned is always performed after that. For this reason, establishment of reach with 7 symbols can be regarded as one of big hit notices.

In addition, here, the case where the ready-to-win establishment prompting production for encouraging establishment of the seven-pattern ready-to-win is performed has been described as an example, but the same production is performed also in the case of inciting the ready-to-win establishment by other decorative symbols.

When the reach is established as described above, although not shown in FIG. 15, a title display is performed to display the reach title related to the battle reach, such as "Decisive Battle XXXXX". During this ready-to-win title display, the decorative pattern of the second mode is displayed. Then, a battle effect is started to show a battle between the self character and the enemy character while the decoration pattern of the second mode is displayed (see FIG. 15(E)). At that time, the three symbol rows forming the reach move to the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 while being reduced.

Then, at the final stage of the battle ready-to-win, an operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 26 (see FIG. 15(F)). It should be noted that this operation promoting effect is the same as the operation promoting effect performed during the SPSP reach described above with reference to FIG.

Here, when the player operates the effect button 26 during the effective period of the operation promoting effect, a victory suggesting effect is performed to suggest that the player's character has defeated the enemy character and won (see FIG. 15(G)). . In this victory-indicating effect, the characters "Defeat!!" indicating that the player's character has defeated the enemy character are displayed and its voice is output, and the effect accessory 7 operates while emitting light in rainbow colors. At that time, the three symbol rows displayed in small sizes in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 are pseudo-stopped in the form of double eyes (see FIG. 15(G)).

In addition, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probability variable jackpot, regardless of whether or not the player operates the effect button 26 during the effective period, it is preferable to perform a victory suggesting effect. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the player does not operate the button during the effective period of the operation promoting effect during battle reach, the victory suggesting effect is performed at the timing when the effective period ends. configuration is adopted.

In this way, when the victory suggestive effect is performed, the three decorative symbols which had been pseudo-stopped in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 are displayed large in a pseudo-stopped state in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 15(H). ), these three decorative symbols are permanently stopped along with the permanent stop of the second special symbol (see FIG. 15(I)).

Here, the case where the ready-to-win is established with 7 patterns and the operation promoting effect is performed during the battle ready-to-win has been described as an example, but the same effect is performed even when the ready-to-win is established by other decoration patterns. However, if the jackpot related to the second special pattern determination is a variable jackpot, a victory suggestion effect is performed, but if it is a normal jackpot, a defeat suggestion effect that shows how your character is defeated by the enemy character is performed. will be That is, even if the player operates the performance button 26 during the effective period of the operation promotion performance, the victory suggestion performance is not performed, and the defeat suggestion performance is performed instead. When this defeat suggestion effect is performed, three decorative patterns (for example, even-numbered double-sided patterns) indicating a normal jackpot (8R normal corresponding to the jackpot pattern Y4 in this embodiment) are largely simulated in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. After stopping, the main stop is performed as it is. In this case, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state after the jackpot game in which the eight long open round games are completed. That is, it falls from the probability variation gaming state.

[Specific example of impact production in variable probability game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a specific example of the hitting effect in the variable probability game state will be described. Here, FIG. 16 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a hitting effect in the variable probability game state.

In FIG. 16(A), three reserved icons are displayed in the second reserved icon display area 52, and the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is a failure. A state in which a failure notification effect is performed in which a decorative pattern (here, "246") indicating that there is a win is stopped and displayed is exemplified. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as red pending.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the start of the stop display of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol, the first Special symbol determination is executed. In response to this, shift processing is performed for each reserved icon displayed in the second reserved icon display area 51, and variable display (high-speed scroll display) of decorative symbols is started (see FIGS. 16A and 16B )reference).

Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probability variable jackpot and a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a hit performance is executed.

Since this hit production is partially common to the hit production performed in the normal game state, the explanation of the common points will be omitted, but immediately after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. (See FIG. 16(C)), and almost simultaneously with the sudden display of the three decorative patterns showing the doublet of "777" in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5, the production accessory 7 operates. (See FIG. 16(D)). Then, a winning notification effect is performed in which the three pseudo-stopped decorative symbols are actually stopped as they are (see FIG. 16(E)).

It should be noted that this hit production, like the hit production that is performed in the normal game state, is a dedicated production when winning a probability variable jackpot. Therefore, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a normal jackpot or a loss, the hit performance is not performed. As is clear from this, the hit effect in the variable probability game state can be regarded as one of the jackpot announcements that definitely announce that the jackpot game will be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, three types of 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, and 4R probability variation are prepared as the types of jackpots related to the second special symbol determination. A configuration capable of executing a winning effect is adopted. On the other hand, in other embodiments, while it is possible to execute a hit performance when winning at 16 probability variation, it is configured not to execute a hit performance when winning at 8R probability variation or 4R probability variation. may be adopted. In addition, regardless of the type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination, a configuration that can execute a hit production may be adopted.

Also, in this embodiment, the case where the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol are the same when the hit production is performed will be described, but even if these variation times are different good. In addition, the performance mode of the hit performance performed in the normal game state and the performance mode of the hit performance performed in the variable probability game state may be the same or different. .

It should be noted that the performance mode of the hit performance is not limited to the one described above, and any performance mode may be used as long as the player can feel that the game has suddenly become a big hit. For example, as a result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination), in a part of the case where the 16R probability variation is won, even if the hitting effect is executed immediately after the reach establishment or during the reach effect good.

For example, in the hit effect immediately after the ready-to-win is established, immediately after the ready-to-win is established (for example, after 0.5 seconds), a middle symbol showing the same number as the pseudo-stopped ready-to-win symbol suddenly appears on the effective line. It may be stopped, and immediately after that, all the decorative patterns may be fully stopped (both are decorative patterns of the first mode). In such a case, it can be said that the hit performance is a performance that results in a big win without executing the ready-to-win effect even if the ready-to-win effect is established. Note that the hit effect may be executed almost simultaneously with establishment of the ready-to-win state. In this case, for example, when the left symbol is pseudo-stopped, the middle symbol indicating the same number as the left symbol is suddenly activated at almost the same time as the right symbol indicating the same number as the left symbol is pseudo-stopped on the activated line. A virtual stop may appear on the line, and immediately after that, all the decorative patterns may be permanently stopped (both are decorative patterns of the first mode).

For example, the hit effect during normal reach may be executed when the scroll speed of the medium symbols scrolled at high speed gradually decreases. For example, when a collision effect is executed during normal reach, at the timing when the medium pattern begins to scroll slowly downward, a medium pattern showing the same number as the pseudo-stopped reach pattern suddenly appears on the effective line. A pseudo stop may be made, and immediately after that, all the decorative symbols may be actually stopped (both are decorative symbols of the first aspect). In such a case, it can be said that the impact performance is a performance that suddenly becomes a big hit with normal reach without developing into character SP reach or SPSP reach.

In addition, for example, in the character SP reach performance, the reach pattern (the decoration pattern of the second mode) is displayed small in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5, and the self character and the enemy character compete for the treasure box. It may be executed during the competition production showing . For example, when a collision effect is executed during a competition effect, a medium pattern (for example, a decorative pattern in the second mode enlarged three times) showing the same number as the pseudo-stopped ready-to-win pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. It suddenly appears in the center and makes a pseudo stop. Then, the ready-to-win pattern is erased, and three decorative patterns (for example, a decorative pattern obtained by enlarging the decorative pattern of the second mode by three times) are pseudo-stopped in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 in a pattern-aligned manner, and immediately thereafter. All decorative patterns may be permanently stopped. In such a case, it can be said that the impact performance is a performance in which the character SP reach suddenly becomes a big hit without executing the effect executed at the end of the character SP reach and without developing into SPSP reach.

In addition, for example, the hit effect during battle reach shows a state where the reach pattern (decorative pattern of the second mode) is displayed small in the upper left corner of the screen of the liquid crystal screen 5, and the battle between the player character and the enemy character is shown. It may be executed during the battle production. For example, when the hit production is executed in the middle of the battle production, the middle pattern (for example, the decorative pattern of the second mode enlarged three times) showing the same number as the ready-to-win pattern that is pseudo-stopped appears on the liquid crystal screen 5. It suddenly appears in the center of the and pseudo-stops. Then, the ready-to-win pattern is erased, and three decorative patterns (for example, a decorative pattern obtained by enlarging the decorative pattern of the second mode by three times) are pseudo-stopped in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 in a pattern-aligned manner, and immediately thereafter. All decorative patterns may be permanently stopped. In such a case, it can be said that the impact production is a production that suddenly becomes a big hit in the battle reach without the production executed at the end of the battle reach.

[Variation pattern selection table used in normal game state]
FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbols in the normal game state.

In the main ROM 102, as a variation pattern selection table to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbols in the normal gaming state, a variation pattern selection table for the probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 17A) and a variation pattern for the normal jackpot are stored. A pattern selection table (see FIG. 17B) and a change pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 17C) are stored. Here, the probability variable jackpot variation pattern selection table is used in the process of selecting the first special symbol variation pattern when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probability variable jackpot" in the normal game state. be. In addition, the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table is used in the process of selecting the first special pattern variation pattern when the determination result of the first special pattern determination is "normal jackpot" in the normal game state. . Further, the reach-losing variation pattern selection table selects the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is determined that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a failure in the normal game state and it is decided to perform the reach-present performance. used for processing.

It should be noted that in the explanatory diagrams of various tables shown in FIG. 17 and subsequent figures, the possible range of each random number is set to be smaller than the actual range in order to facilitate the description.

(Variation pattern selection table for probability variable jackpot)
As illustrated in FIG. 17(A), in the probability variable jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern random number are associated with each other. In FIG. 17, for convenience of explanation, in addition to the variation pattern and the variation pattern random number, the variation time of the first special symbol, the type of variation performance pattern selected by the sub CPU 131 for each variation pattern, and the variation performance pattern Concrete effect content, the possible range of variation pattern random numbers, and the rate at which each variation pattern is selected are also shown.

As shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C, the possible range of variation pattern random numbers for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set to "0" to "99". When the main CPU 101 determines to execute a jackpot game in the normal game state and selects 16R probability variable or 6R probability variable as the type of jackpot, the variation pattern random number obtained together with the jackpot random number and the pattern random number is "0" to If it is one of "9", the variation pattern A is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern A from the variation pattern selection table for the probability variable big hit. Further, if the acquired variation pattern random number is any one of "10" to "11", by reading the variation pattern B from the probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern B is used as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. select. Further, if the acquired variation pattern random number is any one of "12" to "19", by reading the variation pattern C from the probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern C is used as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. select. Further, if the acquired variation pattern random number is any one of "20" to "49", by reading the variation pattern D from the probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern D is used as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. select. Further, if the acquired variation pattern random number is any one of "50" to "99", by reading the variation pattern E from the probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern E is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. select.

10 random numbers of "0" to "9" are assigned to the variation pattern A in the variation pattern selection table for the probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 17(A)). For this reason, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern A in the case of the probability variable jackpot is 10% (=10/100). In addition, since two random numbers of "10" to "11" are assigned to variation pattern B, the percentage of variation pattern B selected in the case of a probability variable jackpot is 2% (=2 /100). In addition, since eight random numbers from "12" to "19" are assigned to the variation pattern C, the percentage of the variation pattern C selected in the case of a probability variable jackpot is 8% (=8 /100). In addition, since 30 random numbers from "20" to "49" are assigned to the variation pattern D, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern D in the case of a probability variable jackpot is 30% (=30 /100). In addition, since 50 random numbers from "50" to "99" are assigned to the variation pattern E, the percentage of the variation pattern E selected in the case of a probability variable jackpot is 50% (=50 /100).

(Normal jackpot variation pattern selection table)
When the main CPU 101 determines to execute a jackpot game in the normal game state and selects 6R normal as the jackpot type, the variation pattern random number obtained together with the jackpot random number and the pattern random number is "0" to "3". If it is either, the variation pattern B is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern B from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17(B)). Further, if the acquired variation pattern random number is any one of "4" to "14", by reading the variation pattern C from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern C is used as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. select. Further, if the acquired variation pattern random number is any one of "15" to "46", by reading the variation pattern D from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern D is used as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. select. Further, if the acquired variation pattern random number is any one of "47" to "99", by reading the variation pattern E from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern E is used as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. select.

In the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17B), four random numbers of "0" to "3" are assigned to the variation pattern B. FIG. Therefore, the ratio of selecting variation pattern B in the case of a normal jackpot is 4% (=4/100). In addition, since 11 random numbers from "4" to "14" are assigned to the variation pattern C, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern C in the case of a normal jackpot is 11% (=11 /100). In addition, since 32 random numbers from "15" to "46" are assigned to the variation pattern D, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern D in the case of a normal jackpot is 32% (=32 /100). In addition, since 53 random numbers from "47" to "99" are assigned to the variation pattern E, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern E in the case of a normal jackpot is 53% (=53 /100).

(Variation pattern selection table for reach loss)
When the main CPU 101 determines in the first special symbol determination that the jackpot game is not to be executed, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform the reach effect based on the reach random number obtained together with the jackpot random number, the pattern random number, and the variation pattern random number. select. Specifically, it is determined whether to select any variation pattern from among the group of variation patterns in which the effect with reach is performed, or to select any variation pattern from among the group of variation patterns in which the effect without reach is performed. decide. Here, when it is selected to perform the effect with reach, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 17(C)).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game will not be executed in the normal game state and selects to perform the reach effect, the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the pattern random number, and the reach random number is "0". If it is any of "39", the variation pattern G is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern G from the reach-losing variation pattern selection table. Further, if the acquired variation pattern random number is any one of "40" to "69", the variation pattern H is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern H from the reach-losing variation pattern selection table. do. Further, if the acquired variation pattern random number is any one of "70" to "89", by reading the variation pattern I from the variation pattern selection table for reach loss, select the variation pattern I as the variation pattern of the first special symbol do. Further, if the acquired variation pattern random number is any one of "90" to "99", the variation pattern J is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern J from the reach loss variation pattern selection table. do.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 17(C)), 40 random numbers from "0" to "39" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern G. Therefore, the ratio of selection of the variation pattern G when the ready-to-win effect is performed and the loss is notified is 40% (=40/100). In addition, since 30 random numbers from "40" to "69" are assigned to the variation pattern H, the rate at which the variation pattern H is selected when performing a reach effect and notifying a loss is 30% (=30/100). In addition, since 20 random numbers from "70" to "89" are assigned to the variation pattern I, the rate at which the variation pattern I is selected when performing a reach effect and notifying a loss is 20% (=20/100). In addition, since 10 random numbers from "90" to "99" are assigned to the variation pattern J, the rate at which the variation pattern J is selected when performing a reach effect and notifying a loss is 10% (=10/100).

The main CPU 101 refers to any variation pattern selection table among the variation pattern selection tables illustrated in FIG. 17 based on the determination result of whether or not to execute the jackpot game related to the first special symbol determination. to select one of the plurality of variation patterns.

Although not shown in the figure, there is also prepared a variation pattern selection table for non-reach loss, which is used when notifying a loss without performing a reach effect, and the main CPU 101 must execute a jackpot game. If you decide and select to perform a no-reach effect, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds and a variation time of 8 seconds depending on the number of reservations when the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Either a variation pattern or a variation pattern with a variation time of 13.5 seconds is selected.

Also, as is clear from the comparison of the variation pattern selection tables in FIGS. 17A to 17C, except for variation pattern A, when each variation pattern is selected, the variation time corresponds to the effect content. . For example, when variation pattern B is selected from the variation pattern selection table for probability variable jackpot, when variation pattern B is selected from the variation pattern selection table for normal jackpot, and when variation pattern G is selected from the variation pattern selection table for reach loss In both cases, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 20 seconds, and only the normal reach is performed as the reach effect. The reason why such a configuration is adopted is that the performance until immediately before the hit notification performance or the loss notification performance is performed is made common, and the subsequent performance is made to correspond to the determination result.

On the other hand, in another embodiment, even if the three selection tables shown in FIGS. You may make it vary|variate time.

From the description of the three variation pattern selection tables illustrated in FIG. 17, the following can be said. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot, generally, a variation pattern with a long variation time is likely to be selected, and a variation pattern with a short variation time tends to be difficult to select (Fig. 17(A) and (B)). In addition, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss and the reach effect is performed, it is difficult to select a variation pattern with a long variation time, and a variation pattern with a short variation time tends to be selected (Fig. 17(C)). From these facts, it can be said that the longer the variation time of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to execute the winning notification effect, and conversely, the shorter the variation time of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to execute the losing notification effect. In other words, when the reach effect is performed over a relatively long period of time, such as developing from normal reach to SP reach via character SP reach, the hit notification effect is likely to be executed, and it seems that only normal reach effect is performed. When the time required for the ready-to-win effect is relatively short, it can be said that the losing notification effect is likely to be executed. In other words, it is better to develop from normal reach to character SP reach or SPSP reach, or develop from normal reach to SPSP reach via character SP reach, instead of being notified of winning or losing in normal reach production. , It can be said that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

<Regarding the impact effect in the normal game state>
The following can be said about the hit effect performed in the normal game state. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is the probability variation jackpot, the ratio of executing the hitting effect is the same as the ratio of selecting the variation pattern A with reference to the variation pattern selection table for the probability variation jackpot 10%. (=10/100). On the other hand, in the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table and reach-losing variation pattern selection table, no variation pattern for performing a hit performance is prepared (see FIGS. 17B and 17C).
For these reasons, the hit performance in the normal game state is a jackpot notice that definitely announces that the jackpot game will be executed, and also announces that the game will surely shift to the probability variable game state after the jackpot game ends. It can be said that it is a predictable big hit. That is, in the present embodiment, when the hit effect is executed, the probability that the game is controlled in the probability variable game state after the jackpot game ends (here, 100%) is better, The game is controlled in the time saving game state It is characterized by being higher than the probability (0%).

Also, in the probability variable jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17 (A)), when focusing on the variation pattern A, which has the shortest variation time of 5 seconds, as the effect content, while the impact effect is associated No other renditions are associated. From this, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is the probability variable jackpot and the variation pattern A is selected, it is clear that the sudden hit performance functioning as the probability variable jackpot notice is executed with a probability of 100%. is.

In addition, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot to the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 60% (=5%+55%) (see FIG. 6(B)). In addition, the ratio of execution of the hitting effect in the case of the probability variable jackpot is 10% (=10/100). Therefore, when viewed as a whole when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, the probability that the hit production is executed is 6% (=0.6×0.1×100). .

In the present embodiment, when the hit performance is executed in the normal game state, the case will be described in which the probability of changing to the probability variable game state is 100% after the jackpot game ends, but in another embodiment, the hit performance When is executed, the probability of shifting to the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to a value less than 100%, and the game can be controlled in the time-saving game state with a certain probability (for example, 20%) after the end of the jackpot game. may In this case, when the hit production is executed, the probability of shifting to the variable probability game state may be higher than the probability of shifting to the time saving game state, these probabilities may be the same, or the probability variable game The probability of shifting to the state may be lower than the probability of shifting to the time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the hit performance is always executed when the variation pattern A is selected will be described, but in other embodiments, the hit performance will not be performed even if the variation pattern A is selected. You may employ|adopt the structure that there exists. In other words, the probability of execution of the collision effect when the variation pattern A is selected is not limited to 100%, and may be less than 100%. Further, in the present embodiment, the probability that the variation pattern A is selected and the hit effect is executed is set to a higher value than the probability that another variation pattern is selected and another jackpot announcement is executed. However, in other embodiments, the magnitude relationship of these probabilities may be reversed.

In addition, the hit performance is a performance functioning as a probability variable jackpot announcement, and in this embodiment, after the hit performance is executed, a 16R jackpot game and a 6R jackpot game are executed. There are cases. On the other hand, in another embodiment, when a hit performance is executed, a 16R jackpot game is executed, but a 6R jackpot game is not executed. good too. In other words, in the case of the 16R probability variation, the impact performance may be executed, and in the case of the 6R probability variation, the impact performance may not be performed.

<About successful capture>
In this embodiment, character SP reach may be executed in the normal game state, while character SP reach is not executed in the variable probability game state. For this reason, the capture success effect (see, for example, FIG. 13 (H)) that may be executed during the character SP reach can be said to be a dedicated effect dedicated to the normal game state, which is not performed during the variable probability game state. can. The following can be said about the capture success effect which is the exclusive effect of this normal game state.

If the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probability variable jackpot, the rate of selection of the variation pattern C in which the capture success effect is performed from the probability variable jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17 (A)) is 8% (= 8/100). In addition, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a normal jackpot, the ratio of the variation pattern C in which the capture success effect is performed is selected from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17 (B)) is 11%. (=11/100). Then, in the reach-losing variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17(C)), the variation pattern H in which the capture failure effect is performed is prepared, but the variation pattern in which the capture success effect is performed is not prepared. This also applies to the variation pattern selection table that is referred to when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a failure and the non-reach effect is performed.
From these things, it can be said that the capture success effect is a jackpot announcement that definitely announces that the jackpot game will be executed.

In addition, as is clear from the notation of the variation pattern selection table for the probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 17 (A)) and the variation pattern selection table for the normal jackpot (see FIG. 17 (B)), the successful capture effect is the first special It can be executed both when the jackpot related to the symbol determination is the variable probability jackpot and when it is the normal jackpot. That is, when the win notification effect is performed following the capture success effect, the game may be controlled in the probability variable game state or in the normal game state after the jackpot game is completed. From this, it can be said that the capture success effect is an effect that foretells that the jackpot game will be executed, but does not suggest the game state after the jackpot game ends. At the stage where the capture success effect is performed, the player cannot determine whether the game is controlled in the variable probability game state after the jackpot game is completed, or whether the game is controlled in the normal game state, so the game is played in the variable probability game state. You can enjoy the game while expecting to be controlled.

In addition, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot with respect to the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 60%, and with reference to the probability variable jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17 (A)), the capture success effect is performed. The percentage of C selected is 8%. Therefore, the probability that the game is controlled in the variable probability game state after the successful capture effect is performed and the jackpot game ends is 4.8% (=0.6×0.08×100).
On the other hand, the ratio of the normal jackpot to the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 40%. The percentage of C selected is 11%. Therefore, the probability that the game is controlled in the normal game state after the successful capture effect is performed and the jackpot game ends is 4.4% (=0.4×0.11×100).
From these things, when the capture success effect is executed, there are cases where the game is controlled in the probability variable game state after the end of the jackpot game, and cases where the game is controlled in the normal game state, but the probability of the former is slightly higher than the probability of the latter.

Also, in the variation pattern selection table for the probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 17A), when focusing on the variation pattern C whose variation time is 40 seconds, while the capture success effect is associated as the effect content, the capture There is no presentation provided that is not associated with a success presentation. From this, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probability variable jackpot and the variation pattern C is selected, it is clear that the capture success effect functioning as a jackpot notice is executed with a probability of 100%. be.

In addition, in the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17B), when focusing on variation pattern C whose variation time is 40 seconds, capture success effect is associated as effect content, but capture There is no presentation provided that is not associated with a success presentation. From this, it is clear that even when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a normal jackpot and the variation pattern C is selected, the capturing success effect functioning as a jackpot notice is executed with a probability of 100%. be.

In this embodiment, the case where the capture success effect is always executed when the variation pattern C is selected will be described. You may employ|adopt the structure that there exists. That is, the probability of execution of the capture success effect when variation pattern C is selected is not limited to 100%, and may be less than 100%. Further, in another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the capture success effect is executed in the case of a variable probability jackpot, while the capture success effect is not executed in the case of a normal jackpot. That is, the capture success effect may be a probability variable big hit exclusive effect, like the hit effect of the present embodiment. Conversely, it is also possible to employ a configuration in which the capture success effect is executed in the case of the normal jackpot, while the capture success effect is not executed in the case of the probability variable jackpot.

[Variation pattern selection table used in probability variation gaming state]
FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in the variable probability gaming state.

The main ROM 102 contains a variation pattern selection table for the probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 18A) and a variation pattern selection table for the normal jackpot as a variation pattern selection table to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in the variable probability gaming state. A pattern selection table (see FIG. 18B) is stored. Here, the variation pattern selection table for the probability variation big hit is used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "probability variation big hit" in the probability variation gaming state. be. In addition, the normal big hit variation pattern selection table is used for the process of selecting the second special symbol variation pattern when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "normal big hit" in the probability variable gaming state. . In addition, although the variation pattern selection table referred to when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a loss is also prepared, its illustration is omitted.

(Variation pattern selection table for probability variable jackpot)
As illustrated in FIG. 18(A), in the probability variable jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern of the second special symbol and the variation pattern random number are associated with each other. In addition, in FIG. 18, for convenience of explanation, in addition to the variation pattern and the variation pattern random number, the variation time of the second special symbol, the type of variation performance pattern selected by the sub CPU 131 for each variation pattern, and the variation performance pattern Concrete effect content, the possible range of variation pattern random numbers, and the rate at which each variation pattern is selected are also shown.

As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the possible range of variation pattern random numbers for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is set to "0" to "99". The main CPU 101 determines to execute a jackpot game in the variable probability gaming state, and when 16R probability variable, 8R probability variable, or 4R probability variable is selected as the type of jackpot, the variation pattern random number obtained together with the jackpot random number and the symbol random number is " 0” to “29”, the variation pattern L is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol by reading the variation pattern L from the variation pattern selection table for the probability variation big hit. Further, if the acquired variation pattern random number is any one of "30" to "79", by reading the variation pattern M from the probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern M is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. select. Further, if the acquired variation pattern random number is any one of "80" to "99", by reading the variation pattern N from the probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern N is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. select.

30 random numbers from "0" to "29" are assigned to the variation pattern L in the variation pattern selection table for the probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 18A). For this reason, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern L in the case of the probability variable jackpot is 30% (=30/100). In addition, since 50 random numbers from "30" to "79" are assigned to the variation pattern M, the rate of selection of the variation pattern M in the case of a probability variable jackpot is 50% (=50 /100). In addition, since 20 random numbers from "80" to "99" are assigned to the variation pattern N, the percentage of the variation pattern N selected in the case of a probability variable jackpot is 20% (=20 /100).

(Normal jackpot variation pattern selection table)
When the main CPU 101 determines to execute a jackpot game in the probability variable gaming state and selects 8R normal as the jackpot type, the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number and the symbol random number is "0" to "99". If it is either, the variation pattern O is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol by reading the variation pattern O from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18(B)). In the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18 (B)), 100 random numbers from "0" to "99" are assigned to the variation pattern O, so if it is a normal jackpot The rate at which variation pattern O is selected is 100% (=100/100).

When determining to execute a jackpot game in the second special symbol determination, the main CPU 101 selects one of the variation pattern selection tables shown in FIG. 18 according to the type of jackpot. One of the variation patterns is selected from among the plurality of variation patterns.

<Regarding the impact effect in the variable game state>
The following can be said about the hit production performed at the time of the probability variation gaming state. That is, the ratio of the execution of the hit effect when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is the probability variation jackpot is determined by referring to the probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18 (A)). It is 30% (=30/100) which is the same as the selected ratio. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18(B)), no variation pattern for performing a hit effect is prepared (see FIG. 18(B)). This is the same for the variation pattern selection table referred to when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is lost. For these reasons, the hit effect in the variable probability game state is a jackpot announcement that definitely announces that the big win game will be executed, and also announces that the game will surely shift to the variable probability game state after the big win game is finished. It can be said that it is a predictable big hit.

Also, in the probability variable big hit variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18 (A)), when focusing on the variation pattern L with the shortest variation time of 5 seconds, as the effect content, while the impact effect is associated No other renditions are associated. From this, it is clear that when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is the probability variable jackpot and the variation pattern L is selected, the hit performance functioning as the probability variable jackpot announcement is executed with a probability of 100%. is.

In addition, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot with respect to the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is 60%, and the ratio of execution of the hit performance in the case of the probability variable jackpot is 30% as described above. Therefore, when viewed as a whole when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, the probability of executing the hit production is 18% (= 0.6 x 0.3 x 100). .

In the present embodiment, when a sudden hit production is executed in the probability variable game state, a case will be described in which the probability of shifting to the probability variable game state is 100% after the jackpot game ends. is executed, the probability of shifting to the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game may be set to a value less than 100% so that the game can be controlled in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, when the hit production is executed, the probability of shifting to the variable probability game state may be higher than the probability of shifting to the time saving game state, these probabilities may be the same, or the probability variable game The probability of shifting to the state may be lower than the probability of shifting to the time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the impact performance is always executed when the variation pattern L is selected will be described, but in other embodiments, the impact performance will not be performed even if the variation pattern L is selected. You may employ|adopt the structure that there exists. In other words, the probability of execution of the collision effect when the variation pattern L is selected is not limited to 100%, and may be less than 100%. Further, in the present embodiment, the probability that the variation pattern L is selected and the hit effect is executed is set to a value higher than the probability that another variation pattern is selected and another jackpot announcement is executed. However, in other embodiments, the magnitude relationship of these probabilities may be reversed.

<About resurrection performance>
As is clear from the notation of FIG. 18 (A), when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probability variation jackpot, the resurrection effect (see FIG. 8 (J)) is executed as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. variation pattern N may be selected. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a normal jackpot, as is clear from the notation in FIG. will not be This is the same when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a loss. From these things, it can be said that the revival production performed when the probability variation gaming state is a probability variation big hit notice, like the hitting production.

Further, when the variation pattern L is selected, the resurrection effect is not executed although the collision effect is executed. Further, when the variation pattern N is selected, the resurrection performance is executed, but the collision performance is not executed. From these things, it can be said that the hitting effect and the resurrection effect in the variable probability gaming state are prohibited so that both are not performed within the same variation.

Although not shown in FIG. 7, for example, at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win game, it is possible to perform a resurrection effect in which the three decorative symbols of the same pattern are pseudo-stopped after pretending to be lost, even in the normal game state. When the variation pattern A is selected, this resurrection effect is prohibited in the same variation as in the variable probability game state so that it is not executed together with the impact effect within the same variation.

In addition, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot to the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is 60%. is selected is 20%. Therefore, the probability that the game is controlled in the variable probability game state after the revival effect is performed and the jackpot game ends is 12% (=0.6×0.2×100).
On the other hand, with reference to the variation pattern selection table for the probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 18(A)), the rate of selection of the variation pattern L in which the impact effect is performed is 30%. Therefore, the probability that the game is controlled in the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game after the hit effect is performed is 18% (=0.6×0.3×100).
From these things, when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is a big win, it can be said that the probability of executing the hitting production is higher than the probability of executing the resurrection production.

In this embodiment, the case where the resurrection effect is always executed when the variation pattern N is selected will be described, but in other embodiments, the resurrection effect may not be executed even if the variation pattern N is selected. A configuration may be adopted. That is, the probability that the resurrection effect is executed when the variation pattern N is selected is not limited to 100%, and may be less than 100%. In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability that the variation pattern N is selected and the resurrection effect is executed is set to a value higher than the probability that another variation pattern is selected and another jackpot announcement is executed. , in other embodiments, the magnitude relationship of these probabilities may be reversed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, regardless of the type of probability variation jackpot, in the probability variation game state, when the variation pattern N is selected, the case where the resurrection effect is always executed will be described. In the case of , the resurrection effect can be executed, while in the case of the 8R probability variation or the 4R probability variation, the resurrection effect may not be executed. That is, the resurrection effect may function as a special jackpot announcement for 16R probability variation.

[Regarding the reliability of 7 symbol reach (normal game state)]
FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reliability of the ready-to-win symbols in the normal game state. FIG. 19(A) is a diagram showing a normal losing ready-to-win symbol selection table that is referenced to determine the final ready-to-win symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "losing".

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is performed when the same decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left and right columns and a ready-to-win state is established. Or it refers to the ready-to-win pattern displayed in the ready-to-win production performed immediately before the loss notification production is performed. For example, when normal reach is performed and win notification effect or loss notification effect is performed, the reach symbol displayed during normal reach corresponds to the final reach symbol. In addition, when normal reach develops into SPSP reach via character SP reach, and hit notification production or loss notification production is performed following this SPSP reach, the reach pattern displayed during this SPSP reach production corresponds to the final reach symbol.

The sub CPU 131 acquires the reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss, the sub CPU 131 selects the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number at normal times. The final ready-to-win symbol is selected by reading from the losing ready-to-win symbol selection table (see FIG. 19(A)).

In this embodiment, the possible range of reach symbol selection random numbers is set to "0" to "99". In the reach pattern selection table for normal loss (see FIG. 19 (A)), 12 random numbers are assigned to 1 pattern, 2 patterns, 4 patterns, 5 patterns, 6 patterns, 8 patterns, and 9 patterns. assigned. Also, 10 random numbers are assigned to 3 symbols, and 6 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols. For this reason, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss, the ratio of selecting 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 8 symbols, or 9 symbols as the final reach symbol is 12%. (=12/100), the ratio of selecting 3 symbols is 10% (=10/100), and the ratio of selecting 7 symbols is 6% (=6/100).

FIG. 19(B) is a diagram showing a reach symbol selection table for normal 16R probability variable jackpot, which is referred to for determining the final reach symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "16R probability variation". .

The sub CPU 131 acquires the reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number is normally selected. The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the reach symbol selection table for hour 16R probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 19(B)).

In the reach symbol selection table for normal 16R probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 19(B)), 44 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols, and 7 random numbers are assigned to other decorative symbols. A numeric value is assigned. Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, as the final reach symbol, the ratio of 7 symbols to be selected is 44% (=44/100), and other decorative symbols are selected. In both cases, the ratio is 7% (=7/100).

FIG. 19(C) is a diagram showing a normal time 6R normal jackpot ready-to-win symbol selection table that is referenced to determine the final ready-to-win symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "6R normal". .

The sub CPU 131 acquires the reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 6R normal, the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number is normal. Hour 6R The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the reach symbol selection table for normal jackpot (see FIG. 19(C)).

In the normal time 6R normal jackpot ready-to-win symbol selection table (see FIG. 19(C)), random numbers are not assigned to odd-numbered symbols. This is because the odd design functions as a probability variation design. On the other hand, 25 random numbers are allotted to even-numbered symbols. Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 6R normal, the ratio of selecting each even symbol is 25% (=25/100), and the ratio of selecting the odd symbol is 0. %.

From the ready-to-win pattern selection table illustrated in FIGS. 19A to 19C, the following can be said. That is, in the ready-to-win symbol selection table for normal failure (see FIG. 19A), 6 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols, and the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss". In this case, 7 symbols are selected as ready-to-win symbols at a rate of 6%. This means that even if the reach is established with 7 symbols, the losing notification effect may be performed later.
On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "6R normal", although the 7 symbols are not selected as the reach symbol (see FIG. 19(C)), the determination of the first special symbol determination When the result is "16R probability variation", 7 symbols are selected as ready-to-win symbols at a high rate of 44%.
Thus, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "16R probability variation", 7 symbols are likely to be selected as the reach symbol, and when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "losing" Since it is difficult to select 7 symbols as the ready-to-win symbols, it can be said that the 7-symbol ready-to-win, in which the ready-to-win is achieved with 7 symbols in the normal game state, is an effect with relatively high reliability for big hits. In addition, when it is "16R probability variation", 7 designs may always be selected as ready-to-win designs.

In addition, as is clear from the notation of FIG. 19 (B), even if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, there is a case where an even number symbol or an odd number symbol other than 7 symbols is selected as a reach symbol. However, when these ready-to-win symbols are selected, the above-described promotion effect (first half) and promotion success effect are performed based on FIG. is done. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 11(B), even if the three decorative symbols other than the seven symbols are stopped, the player can enjoy the game without losing the expectation of the 16R probability variable jackpot. .

[Regarding the reliability of the 7 symbol reach (variable game state)]
FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reliability of reach symbols in the variable probability gaming state. FIG. 20(A) is a diagram showing a probability variable losing reach symbol selection table that is referenced to determine the final reach symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "loss".

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, no ready-to-win effects other than battle ready-to-win are performed in the variable probability gaming state, so the ready-to-reach symbols displayed during the battle ready-to-win correspond to the final ready-to-win symbols in the variable probability gaming state.

The sub CPU 131 acquires the reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a loss, the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number is being changed. The final ready-to-win symbol is selected by reading from the losing ready-to-win symbol selection table (see FIG. 20(A)).

15 random numbers are assigned to each of 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 9 symbols in the probability variation reach pattern selection table (see FIG. 20(A)). . Five random numbers are assigned to each of the 3 symbols and 5 symbols. Random numbers are not assigned to the seven symbols. Therefore, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a loss, the ratio of 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, 8 symbols, or 9 symbols to be selected as the final reach symbol is 15% (= 15 /100), the rate of selecting 3 or 5 symbols is 5% (=5/100), and the rate of selecting 7 symbols is 0% (=0/100).

FIG. 19(B) is a diagram showing a reach symbol selection table for 16R probability variable jackpot during probability variation referred to for determining the final reach symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "16R probability variation". .

The sub CPU 131 acquires a reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number is a probability variation. The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the reach symbol selection table for middle 16R probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 20(B)).

In the probability variation 16R probability variation jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20 (B)), 50 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols, and 16 random values are assigned to 3 symbols. , and 10 random numbers are assigned to 5 symbols. Four random numbers are assigned to the other ready-to-win symbols. Therefore, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, the ratio of 7 symbols to be selected as the final reach symbol is 50% (=50/100), and the ratio of 3 symbols to be selected is 16% (=16/100), the percentage of 5 designs selected is 10% (=10/100), and the percentage of other decorative designs selected is 4% (=4/100). 100).

FIG. 20(C) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win symbol selection table for 8R normal jackpot during variable probability referred to determine the final ready-to-win symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "8R normal". .

The sub CPU 131 acquires the reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 8R normal, the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number is changed. The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the medium 8R normal jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20(C)).

In the probability variable 8R normal jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20(C)), random numbers are not assigned to odd symbols. On the other hand, 40 random numbers are assigned to the 4 symbols, and 20 random numbers are assigned to the other even-numbered symbols. Therefore, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 8R normal, the ratio of 4 symbols to be selected is 40% (=40/100), and the ratio of other even number symbols to be selected is 20% (=20/100), and the ratio of odd numbered symbols to be selected is 0%.

From the ready-to-win pattern selection table illustrated in FIGS. 20(A) to (C), the following can be said. That is, in the probability variable 8R normal jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20 (C)), although random numbers are not assigned to 7 symbols, the probability variable 16R probability variable jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20 ( In B)), 50 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols. Then, in the probability variable losing reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20(A)), random numbers are not assigned to the 7 symbols.
From these things, when the reach is established with 7 patterns in the variable probability game state, the loss is not notified after that, and the three decorative patterns showing the double eyes of "777" are stopped. is done. In this sense, the 7-symbol reach established in the 7-symbol reach in the probability-variable gaming state can be regarded as a big-hit notice that definitely announces that the big-hit game will be executed, and the 7-symbol alignment Since is a special effect of 16R probability variation, it can be said that the 7 symbol reach in the probability variation gaming state is a probability variation jackpot announcement.

In addition, as is clear from the notation of FIG. 20(B), even if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 16R odds, there are cases where an even number symbol or an odd number symbol other than 7 symbols is selected as a reach symbol. However, when these ready-to-win symbols are selected, a promotion effect similar to the promotion effect that is performed in the normal game state is performed, and finally a hit notification effect is performed in which the doubles of "777" are aligned. will be

[Regarding changes in reliability of 7 symbol reach]
As is clear from the description of the 7-symbol reach based on FIG. 19, the 7-symbol reach in the normal game state can be executed regardless of whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot". Although the reliability of the big win is relatively high, the reliability of the big win is less than 100%. On the other hand, as is clear from the description of the 7-symbol reach based on FIG. 20, the 7-symbol reach in the probability variation gaming state can be executed when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "jackpot". However, it is an effect with a jackpot reliability of 100%, which is not executed when the result is "losing". As is clear from these things, even with the same 7-symbol reach, there is a difference in the jackpot reliability depending on the game state, and by changing the game state from the normal game state to the probability variable game state, the 7-symbol reach Jackpot confidence changes from a value less than 100% to 100%.

It should be noted that the 7-pattern reach as a jackpot notice with a jackpot reliability of 100% is a special production for the variable probability game state, and in the normal game state, a jackpot notice (for example, a hit production) different from this 7-pattern reach is performed. will be

[About various jackpot notices]
Various jackpot announcements executable in the gaming machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23 and 25 to 28. FIG. Here, FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various jackpot announcements. FIG. 22 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a premium character effect. FIG. 23 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of rainbow title display. FIG. 25 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of rainbow-colored character display. FIG. 26 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of cut-in performed according to the operation. FIG. 27 is a schematic front view of the gaming machine 1 showing a specific example of one-shot notification. FIG. 28 is a screen diagram illustrating how the premium character effect is performed multiple times within the same variation.

The game machine 1 of the present embodiment has the above-described hit effect and capture success effect in the normal game state, hit effect and 7 symbol reach in the variable probability game state, as well as a premier character effect and a rainbow title display as a jackpot notice. , rainbow color cut-in, rainbow color character display, and one-shot announcement can be executed.

<Outline of premiere character production>
The premier character effect (see FIG. 22) is an effect in which an effect image showing a specific character (hereinafter referred to as "premier character") is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the voice of the premier character is output from the speaker 24.例文帳に追加In FIG. 22, a raccoon dog character is displayed as a premier character, and the raccoon dog character is uttering a voice saying "Go for it!". This premier character effect has a plurality of execution timings within the same variation. It is possible. It should be noted that this premium character does not appear when the determination result of the special symbol determination is "lost".

In addition, the type of premier character is not limited to one type, and multiple types of premier characters are prepared, and one of the premier characters can be displayed, or multiple premier characters can be displayed at the same time. good too. Also, the premium character may be any character as long as it does not appear when the determination result of the special symbol determination is "loss".

<Outline of rainbow title display>
The rainbow title display (see FIG. 23) is an effect in which the ready-to-win title displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 is displayed in rainbow-colored characters when a specific ready-to-win effect such as character SP ready-to-win or SPSP ready-to-win is started. This rainbow title display also has a plurality of execution timings within the same variation. In FIG. 23(A), the reach title "Take back the treasure chest!" This is an example of how it is done. FIG. 23B illustrates how the reach title "Destroy the enemy boss!" is displayed in rainbow colored characters at the start of the SPSP reach.

In addition, if this rainbow color title display is not performed when a specific reach effect such as character SP reach or SP reach is started, a blue title display that displays the reach title in blue characters or a reach title in red characters A red title is displayed by (see FIG. 24). FIG. 24 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of blue title display and red title display. In the blue title display illustrated in FIGS. 24(A) and (C), the reach title is displayed in blue characters, and in the red title display illustrated in FIGS. 24(B) and (D), the reach title is displayed in red characters. is displayed. All of the above three types of title display are images displayed on the entire screen, and are images with a wide display area for the entire screen.

Here, the blue title display indicates that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively low (for example, reliability of the jackpot: about 10%), and the red title display indicates that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high. It is a title display (for example, 30% reliability of jackpot). These two types of title display (blue title display and red title display) can be executed both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big win" and "losing". On the other hand, the rainbow color title display can be executed with a certain probability when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big win", but the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "losing". It is different from the above two types of title display in that it is not executed when

In this embodiment, the title display itself is performed in the normal gaming state, but is not performed in the variable probability gaming state. A color title may be displayed. Also, the color of the title display functioning as a jackpot notice is not limited to the rainbow color, and may be, for example, gold. Also, a specific pattern may be displayed around the title to function as a jackpot announcement.

Before the title display is displayed, the blue title display, the red title display, and the rainbow title display are displayed in this order in such a manner that the display area of the entire screen is small. You may perform the production|presentation which makes you expect whether it is actually displayed.

<Overview of rainbow color character display>
The rainbow-colored character display (see FIG. 25) displays characters displayed during specific reach effects such as character SP reach and SPSP reach (for example, lyrics displayed when a specific song is played) in rainbow colors. It is a production that displays in color. FIG. 25(A) shows a state in which the characters displayed during the competition effect in the character SP reach are displayed in rainbow colors. Further, FIG. 25(B) shows how the characters displayed during the SPSP reach are displayed in rainbow colors.

When the rainbow color character display is not performed, blue character display in which characters are displayed in blue during the ready-to-win effect, and blue character display in which characters are displayed in red during the ready-to-win effect may be performed. Here, the blue character display is an effect indicating that the reliability of the big win is relatively low (for example, the reliability of the big win is 15%), and the red character display is an effect indicating that the reliability of the big win is relatively high. (eg jackpot reliability 40%). Character display of these two kinds of colors can be executed both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and when it is "losing". On the other hand, the rainbow color character display can be executed with a certain probability when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big win", but the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "losing". It is different from the above two types of character display in that it is not executed when

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the character display itself is performed in the normal gaming state but is not performed in the probability variation gaming state, but even in the probability variation gaming state, for example, the same blue character display, Red character display and rainbow color character display may be performed. Further, the color of the character display functioning as a big hit notice is not limited to rainbow colors, and may be gold or the like.

<Overview of rainbow cut-in>
The rainbow color cut-in (see FIG. 26) is an effect in which the operation corresponding effect described above with reference to FIG. 10 is performed using a rainbow color effect image. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, at the final stage of SPSP reach, the above-described operation promotion effect is performed based on FIG. 10(H) (see FIG. 26(A)). On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 26 within the effective period, a blue cut-in (Fig. 26(B)) is performed, and a red cut-in (see FIG. 26(C)) is performed in which a cut-in image in which a red effect is applied to the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 is superimposed. There are cases. Here, the blue cut-in has a 10% jackpot reliability, while the red cut-in has a 60% jackpot reliability. When these two cut-ins are compared, Based on the difference between the color of the effect related to the cut-in image and the number of characters included in the cut-in image, the player believes that the red cut-in has a higher jackpot reliability than the blue cut-in. It is possible to easily recognize that

These blue cut-in and red cut-in can be executed both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big win" and "losing", and the blue cut-in includes the first There is a feature that it is easy to execute when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "losing", and difficult to execute in the case of "big hit". Conversely, the red cut-in is characterized in that it is likely to be executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", and is difficult to be performed in the case of "losing". In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, three types of jackpots of 16R probability variation, 6R probability variation, and 6R normal are prepared as the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, but the blue cut-in and the red cut-in , When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", it can be executed regardless of the type of jackpot. A blue cut-in may always be executed in the case of a loss, and a red cut-in or a blue cut-in may be executed in the case of a big win.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "16R probability variation", when the player operates the upper key or the lower key of the production key 27, a rainbow color cut-in (see FIG. 26 (D) ) may be performed. This rainbow color cut-in is an effect in which a cut-in image with a rainbow color effect is superimposed on the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. As shown in FIG. 26(A), the effect button 26, the effect does not occur unless the player operates the up key or the down key within the effective period.

It should be noted that the sub CPU 131 acquires information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "16R probability variation" from the game control board 100, and sets an effect pattern for performing an operation promotion effect during SPSP reach. , also sets whether to operate the up key or the down key to cause the rainbow color cut-in. For example, it may be set to generate a rainbow cut-in when the up key is operated, and to generate a blue cut-in or red cut-in when the down key is operated. Further, for example, it may be set such that a blue cut-in or a red cut-in is generated when the up key is operated, and a rainbow cut-in is generated when the down key is operated.

Rainbow cut-in, although there is a possibility that it will be executed when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "16R probability change", but it can be executed if the judgment result is "losing" do not have. Therefore, the jackpot reliability of the rainbow cut-in is 100%.

In addition, the rainbow cut-in in this embodiment is a dedicated effect related to 16R probability variation. Therefore, even if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", if the type is not "16R probability variation" but "6R probability variation" or "6R normal", the upper key within the valid period Or even if the down key is operated, the rainbow color cut-in will not occur. Therefore, even if the rainbow color cut-in does not occur in response to the operation of the up key or the down key, the player can enjoy the game while expecting "6R probability change" or "6R normal".

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute a cut-in in any one of a plurality of presentation modes, and cut-in in any one of the plurality of presentation modes (this embodiment "Rainbow color cut-in") can be executed as a jackpot notice.

The gaming machine 1 performs blue cut-in, red cut-in, and rainbow cut-in when it is determined to execute a jackpot game. That is, any of the three cut-ins can be executed in the case of a big win. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the jackpot game, there are times when blue cut-in is executed and times when red cut-in is executed, but there is no time when rainbow color cut-in is executed. . This is the reason why the rainbow color cut-in functions as a jackpot announcement that definitely announces the execution of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "16R probability variation", and if the key assigned by the sub CPU 131 of the up key and the down key is operated within the valid period, 100% A case in which a rainbow cut-in occurs with probability will be described. On the other hand, in another embodiment, in the above situation, when the assigned key is operated, a drawing lottery using random numbers is used to determine whether or not to generate the rainbow cut-in. is executed, and a rainbow color cut-in may be generated only when winning the effect lottery. It should be noted that this winning probability is considered to be, for example, 50%. In this way, even if the necessary conditions for generating the rainbow cut-in were satisfied, by preventing the rainbow cut-in from occurring at a certain rate, the rainbow cut-in did not occur. Even in this case, the player can continue to have a desire for "16R probability change".

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the left key or right key of the effect key 27 is operated during the effective period of the operation promoting effect shown in FIG. Under the condition of "16R probability change", a one-shot announcement (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, may occur.

In the present embodiment, a rainbow-colored cut-in is performed using a cut-in image in which a rainbow-colored effect is applied to a production image including three characters. The display mode of the cut-in image displayed is not limited to this. In another embodiment, for example, a cut-in displaying a cut-in image showing gold letters may be executed as a jackpot announcement.

Further, regarding the configuration of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of effect modes of the first effect mode and the second effect mode, in another embodiment, a step-up effect is performed as the predetermined effect. can be considered. This step-up production is a production that can be developed step by step up to a predetermined number of steps (for example, "5") up to a predetermined number of steps or less, and finally develops to one of steps 1 to 4. The step-up effect to be performed may be executed as a reliability suggesting effect suggesting the degree of reliability for the big win, and the step-up effect finally progressing to step 5 may be executed as a big win notice.

In addition, in this embodiment, since a configuration is adopted in which cut-in occurs at the end of SPSP reach, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time of the first special symbol such that SPSP reach is not performed is selected. cut-in does not occur. On the other hand, in another embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which cut-in can occur even at a timing other than the end of the SPSP reach, for example, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time such as variation pattern A or variation pattern B A rainbow cut-in may occur when the first special symbol is variably displayed.

(Overview of the one-shot announcement)
The one-shot notification (see FIG. 27) outputs a special effect sound from the speaker 24 that is not output when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "losing", and the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit rainbow colors. It is a production that makes

This one-shot notification is an effect that is performed in the variable probability game state in this embodiment, but in other embodiments, the one-shot notification may also be performed in the normal game state.

[Specific example of premium character production in probability variable gaming state]
FIG. 28 is a screen diagram illustrating how the premium character effect is performed multiple times within the same variation. In FIG. 28(A), two reserved icons are displayed in the second reserved icon display area 52, and the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is lost. A state in which a failure notification effect is performed in which a decorative pattern in a mode indicating that there is a winning state is stopped and displayed is exemplified. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as red pending.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the stop display of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the second corresponding to the earliest pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 52 Special symbol determination is executed. In response to this, shift processing of each pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 52 is performed, and high-speed scrolling display of decorative symbols is started (see FIGS. 28A and 28B). .

When the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the icon shifted to the area 53 is 8R probability variation, that is, the second special symbol indicating the jackpot symbol Y2 (see FIG. 6(C)) is stopped and displayed. In that case, the following production may be performed.

That is, when a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, 3 symbols on the left column are pseudo-stopped, and 7 symbols on the right column are also pseudo-stopped. A establishment inciting effect is performed (see FIG. 28(C)). While this ready-to-win establishment inciting effect is being performed, a premium character effect may be performed. In FIG. 28(C), a performance image showing a girl character is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the voice of the girl character "Ganbare! Ganbare!" An example is shown. Here, a character different from the premier character (raccoon dog character) that appears in the premier character rendition performed in the normal game state is displayed, but a character that is common to the character displayed in the premier character rendition in the normal game state. may be displayed. This also applies to the case where the premier character effect is executed at a timing other than the ready-to-reach establishment inciting effect.

In this way, after the premier character effect is performed along with the ready-to-win effect, when the decorative pattern common to the left pattern stops in the right column, the ready-to-win game is established (see FIG. 28(D)). When the reach is established, a title display is performed to display the reach title related to the battle reach, such as "Decisive Battle XX VS XXX". E)). In FIG. 28(E), the specific notation of the reach title is omitted, and the display position of the premier character is different from when the reach effect is created, but the display position of the premier character is It may be the same as at the time of establishment inciting production.

At the final stage of the battle ready-to-win, an operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 26 (see FIG. 28(F)). When the player operates the effect button 26 during the effective period of the operation promoting effect, a victory suggesting effect is performed to suggest that the player's character has defeated the enemy character and won (see FIG. 28(G)). In this victory-indicating effect, the characters "Defeat!!" indicating that the player's character has defeated the enemy character are displayed and its voice is output, and the effect accessory 7 operates while emitting light in rainbow colors. At that time, the three symbol rows displayed in small sizes in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 are stopped in a simulated manner in the form of double eyes (see FIG. 28(G)). It should be noted that if the player does not operate within the valid period, at the timing when the valid period ends, the victory suggesting effect is automatically executed, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "8R normal , a defeat suggestion effect is performed in accordance with the operation or automatically.

When the victory suggestive effect is performed as described above, the three decorative symbols that had been pseudo-stopped in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 are displayed large in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 in a pseudo-stopped state (see FIG. 28(H). ), these three decorative symbols are permanently stopped along with the permanent stop of the second special symbol (see FIG. 28(I)).

Thus, not only in the normal game state but also in the variable probability game state, it is possible to execute the premium character effect multiple times during the variable display of the second special symbols. In addition, here, the case where the premium character effect is performed three times within the same variation of the second special symbol has been described as an example, but there are cases where the premium character effect is performed twice within the same variation, and the same In some cases, the premium character effect is performed only once within the variation.

[Features of each jackpot notice]
Hereinafter, features of each jackpot announcement will be described with reference to FIG. During the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, as a jackpot notice that definitely notices that the jackpot game will be executed, a hit effect, a capture success effect, a premium character effect, a rainbow title display, and a rainbow Color cut-in and rainbow color character display can be executed.

<Characteristics of the hit production in the normal game state>
The hit performance in the normal game state is a performance in which the symbols are aligned without going through the ready-to-win state (see FIG. 14). This hit effect is executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probability variable jackpot" and the variation pattern A whose variation time is 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. (See FIG. 17A). Note that, for the variation pattern A, since there is no effect pattern in which the impact effect is not performed, the probability of executing the impact effect when the variation pattern A is selected is 100 in this embodiment. % (see FIG. 21). It should be noted that, unlike the premier character production and the like, this collision production has only one execution timing, and is characterized in that it appears only immediately after the first special symbol starts to change in the normal game state.

In addition, in the table stored in the sub ROM 132, the variation pattern A selected when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" is associated with a hit effect, but usually None of the variation patterns defined in the big hit variation pattern selection table are associated with a hit effect (see FIG. 17(B)). Therefore, when the hit notification effect is performed following the hit effect, the game is always controlled in the probability variable game state after the big win game ends. In other words, when the hit performance is performed, the game is not controlled in the normal game state after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effect called "next notice" may be performed during normal reach (see FIG. 7(K)), but this "next notice" suggests execution of SPSP reach. It is a performance to do. On the other hand, the hit performance is a performance in which the patterns are suddenly aligned without going through the reach. Therefore, when the "next announcement" is made during the variable display of the first special symbol, the impact performance is not executed. This also applies to the case where an effect or the like suggesting that the ready-to-win game is established is performed. In addition, since the "next notice" is not performed unless it develops into SPSP reach, it is not necessarily executed during normal reach, but a production route that develops from normal reach to SPSP reach is prepared. , Once the reach is established, the sudden production will not be executed after that, so when the "next notice" is executed, the sudden production will not be executed, compared to the sudden production Therefore, it can be said that other reliability suggestive effects (for example, title display) are always executed, and other big win notices (for example, rainbow-colored title display) are likely to be executed.

Further, when the variation pattern A is selected, the validity period is not set, and when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern A, it is irrelevant to the operation of the production button 26 or the production key 27. A performance will be performed. Therefore, it can be said that the hit effect is a big hit notice that can obtain an extremely high effect because it is executed at a timing that the player does not expect.

<Characteristics of capture success effect in normal game state>
The capture success effect is a jackpot announcement that is executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probable variable jackpot" or "normal jackpot" and variation pattern C is selected (Fig. 17 (A) and (B)). It should be noted that, for the variation pattern C, since there is no variable effect pattern in which the capture success effect is not performed, the probability that the capture success effect is executed when the variation pattern C is selected is 100% (see FIG. 21). Incidentally, since this capture success effect is a special effect for character SP reach, it is characterized in that it is executed only during character SP reach. In addition, the success-of-capture effect is characterized in that the big win is notified immediately after the success-of-capture effect is executed (see FIGS. 13A, 13H, and 13I). In other words, when the capture success effect is performed, the big win is announced in the character SP SP reach without the reach effect developing from the character SP reach to the SPSP reach (see FIG. 7).

Note that the capture success effect is a dedicated effect for the variation pattern C. Therefore, when the variation pattern A is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is variably displayed according to the variation pattern A, it is unlikely that the capture success effect will be performed together with the hit effect. do not have. This also applies to other jackpot announcements that are not associated with the variation pattern A.

In addition, the variation pattern C can be selected both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probability variable jackpot" and "normal jackpot" (see FIGS. 17A and 17B) . Therefore, when the winning notification performance is executed immediately after the capture success performance and the jackpot game is performed, after the jackpot game is finished, the game is controlled in the variable probability game state, and the game is controlled in the normal game state. There is.

In addition, since the character SP reach is a reach effect that is not executed in the variable probability game state, the capture success effect is also not executed in the variable probability game state.

<Features of premium character production in normal game state>
In this embodiment, the premium character effect may appear in all reach effects such as normal reach, character SP reach, and SPSP reach. On the other hand, when the variation pattern A is selected, since the big hit notice other than the hit performance is not executed, the premium character performance is, among the variation patterns of the first special symbol for the big win, It can be said that this is a big win advance notice that can be executed when a variation pattern other than the variation pattern A is selected.

The execution probability of the premium character effect differs depending on which variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol for the big win. It is set to a value within the range of ˜40% (see FIG. 29). Therefore, it can be said that it is a jackpot announcement with a low execution probability compared to the sudden hit performance executed when the variation pattern A is selected and the capture success performance executed when the variation pattern C is selected.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 22, the premium character effect may appear multiple times within the same variation. It may be performed once, twice, or three times.

In addition, the variation patterns B to E that can execute the premium character effect can be selected both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probable variable jackpot" and "normal jackpot" (Fig. 17 (A) and (B)). For this reason, when the winning notification effect is executed after the premier character effect is performed and the jackpot game is performed, after the jackpot game is finished, the game is controlled in the variable probability game state and in the normal game state. There are cases where it is done.

<Characteristics of rainbow title display in normal game state>
The rainbow title display is a jackpot announcement that displays the reach titles related to character SP reach and SPSP reach in rainbow colors, and variation patterns C to E associated with variation patterns for character SP reach and SPSP reach. Executable if either is selected.

As is clear from the above, the execution timing of the rainbow-colored title display is predetermined, and may appear at the start of the character SP reach or at the start of the SP SP reach. When the ready-to-win effect develops into SPSP ready-to-win, a rainbow title display may be performed both at the start of character SP ready-to-win and at the start of SPSP ready-to-win.

Note that the execution probability of the rainbow-colored title display varies depending on which variation pattern is selected from the variation patterns C to E, but in the present embodiment, the execution probability of the rainbow-colored title display is 5 to 15%. It is set to a value within the range. Specific execution probabilities of the above-described premium character effect, rainbow title display, rainbow cut-in, and rainbow character display will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

In addition, the variation patterns C to E in which the rainbow title display can be executed can be selected both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probable variable jackpot" and "normal jackpot" (Fig. 17(A) and (B)). For this reason, when the winning notification effect is executed after the rainbow title display is performed and the jackpot game is performed, after the jackpot game is finished, the game is controlled in the variable probability game state and the game is controlled in the normal game state. may be controlled.

<Features of rainbow color cut-in in normal game state>
The rainbow color cut-in is a jackpot notice that may appear at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win production. Therefore, the rainbow title display can be executed when the variation patterns D and E associated with the variation performance pattern for performing the SPSP ready-to-win performance are selected as the variation performance pattern, and the execution probability is determined by which variation It is set to be 5% even if the pattern is selected.

Further, as described above, the rainbow cut-in does not appear unless a predetermined operation (in this embodiment, operation of the up key or down key of the effect keys 27) is performed. In addition, the rainbow cut-in has a characteristic that it appears only when the big hit related to the first special symbol determination is "16R probability change". These are as described above with reference to FIG.

<Characteristics of rainbow color character display in normal game state>
The rainbow-colored character display is a dedicated effect for these two types of ready-to-win effects performed during character SP reach and SPSP reach, and variation patterns C to which are associated with the variable effect patterns in which these reach effects are performed. E (see FIGS. 17A and 17B) is selectable. Although the execution probability of the rainbow-colored character display differs depending on the selected variation pattern, in the present embodiment, it is set to a value within the range of 5% to 20%.

The display of rainbow colored characters may be performed during character SP reach or during SP SP reach. is selected, it may appear multiple times (eg, twice) within the same variation.

In addition, the variation patterns C to E in which the rainbow-colored character display can be executed can be selected both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probable variable jackpot" and "normal jackpot" (Fig. 17(A) and (B)). For this reason, when the hit notification effect is executed after the rainbow-colored character display is performed and the jackpot game is performed, after the jackpot game is finished, the game is controlled in the variable probability game state and in the normal game state. may be controlled.

On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol in the probability variable gaming state, as a jackpot announcement that definitely announces that the jackpot game will be executed, a sudden hit effect, a one-shot announcement, a premium character effect, and a 7-pattern reach are displayed. It is viable.

<Features of the impact production in the variable game state>
The hitting effect in the variable probability game state is a directing effect in which the symbols are arranged without going through the reach (see FIG. 16). This hit effect is executed when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "probability variable jackpot" and the variation pattern L whose variation time is 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. (See FIG. 18(A)). Note that, for the variation pattern L, since there is no effect pattern in which the impact effect is not performed, the probability of executing the impact effect when the variation pattern L is selected is 100 in this embodiment. % (see FIG. 21). In addition, unlike the premium character production in the probability variation gaming state, only one execution timing is prepared for this hit production, and it is said that it will appear only immediately after the start of the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state. Characteristic.

In addition, although the variation pattern L selected when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "probability variable jackpot" is associated with a hit production, it is usually defined in the jackpot variation pattern selection table. None of the existing variation patterns are associated with a collision effect (see FIG. 18(B)). Therefore, when the hit notification effect is performed following the hit effect, the game is always controlled in the probability variable game state after the big win game ends. In other words, when the hit performance is performed, the game is not controlled in the normal game state after the jackpot game ends.

Also, in the present embodiment, if the variation pattern L is selected, the hit production is always executed, but for example, in the probability variation game state, the second special symbol (or the first Until the number of fluctuations, which is the number of times of variable display of special symbols), reaches a predetermined value (for example, 30 times), it is possible to execute a collision performance, and after reaching the predetermined value, a collision performance is executed. You can choose not to. This control can be realized, for example, by not selecting the variation pattern L after the number of variations reaches a predetermined value.

<Features of one-shot notification in variable game state>
The one-shot announcement is a jackpot announcement in which the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 are accompanied by rainbow-colored light emission and a special effect sound is output from the speaker 24.例文帳に追加This one-shot announcement is a jackpot announcement that can be executed when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "16R probability variation" and the variation pattern M or variation pattern N is selected. is set to 15% even when the variation pattern of is selected. Since the one-shot notification is not performed unless the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "16R probability variation", when the one-shot notification is performed, "16R probability variation" becomes rich at that time. Thus, the one-shot notification performed in the probability variation gaming state is a dedicated effect of "16R probability variation", so in this embodiment, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "8R probability variation", In the case of "4R probability change" and in the case of "8R normal", no one-shot announcement is made.

<Characteristics of 7 symbol reach in variable game state>
The 7-symbol ready-to-win that functions as a jackpot announcement is a special effect of the probability variable gaming state that can be executed when any one of the variation patterns L to N is selected. That is, the 7-symbol ready-to-win in the normal game state does not function as a big-hit notice because the reliability of the big-hit is less than 100%. Since this 7-pattern ready-to-win is selected only when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "16R probability variable", "16R probability-variable" becomes rich when the reach is established with 7 symbols.

[About the jackpot notice type selection table]
FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a jackpot announcement type selection table. The sub-ROM 132 contains a jackpot announcement other than the jackpot announcement linked to the variation pattern such as a hit performance in the normal game state, a capture success performance in the normal game state, a hit performance in the probability variable game state, and a seven-pattern reach in the probability variable game state. A jackpot prediction type selection table is stored which is referred to when deciding whether or not to execute.

This jackpot notice type selection table includes a first jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(A)), a second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(B)), and a third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29). (C)), and a fourth jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29(D)).

(First jackpot notice type selection table)
The first jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29(A)) shows that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", and when the variation pattern B is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol , is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a jackpot announcement.

When the variation pattern B is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 131 acquires a jackpot prediction random number for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot prediction, and obtains a jackpot prediction random number corresponding to the jackpot prediction random number. By reading out the notice type from the first jackpot notice type selection table, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot notice. In this embodiment, the possible range of the jackpot prediction random number is set to "0" to "99".

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 21, the big win notice that can be executed when the variation pattern B is selected is only the premier character effect. Therefore, in the first jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29A), "premium character effect" and "without premiere character effect" are defined as the jackpot announcement type, and "premium character effect is present". , and 60 random numbers are assigned to "no premier character effect".

Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot" and the variation pattern B is selected, the probability that "premier character effect is present" is read out and the premier character effect is executed is 40% (=40/100).

(Second jackpot notice type selection table)
The second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(B)) shows that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", and when the variation pattern C is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol , is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a jackpot announcement.

When the variation pattern C is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 131 acquires a jackpot prediction random number for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot prediction, and obtains a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot prediction random number. Whether or not to execute a big win notice is determined by reading out the notice type from the second big win notice type selection table.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 21, when the variation pattern C is selected, there are three types of jackpot announcements that can be executed other than the capture success effect: the premiere character effect, the rainbow color title display, and the rainbow color character display. be. For this reason, in the second jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29B), "Premium character effect", "No premiere character effect", "Rainbow title display", "Rainbow title not displayed", "With rainbow color character display" and "without rainbow color character display" are defined.

In the second jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29(B)), 10 random numbers are assigned to "with premier character effect", and 90 random numbers are assigned to "without premier character effect". A numeric value is assigned. Therefore, the probability that "premium character effect is present" is read out and the premier character effect is executed by the variation of the variation pattern C is 10% (=10/100).

In addition, in the second jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29B), 15 random numbers are assigned to "with rainbow color title display", and for "without rainbow color title display" 85 random values are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "with rainbow color title display" is read and the rainbow color title display is executed due to the variation of variation pattern C is 15% (=15/100).

In addition, in the second jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29B), 20 random numbers are assigned to "with rainbow color character display", and "without rainbow color character display" 80 random values are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "display of rainbow-colored characters" is read out and rainbow-colored characters are displayed due to the variation of the variation pattern C is 20% (=20/100).

In addition, in the second jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29B), a common random number value is assigned to "premium character effect" and "rainbow title display". Therefore, when the obtained jackpot prediction random number is, for example, "64", both the premier character effect and the rainbow title display are performed when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern C. It will be. This is the same for the premium character effect and the rainbow color character display, and also for the rainbow color title display and the rainbow color character display.

(Third jackpot notice type selection table)
In the third jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29(C)), the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", and the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) as the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, it is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the jackpot announcement.

When the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 131 acquires a jackpot prediction random number for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot prediction, and obtains the jackpot prediction random number. Whether or not to execute a big win announcement is determined by reading out the big win announcement type corresponding to the announcement random number from the third big win announcement type selection table.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 21, the jackpot announcements that can be executed when variation pattern D or variation pattern E is selected include premium character effects, rainbow title display, rainbow color cut-in, and rainbow color character display. There are 4 types. Therefore, in the third jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29(C)), "premium character effect", "no premiere character effect", "rainbow title display", "rainbow title display not present", "With rainbow color cut-in", "without rainbow color cut-in", "with rainbow color character display", and "without rainbow color character display" are defined.

In the third jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29(C)), 5 random numbers are assigned to "premier character effect", and 95 random numbers are assigned to "no premiere character effect". A numeric value is assigned. Therefore, the probability that "with premier character effect" is read out and the premier character effect is executed by variation of variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is 5% (=5/100).

In addition, in the third jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29(C)), five random numbers are assigned to "with rainbow color title display", and for "without rainbow color title display" 95 random values are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "with rainbow-colored title display" is read and the rainbow-colored title display is executed due to the variation of variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is 5% (=5/100).

In addition, in the third jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29(C)), five random numbers are assigned to "with rainbow cut-in", and for "without rainbow cut-in" 95 random values are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "with rainbow cut-in" is read and the rainbow cut-in is executed due to the variation of variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is 5% (=5/100).
However, the rainbow cut-in is not executed unless the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is "16R probability change", so even if it is decided to execute the rainbow color cut-in, if it is not "16R probability change", the above The rainbow color cut-in is not performed even if the key or the down key is operated.

In addition, in the third jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29(C)), five random numbers are assigned to "with rainbow color character display", and for "without rainbow color character display" 95 random values are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "display of rainbow-colored characters" is read out and rainbow-colored characters are displayed due to the variation of variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is 20% (=20/100).

In addition, in the third jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29(C)), the execution probability of the premium character effect, the rainbow title display, the rainbow color cut-in, and the rainbow color character display is all 5%. However, these execution probabilities may be different from each other, or only one or two execution probabilities may be different.

In addition, in the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(C)), similar to the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29(B)), a random A numeric value is assigned. For this reason, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E), a plurality of big hit announcements may be compounded.

(Fourth jackpot notice type selection table)
In the fourth jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29 (D)), the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "probable variable jackpot", and the variation pattern M (or variation pattern N) is the variation pattern of the second special symbol ) is selected, it is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the jackpot announcement.

When the variation pattern M (or the variation pattern N) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 131 acquires a jackpot prediction random number for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot prediction, and obtains the jackpot prediction random number. Whether or not to execute the big win announcement is determined by reading out the big win announcement type corresponding to the announcement random number from the fourth big win announcement type selection table.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 21, when the variation pattern M or the variation pattern N is selected, there are two types of big hit announcements other than the 7-symbol reach, one-shot announcement and premium character effect. For this reason, the fourth jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29 (D)) defines "with one-shot announcement", "without one-shot announcement", "with premier character effect", and "without premier character effect". It is

In the fourth jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29(D)), 15 random numbers are assigned to "with one-shot announcement", and 85 random numbers are assigned to "without one-shot announcement". A numeric value is assigned. Therefore, the probability that "with one-shot announcement" is read and one-shot announcement is executed due to the variation of variation pattern M (or variation pattern N) is 15% (=15/100).

In addition, the one-shot announcement is a special production of "16R probability variation", so even if the jackpot related to the second special pattern determination is "probability variation jackpot", in the case of "8R probability variation" or "4R probability variation" does not execute the one-shot announcement even if "with one-shot announcement" is read.

In addition, in the fourth jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29(D)), 15 random numbers are assigned to "with premier character effect", and 85 to "without premier character effect". are assigned random values. Therefore, the probability that "with premier character effect" is read out and the premier character effect is executed by variation of variation pattern M (or variation pattern N) is 15% (=15/100).

In addition, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the probability variation gaming state is "8R normal", the probability variation gaming state ends and the game is controlled in the time saving gaming state. For this reason, the "8R normal" related to the second special symbol determination cannot be said to be a very favorable jackpot for the player. On the contrary, there is a possibility that the production effect is lowered.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot announcement type selection table referred to when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "8R normal" is not prepared.

[Regarding the execution timing of each effect in the normal game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the execution timing of each effect in the normal game state will be described. Here, FIG. 30 is a time chart showing a specific example of effects in the normal game state.

As illustrated in FIG. 30 (A), when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probable variation jackpot" and the variation pattern A is selected, about Until two seconds have passed, the liquid crystal screen 5 undergoes a high-speed change in which the three pattern rows are scrolled from top to bottom at high speed, and along with this, a dark transition effect (see FIG. 14(C)) is performed. done. Then, following this darkening effect, the above-described sudden hit effect is executed for about 3 seconds, and with the main stop of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 as the first special symbol, the hit notification effect to notify the probability variable jackpot is performed. will be

In this way, when the variation pattern A (see FIG. 17 (A)) with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected, the effect of notifying the establishment of reach, which can be executed when another variation pattern is selected , normal reach, character SP reach, SP SP reach, etc. are not executed.

Also, the hit effect in the normal game state is a special effect for the variation pattern A. For this reason, when another variation pattern such as variation pattern C is selected, the impact performance is not executed. Conversely, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern A, the big hit notice executed when the first special symbol is variably displayed in another variation pattern is not executed. .

As illustrated in FIG. 30(B), when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot" and the variation pattern C whose variation time is 40 seconds is selected, the variation display of the first special symbol During the period from when is started until reach is established, pre-reach production is performed. This ready-to-reach performance consists of high-speed fluctuation for scrolling the three pattern rows from top to bottom at high speed and low-speed fluctuation for gradually lowering the scroll speed of each pattern row and pseudo-stopping the left and right patterns. The high-speed variation, which is the first half of the pre-reach performance, is common to the high-speed variation performed when the variation pattern A is selected.

As is clear from this, when the variation pattern A is selected, a sudden impact effect occurs while the high-speed variation of the symbol row common to the other variation patterns is being performed. do. As a result, the player who expected that the scrolling speed will be lowered and the ready-to-win effect will be performed will be greatly surprised, and a high performance effect can be obtained.

Returning to the description of FIG. 30(B), as described above, the reach pre-reach effect is performed, reach is established, normal reach develops into character SP reach, and the scramble effect during character SP reach is followed by capture success effect. is performed, and immediately after that, a winning notification effect accompanying the stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Here, the seizure success effect is a effect that functions as a jackpot notice as described above, but the hit effect is 5 seconds, which is the variation time of the variation pattern A after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. It is performed before the elapse of , but it is performed after a very long time of 31 seconds, which is more than 5 seconds, has elapsed.

By the way, if the sudden hit effect is not performed even after the lapse of 5 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern L, after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the player has a sense of expectation for the appearance of the big hit notice. It may decrease gradually. On the other hand, when the variation pattern L is selected, 5 seconds or more have elapsed since the variation display of the second special symbol was started, and 40 seconds, which is the variation time of the variation pattern M, has elapsed. By performing a premium character performance as a big hit notice, the player can be surprised and a high performance effect can be obtained.

In addition, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "losing" and the variation pattern H (see FIG. 17(C)) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, pre-reach production, normal reach, character SP It is different from the case where the variation pattern C is selected in that the common effects of the ready-to-win title display and the contest effect are executed, and the capture failure effect is performed instead of the capture success effect. That is, when the case where the variation pattern C is selected and the case where the variation pattern H is selected are compared, although common effects common to each other are executed, when the variation pattern C is selected, the common effects and The difference between the two is that both the big hit notice (here, the capture success effect) are performed, whereas when the variation pattern H is selected, the common effect is executed without executing the big hit notice. do.

In addition, the hit performance in the normal game state is a performance configured to end within 5 seconds after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, when the variation pattern C with the variation time of 40 seconds is selected, even if the probability variable jackpot is achieved, the sudden hit effect is not performed.

As illustrated in FIG. 30(C), when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot" and the variation pattern E is selected, the first special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern E. Along with this, pre-reach effects (consisting of high-speed fluctuation and low-speed fluctuation), normal reach, character SP reach, and SPSP reach are performed. Here, when compared with the effects executed when the variation pattern C is selected, they are common in that the pre-reach effects, normal reach, title display, and competition effects are executed. On the other hand, an effect that is not executed in the variation pattern C such as a competition failure effect and an SPSP ready-to-win is executed.

In addition, FIG. 30(C) shows that a rainbow cut-in is executed in accordance with the operation for the operation promotion effect at the end of the SPSP reach. Time (2 seconds) from the start of the variable display of the 1 special symbol to the execution of the big hit notice (hitting effect), and when the variation pattern C is selected, the variable display of the 1st special symbol is started. After that, the time (31 seconds) until the jackpot notice (capture success effect) is executed, and when the fluctuation pattern E is selected, the jackpot notice (rainbow color cut-in ) is executed (79 seconds (=40 seconds+39 seconds)). Further, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern E, the hit performance and the capture success performance are not performed.

Also, as is clear from the comparison between the notation of FIG. 30A and the notation of FIG. While the time (third time) is 3 seconds, the time (fourth time) from the execution of the capture success effect to the execution of the hit notification effect in accordance with the selection of the variation pattern C is 9. seconds, and the third time and the fourth time are different from each other. Here, since the 3rd time is shorter than the 4th time, it can be said that the impact effect makes the player feel that a sudden big win has occurred more than the capture success effect.

In this embodiment, the third time is shorter than the fourth time, but in other embodiments, the third time may be longer than the fourth time.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the variation pattern A is selected, a collision effect is executed at the first execution timing immediately after the variation display of the first special symbol is started. On the other hand, the premier character effect that can be executed when a variation pattern other than the variation pattern A is selected is executed during the character SP reach competition effect (see FIG. 22(A): an example of the second timing). It is different from the hit production in that it is sometimes executed during the SPSP reach (see FIG. 22(B): an example of the third timing).

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is capable of executing a hit effect in which the execution timing and the number of times of execution are fixed, and a premier character effect in which the number of times of execution and the execution timing are variable. can be suppressed to obtain a high performance effect.

[About the execution timing of each effect in the variable probability game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the execution timing of each effect in the variable probability gaming state will be described. Here, FIG. 31 is a time chart showing a specific example of the effect in the variable probability gaming state.

As illustrated in FIG. 31 (A), when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" and the variation pattern L is selected, about Until one second elapses, the liquid crystal screen 5 undergoes a high-speed change in which the three pattern rows are scrolled from top to bottom at high speed, and along with this, a dark transition effect (see FIG. 16(C)) is performed. done. Then, following this darkening performance, the above-described hit performance is executed for about 4 seconds, and as one of the jackpot patterns Y1 to Y3 as the second special pattern is finally stopped, a hit notification is given to notify the probability variable jackpot. A performance is held.

In this way, when the variation pattern L (see FIG. 18 (A)) with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected, an effect to notify that the reach is established can be executed when another variation pattern is selected. , Battle reach, etc. are not executed.

In addition, the hitting effect in the probability variable gaming state is a dedicated effect for the variation pattern L. Therefore, when another variation pattern such as the variation pattern M is selected, the impact performance is not executed. Conversely, when the second special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern L, the big hit notice executed when the second special symbol is variably displayed in another variation pattern is not executed. .

Incidentally, when the variation pattern L is selected, it is also possible to start the collision performance almost simultaneously with the start of the high-speed variation of the decorative symbols without executing the darkening performance. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern L selected during the normal gaming state and the variation pattern A selected during the probability variation gaming state, will be described for the case where the variation time is common, but other In embodiments, these variable times may be different. That is, the variation time of variation pattern A may be shorter than the variation time of variation pattern L, or the variation time of variation pattern A may be longer than the variation time of variation pattern L.

As exemplified in FIG. 31 (B), when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" and the variation pattern M whose variation time is 40 seconds is selected, the variation of the second special symbol During the period from when the display is started until the ready-to-win state is established, a pre-to-reach effect is performed. This ready-to-reach performance consists of high-speed fluctuation for scrolling the three pattern rows from top to bottom at high speed and low-speed fluctuation for gradually lowering the scroll speed of each pattern row and pseudo-stopping the left and right patterns. The high-speed variation, which is the first half of the pre-reach performance, is common to the high-speed variation performed when the variation pattern L is selected.

As is clear from this, when the variation pattern L is selected, a sudden impact effect occurs while the high-speed variation of the symbol row, which is common to the other variation patterns, is being performed. do. As a result, the player who expected that the scrolling speed will be lowered and the ready-to-win effect will be performed will be greatly surprised, and a high performance effect can be obtained.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 31(B), as described above, the ready-to-win production is performed, the ready-to-win is established, the battle ready-to-win is started, and at the end of this battle ready-to-win, the operation promoting presentation is performed, and the production button 26 is executed. A victory suggestion effect is executed according to the operation of (see FIG. 15). Here, as exemplified in FIG. 31(B), when the operation promotion effect is performed, there is a case where a premium character effect is performed as a jackpot announcement, but the impact effect performed for the variation pattern L is , 30 seconds (= 10 seconds + 30 seconds), which is more than 5 seconds, is performed before 5 seconds, which is the variation time of the variation pattern L, has elapsed after the start of the variation display of the second special symbol. It is different from the sudden hit production in that it is performed after a very long time has passed.

In addition, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "probability variation big hit" and the variation pattern N (see FIG. 18 (A)) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, from the pre-reach production to the battle reach During this battle reach, after the operation promoting effect is performed, the defeat suggesting effect is performed, and after pretending to be lost, the revival effect is performed and the victory suggesting effect is performed. Comparing the effect performed with respect to the variation pattern N with the effect performed with respect to the variation pattern L, they are common in that three symbol sequences are varied at high speed. On the other hand, in the variation of the variation pattern N, the two are different in that the battle reach, the operation promotion effect, the defeat suggestion effect, the revival effect, the victory suggestion effect, etc., which are not performed for the change pattern L, are performed. there is

In addition, the hit performance in the probability variable gaming state is a performance configured to end within 5 seconds after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the variation pattern N with a variation time of 50 seconds is selected, although there is a probability variable jackpot, no impact effect is performed.

In addition, FIG. 31(C) shows that a one-shot announcement is made immediately after the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, but when the variation pattern L is selected, the variation of the second special symbol The time (1 second) from the start of the display to the execution of the big hit notice (impact effect), and when the fluctuation pattern M is selected, the big hit notice ( The time (30 seconds) until the premier character effect) is executed, and when the fluctuation pattern N is selected, the time from the start of the variable display of the second special pattern to the execution of the big hit notice (one-shot notice). (about 0 seconds here) are different from each other. Further, when the second special symbol is variably displayed according to the variability pattern N, no impact performance is performed.

[Regarding the reliability of the pre-production]
FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the jackpot reliability of the pending icon. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are cases where a preliminary effect is performed as an effect that indicates the reliability of a big win by displaying a special icon as a reserved icon. In the gaming machine 1, when the first special symbol determination is suspended, there is a case where a preliminary determination process of whether or not to execute a jackpot game is executed. Specifically, based on the jackpot random number acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 11, whether the first special symbol determination is determined as "jackpot". It is determined in advance whether or not Also, based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, which variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol that is variably displayed according to the execution of the first special symbol determination, etc. are also determined in advance. Then, based on these preliminary determination results, it is determined whether or not to execute the preliminary effect, and in the case of executing the preliminary effect, which color to display the pending icon, etc., and these determination results are used. In response, the pre-rendering is executed.

As exemplified in FIG. 32, the effect of displaying the normal icon as the pending icon without performing the preliminary effect is an effect suggesting that the reliability of the big win is 1%. On the other hand, when executing the pre-production, the pending icon may be displayed in blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors, but the pre-production jackpot reliability for displaying the blue pending icon is about 5%. is. In addition, the reliability of the big win in the pre-production that displays the green pending icon is about 10%, and the reliability of the big win in the pre-production that displays the red pending icon is about 50%. In addition, the reliability of the big win in the pre-production that displays the gold pending icon is about 75%, and the reliability of the big win in the pre-production that displays the rainbow-colored pending icon is 100%.

From these facts, first, it can be said that the preliminary effect of displaying the rainbow-colored pending icon has a function as a big-hit notice that foretells that a big-hit game will be executed. That is, when the pending icon is displayed in a display color other than the rainbow color, the preliminary effect does not function as a jackpot notice that definitely announces that the jackpot game will be executed, but the pending icon is displayed in a rainbow color. When displayed in color, the advance production functions as a jackpot notice.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first special symbol determination is executed, the preliminary determination result indicating that the variation pattern of the first special symbol in which at least the normal reach effect is performed is selected is If not obtained, the pre-rendering of displaying the blue pending icon is not executed. That is, when the preliminary determination result indicating that the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the non-reach performance is selected is obtained, the preliminary performance of displaying the blue pending icon is not performed.

It should be noted that the same applies to the preliminary effect of displaying green reserve, red reserve, gold reserve, and rainbow reserve, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol in which at least one of character SP reach and SPSP reach is executed is A configuration is employed in which the preliminary effect of displaying a green or higher pending icon is not performed unless a preliminary determination result indicating selection is obtained.

It should be noted that the jackpot announcement performed in the normal game state can be executed when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "big hit", but can be executed when it is "losing". do not have. Therefore, it can be said that the big win notice is easier to execute when the preliminary performance is performed than when the preliminary performance of displaying the reserved icon in blue or more color is not performed (it may be performed without fail). For this reason, by executing the preliminary effect, the appearance of the big hit notice in the variation (variation display of the first special symbol performed in accordance with the execution of the suspended first special symbol determination) is made to the player. can be expected effectively. In addition, when the pre-production is performed, other reliability suggestive productions are likely to be executed in a production mode with a high degree of reliability (expectation for transitioning to a variable gaming state in the event of a jackpot expectation and a jackpot) (always reliability It may be executed in a high production mode.).

By the way, the hit effect that is performed in the normal game state is not executed unless the variation pattern A in which the variation time during which the ready-to-win effect is not performed is 5 seconds is selected. Therefore, at least when the pre-performance that is executed only when the normal ready-to-win performance is to be performed is performed, the impact performance will not be performed due to the variation. Therefore, it can be said that the pre-performance is a performance that denies the occurrence of a sudden impact performance.

In other words, when the preliminary effect of displaying a blue or higher pending icon is executed, the probability of executing another jackpot announcement is higher than the probability of executing the hitting effect (0% in this embodiment). I can say.

In addition, when the white reserved icon is displayed without performing the preliminary effect, basically, the player can hardly expect a big win. However, in the present embodiment, while there is a possibility that a sudden production will be executed when the preliminary production is not performed, there is no possibility that a sudden production will be executed when the preliminary production is performed. You can expect the appearance of a big hit notice. Therefore, the player can expect the appearance of the big win notice both when the preliminary performance is not executed and when the preliminary performance is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the preliminary effect based on the preliminary determination result is an icon change effect in which the pending icon is displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode. Other effects may be used as long as they are based on the production. For example, the pre-performance may be a chance performance to stop and display a specific combination of decorative symbols called a chance chance during the loss notification performance before the change starts. Also, the preliminary effect may be a mode transition effect or the like that changes the effect mode from a normal effect mode to a specific effect mode (such as called a zone) based on the result of preliminary determination.

[About various screens displayed when waiting for customers]
FIG. 33 is a screen diagram illustrating a customer waiting menu screen. The gaming machine 1 shifts to a so-called customer waiting state when the variable display of symbols is not performed in a state in which the right of special symbol determination is not reserved. Then, when a set time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after shifting to the customer waiting state, the customer waiting menu screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 33(A)). As shown in FIG. 33(A), this customer waiting menu screen, in this embodiment, has an image suggesting that the occurrence rate of the big hit notice can be selected by operating (pressing) the effect button 26, and the effect key 27. and an image suggesting that volume setting can be performed by operating (pressing) the left key or right key of the effect key 27, and an image suggesting that light amount setting can be performed by operating (pressing) the up key or the down key of the effect key 27. is configured as

When the player operates the left key or right key of the effect keys 27 while the customer waiting menu screen is displayed, a volume setting screen exemplified in FIG. 33(B) is displayed. As illustrated in FIG. 33B, the volume setting screen includes an image showing the current volume, an image showing that the volume can be adjusted by operating the left key or right key of the effect keys 27, and the effect button 26. and an image indicating that the display of the volume setting screen ends when is operated.

On the other hand, when the player operates the left key of the effect key 27 while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume can be lowered, and conversely, the volume can be raised by operating the right key. . Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can switch the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 24 in five steps. is shown.

On the other hand, when the player operates the up key or the down key of the effect keys 27 while the customer waiting menu screen is displayed, a light amount setting screen exemplified in FIG. 33(D) is displayed. As exemplified in FIG. 33D, the light amount setting screen includes an image showing the current light amount, an image showing that the light amount can be adjusted by operating the up key or down key of the effect key 27, and the effect button 26. and an image indicating that display of the light amount setting screen ends when is operated.

On the other hand, when the player operates the upper key of the effect key 27 while the light amount setting screen is displayed, the light amount can be increased, and conversely, the volume can be decreased by operating the down key. . Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can switch the light intensity of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in three stages. The state set to eye (minimum) is shown.

When the player operates the production button 26 while the customer waiting menu screen (see FIG. 33(A)) is displayed, a jackpot prediction occurrence rate setting screen exemplified in FIG. 33(C) is displayed. As exemplified in FIG. 33(C), the jackpot prediction occurrence rate setting screen includes two selection items (“Normal” and “Significantly UP”) regarding the appearance rate of the jackpot prediction, and the left or right key of the effect key 27. It is composed of an image showing that a cursor can be moved to two selection items by operating a key, and an image showing that a selection relating to the occurrence rate of big win notice can be determined by operating a performance button 26.例文帳に追加

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to set either a "normal mode" in which the appearance rate of the big win notice is relatively low, or a "big hit notice up mode" in which the appearance rate of the big win notice is relatively high.
FIG. 33(C) illustrates a state in which the cursor is positioned on "Normal" of the two selection items "Significantly UP" and "Normal", and "Normal" is highlighted. . On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 26 in this state, it is determined that "normal" has been selected, and the "normal mode" is set. Specifically, the mode setting information stored in sub-RAM 133 is updated to information indicating "normal mode."
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33(C), when the player operates the left key of the effect key 27 with the cursor positioned at "normal", the cursor moves to "significantly UP" and " Significantly UP" is highlighted. Then, when the player operates the performance button 26 in this state, it is determined that the ``largely UP'' has been selected, and the ``jackpot advance notice up mode'' is set. Specifically, the mode setting information stored in the sub-RAM 133 is updated to information indicating the "jackpot advance notice mode".

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can arbitrarily change the appearance rate of the big win notice, the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 24, and the light amount of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. It is possible.

[Regarding the appearance rate of the jackpot notice]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the appearance rate of the big hit notice will be described. Here, FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot notice type selection table used when the jackpot notice up mode is set.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can set the appearance rate of the big win notice to the "normal mode" or the "big win notice up mode". When the "normal mode" is set, it is determined whether or not to execute each jackpot prediction with reference to the jackpot prediction type selection table described above based on FIGS. 29(A) to (D). On the other hand, when the "jackpot notice up mode" is set, each jackpot notice is executed by referring to the jackpot notice type selection table for the jackpot notice up mode illustrated in FIGS. It is decided whether to

The processing for determining whether or not to execute each jackpot prediction using the jackpot prediction type selection table illustrated in FIG. 34 is performed by referring to FIGS. Since it is the same as the process of determining whether to execute or not, detailed description here is omitted.

Incidentally, when comparing the jackpot prediction type selection table illustrated in FIG. 29 and the jackpot prediction type selection table for the jackpot prediction up mode illustrated in FIG. The number of random numbers assigned is different. Specifically, in the jackpot notice type selection table for each jackpot notice up mode illustrated in FIG. 34, for the jackpot notice type selection table illustrated in FIG. The number of random values associated with each is doubled. Therefore, by setting the "big win notice up mode", the appearance rate of the big win notice is approximately doubled compared to when the "normal mode" is set.

Also, here, an example in which the appearance rate of the jackpot notice is doubled has been explained, but how much the appearance rate of the jackpot notice is increased can be changed as appropriate. For example, the appearance rate of the jackpot notice is increased by 10 times. A table for a jackpot advance notice mode may be prepared. Also, here, the case where the appearance rate of each jackpot notice is uniformly doubled has been described as an example, but in another embodiment, for example, the appearance rate of the premier character effect is increased by 5 times, The rate at which the appearance rate increases may be varied depending on the type of the announcement effect, such as increasing the appearance rate of the announcement by 10 times.

By the way, as is clear from the above explanation based on FIGS. Whether or not to execute is determined without using the selection table. Then, the fluctuation production pattern table (associating the special symbol fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation production pattern) stored in the sub ROM 132, which is used to determine whether or not to execute the big hit notice, Even if it is set to "jackpot notice up mode", it will not be switched to another table. For this reason, even if it is set to "jackpot advance notice up mode" for the hit production and capture success production performed in the normal game state, and the hit production performed in the variable probability game state, other jackpots The appearance rate does not change like the notice.

[Configuration example of main RAM 103]
FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103. As shown in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 35(A), the main RAM 103 has a storage area for storing acquired information obtained when a game ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. storage area 1030, first reserved storage area 1031, second reserved storage area 1032, third reserved storage area 1033, fourth reserved storage area 1034, first reserved storage area 1035, second reserved storage area 1036, third reserved storage area A storage area 1037 and a fourth reserved storage area 1038 are provided.

The determination storage area 1030 is a storage area for storing various information used for the special symbol determination when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 are storage areas for storing various information related to the first special symbol determination, and the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 are the second It is a storage area in which various information related to special symbol determination is stored. Also, the second special symbol determination is prioritized over the first special symbol determination. Therefore, in the determination storage area 1030, when the second special symbol determination is suspended when the special symbol determination is performed, various information stored in the first suspension storage area 1035 is shifted, and the first When only the special symbol determination is reserved, various information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted.

As illustrated in FIG. 35(B), the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1038 are respectively acquired by the main CPU 101, an area for storing a jackpot random number, an area for storing a pattern random number, an area for storing a reach random number, It includes an area for storing variation pattern random numbers, an area for storing pre-determination information that is information indicating the result of pre-determination, and the like. That is, the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1038 are areas for storing information for withholding the right of special symbol determination.

A jackpot random number is a random number for determining a jackpot or a loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot. The ready-to-win random number is a random number for determining whether to perform a ready-to-win effect or not to perform a ready-to-win effect when it is determined that the game is lost. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbols when the special symbols are variably displayed.

The pre-determination information is information obtained by a pre-determination process (see FIG. 40), which will be described later, based on a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number. Preliminary judgment information is specifically, winning start information, information indicating whether the judgment result of special symbol judgment is a jackpot, information indicating what kind of jackpot if it is a jackpot, Information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol, information indicating the game state of the gaming machine 1, and the like are included. Here, the winning starting gate information is acquired when the game ball wins the first starting gate 11 with the jackpot random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the same reserved storage area. It is information indicating whether the game ball was acquired when the game ball entered the second starting port 12 or won a prize. Pre-determination information including these information is stored in the same reservation storage area as the jackpot random numbers, pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers used in the pre-determination process.

The five pieces of information explained based on FIG. 35(B) are stored in the first reservation storage area 1031 to the fourth reservation storage area 1034 in order from the first reservation storage area 1031 each time the game ball wins the first start port 11. Each time a game ball wins in the second starting port 12, it is stored in one of the first reservation storage area 1035 to the fourth reservation storage area 1038 in order from the first reservation storage area 1035.

For example, when the information is not stored in any of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 and five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired, the five pieces of information are It is stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 . Also, for example, when five information related to the first special design determination is newly acquired in a state in which five pieces of information are stored in each of the first reserved storage area 1031 and the second reserved storage area 1032, the five pieces of information is stored in the third reserved storage area 1033 .

In addition, when the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 when executing the first special symbol determination, it is stored in the reserved storage area after the second reserved storage area 1032. The information is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031 side. For example, when the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 to the third reserved storage area 1033 is shifted to the judgment storage area 1030, the second Information stored in reserved storage area 1032 is shifted to first reserved storage area 1031 and information stored in third reserved storage area 1033 is shifted to second reserved storage area 1032 .

Such shift processing of information is similarly performed in the first reservation storage area 1035 to the fourth reservation storage area 1038 in which the information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. In addition, in the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are suspended, that is, information is stored in both the first reserved storage area 1031 and the first reserved storage area 1035. If stored, the shift processing in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 is preferentially performed prior to the shift processing in the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 .

By the way, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 and various random numbers are obtained when the special symbols are variably displayed or during the jackpot game, the special symbol judgment and the special symbol are not performed. Variable display cannot be performed immediately.

Therefore, when various random numbers are acquired under such circumstances, the main CPU 101 stores the acquired random numbers, etc. to 1038. On the other hand, when the special symbols are not variably displayed, the determination of the special symbols is not suspended, and the jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 101 receives various random numbers and the like as a result of winning the starting game. It is assumed that it is directly stored in the determination storage area 1030 .

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can reserve the right of special symbol determination when the special symbol determination cannot be executed immediately.

[Timer interrupt processing by game control board 100]
Next, the timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100. As shown in FIG. The game control board 100 repeats a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 36 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. . The processing of the game control board 100, which will be explained based on the flow charts of FIG.

First, the main CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating various random numbers including jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, and normal symbol random numbers (step S1).

The jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number are as described above, and the normal symbol random number is a random number for determining whether or not to open the second starting port 12 . A jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, a fluctuation pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number are incremented by "1" each time the process of step S1 is performed. A loop counter is used as a counter for performing the processing of step S1, and each random number is reset to "0" and updated after reaching a preset maximum value.

Following the processing of step S1, the main CPU 101 executes switch processing including processing of acquiring various random numbers in response to input of detection signals from each switch (step S2). This switch processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the processing of step S2, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination, causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to variably display the special symbol, and then determines the result of the special symbol determination. A special design process including a process of stopping and displaying a special design showing is executed (step S3). This special symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

Following the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 executes normal symbol determination, causes the normal symbol display 45 to variably display the normal symbol, and then stops and displays the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. A normal design process is executed (step S4).

Following the processing of step S4, the main CPU 101 performs the electric tulip processing of operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip control unit 113 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 as a result of the normal symbol determination. (step S5).

Following the processing of step S5, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning prize opening control process for controlling the large winning prize opening control section 117 to open the large winning prize opening 13 when it is determined that a big win has been achieved in the processing of step S3. Execute (step S6).

Following the processing of step S6, the main CPU 101 executes prize ball processing for controlling payout of prize balls according to winning of game balls (step S7).

Following the processing of step S7, the main CPU 101 transmits various commands set (stored) in the main RAM 103 in the processing steps before step S7 and information necessary for determining the content of the effect to the effect control board 130. Processing is executed (step S8).

[Switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 37 is a detailed flowchart of the switch processing in step S2 of FIG. Following the processing of step S1, the main CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the first starting port switch 111, as illustrated in FIG. For random numbers (jackpot random numbers, pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers), the first starter switch processing including the processing of acquiring the value at the time when the detection signal from the first starter switch 111 is input is executed. (step S21). This first start opening switch process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the second starter switch 112, and the detection signal from the second starter switch 112 is detected for various random numbers appropriately updated by the process of step S1. A second start opening switch process including a process of acquiring a value at the time of input is executed (step S22). This second start opening switch process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Then, the main CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the first gate switch 114 (or the second gate switch 115), and the normal symbol random number appropriately updated by the process of step S1 is detected by the first gate switch. 114 (or the second gate switch 115) to acquire the value at the time when the detection signal is input (step S23).

[First start opening switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 38 is a detailed flowchart of the first start opening switch process in step S21 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 38, following the random number updating process in step S1, the main CPU 101 receives a detection signal from the first starter switch 111 (specifically, when the first starter switch 111 is "ON"). It is determined whether or not the first starting port switch 111 has been turned "ON" (step S210). Here, when it is determined that the first starting port switch 111 has turned "ON" (step S210: YES), the number U1 of pending first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum pending number Umax1 ("4" in this embodiment) of the first special symbol determination (step S211).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations U1 is less than the maximum number of reservations Umax1 (step S211: YES), it updates the value of the number of reservations U1 by adding "1" (step S212) to the first special symbol. A jackpot random number, a pattern random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are obtained as information to be used for determination, and these random numbers are associated and stored in the main RAM 103 (steps S213 to S216).

In this way, various acquisition information such as a jackpot random number is acquired in accordance with the establishment of the acquisition condition that the first starting port switch 111 is turned "ON" while the number U1 of reservations is less than the maximum number Umax1 of reservations.
In addition, when various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the variable display of the first special symbol can be executed immediately, these random numbers are directly stored in the judgment storage area 1030, and the situation where they cannot be executed immediately , these random numbers are stored in one of the first reserved storage area 1031 to fourth reserved storage area 1034 .

Following the processing of step S216, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state (step S217). A time saving game flag is stored in the main RAM 103 . This time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" when controlling the electric tulip 17 in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 12, and conversely, the game ball is likely to enter the second starting port 12. This flag is set to "ON" when controlling the electric tulip 17 to the state. In step S217, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state based on whether or not the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON".

When the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is not the high base state (step S217: NO), that is, when the time saving game flag is set to "OFF", the main CPU 101 executes preliminary determination processing (step S218). Specifically, prior to the jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 42) and variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 43) described later, based on the information acquired by the processing of steps S213 to S216, whether or not the jackpot Along with pre-determining whether or not, pre-determination is performed to pre-determine the variation pattern of the first special symbol that is actually selected when the first special symbol determination is performed. This advance determination processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S218, or determines that it is in the high base state (the time saving game flag is set to "ON") (step S217: YES), the first special symbol determination is performed. Such pending command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S219). This pending command is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been suspended, and includes the prior determination information obtained in the process of step S218, and the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8. sent to.

[Second start opening switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the second start opening switch process in step S22 of FIG. As exemplified in FIG. 39, the main CPU 101 receives the detection signal from the second starter switch 112 (specifically, when the second starter switch 112 is "ON") following the first starter switch process in step S21. is input, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 112 is "ON" (step S220).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the second starting port switch 112 is turned "ON" (step S220: YES), the second special symbol determination pending number U2 stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum pending number Umax2 ("4" in this embodiment) of the second special symbol determination (step S221).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations U2 is less than the maximum number of reservations Umax2 (step S221: YES), it updates the value of the number of reservations U2 by adding "1" (step S222) to the second special symbol. A jackpot random number, a pattern random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are obtained as information used for determination, and these random numbers are associated and stored in the main RAM 103 (steps S223 to S226).

In addition, when various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately, these random numbers are directly stored in the judgment storage area 1030, and the situation where they cannot be executed immediately , these random numbers are stored in one of the first reserved storage area 1035 to fourth reserved storage area 1038 .

Following the process of step S226, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current state is the high base state (step S227), similarly to the process of step S217. Here, when it is determined that the current state is the high base state (step S227: YES), that is, when the time saving game flag is set to "ON", a preliminary determination process is executed (step S228). This advance determination processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S228, or determines that it is not in the high base state (the time saving game flag is set to "OFF") (step S227: NO), the second special symbol determination is performed. Such pending command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S229). This pending command is a command for notifying that the second special symbol determination has been suspended, and includes the prior determination information obtained in the process of step S228, and the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8. sent to.

[Preliminary determination processing by the game control board 100]
Hereinafter, the prior determination processing executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the preliminary determination processing in steps S218 and S228 of FIGS.

If the main CPU 101 determines in the process of step S217 of FIG. 38 that the base state is not the high base state, or if it determines that the base state is the high base state in the process of step S227 of FIG. ). Specifically, in the case of a low probability state (normal game state or time saving game state in this embodiment), the low probability jackpot random number table (see FIG. 6A) is read from the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 set to On the other hand, when it is in a high probability state (probability variable gaming state in this embodiment), the high probability jackpot random number table (see FIG. 6A) is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 . 38 (or step S223 in FIG. 39) matches any of the winning values stored in the jackpot random number table set in the main RAM 103. Based on this, it is determined whether or not it will be determined as a big hit at the start of the fluctuation.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is determined to be a big win at the start of the variation based on the determination result of step S2181 (step S2182). Here, when it is determined that it is a big win at the start of the fluctuation (step S2182: YES), the big win fluctuation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S2183). In addition, when executing the preliminary determination process related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state, the tables illustrated in FIGS. 17A and 17B are set. Moreover, when executing the preliminary determination process related to the second special symbol determination in the variable probability gaming state, the tables illustrated in FIGS. 18(A) and (B) are set.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit at the start of the variation (step S2182: NO), it determines whether or not the ready-to-win effect is performed during the variation (step S2184). Specifically, based on whether or not the reach random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process in step S2181 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102, the It is determined whether or not a ready-to-win performance is performed during variation.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the ready-to-win effect will be performed (step S2184: YES), it reads the ready-to-win variation pattern table from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103 (step S2185). For example, in the case of executing the preliminary determination relating to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state, the table illustrated in FIG. 17(C) is set.

By the way, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "losing" and the reach effect is not performed during the variation, the first special symbol is based on the number of reservations of the first special symbol determination at the start of the variation. is determined. Then, the number of pending first special symbol determination may differ between before and after the suspended first special symbol determination is digested. For this reason, the special symbol variation pattern acquired before the first special symbol determination is digested may differ from the special symbol variation pattern selected when the first special symbol determination is actually digested. be. In other words, for the right of the first special symbol determination for which the ready-to-win effect is not performed during the variation, it may not be possible to acquire an accurate special symbol variation pattern prior to the first special symbol determination.

Therefore, when it is determined that the ready-to-win effect is not performed (step S2184: NO), the process proceeds to step S2187 without performing the fluctuation pattern random number determination process of step S2186 described later.

When the main CPU 101 sets the big hit variation pattern table or the ready-to-win variation pattern table, the main CPU 101 executes variation pattern random number determination processing (step S2186). Specifically, the variation pattern random number acquired at the time of the starting opening winning along with the jackpot random number used in the processing of step S2181 is selected from among the random values stipulated in the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103. The variation pattern of the first special symbol to be selected in the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation is specified based on which random value matches.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S2186 or determines that the ready-to-win effect is not performed (step S2184: NO), the main CPU 101 generates advance determination information and stores it in the main RAM 103 (step S2187). The area in which this advance determination information is stored is as described above with reference to FIG.

In this way, the main CPU 101, based on the acquired information such as the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball wins the first start hole 11 (or the second start hole 12), Prior to performing the determination process and the variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern (that is, variation time) of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is acquired.

In addition, here, the prior determination processing performed when the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved has been described as an example, but even when the right of the second special symbol determination is reserved, the same prior Judgment processing is performed. Further, when the right of special symbol determination is not reserved and is executed immediately, the pre-determination process is not performed.

In this way, the main CPU 101 can execute a preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute a big winning game before special symbol determination is performed for the reserved right.

[Special symbol processing by game control board 100]
Next, details of the special symbol processing executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG.

As illustrated in FIG. 41, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big win game is in progress based on whether or not the big win game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" ( step S301). This jackpot game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, and is set to "ON" at the start of the jackpot game, and set to "OFF" at the end of the jackpot game. Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is not being performed (step S301: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed (step S302). Here, if it is determined that the special symbols are not displayed in a variable display (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol determination pending number U2 stored in the main RAM 103 is "1" or more. (step S303). Here, when it is determined that the number of reservations U2 is "1" or more (step S303: YES), the number of reservations U2 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S304).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations U2 is not "1" or more (step S303: NO), whether or not the number of reservations U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is "1" or more. (step S305). Here, when it is determined that the number of reservations U1 is equal to or greater than "1" (step S305: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the number of reservations U1 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S306).

Following the processing of step S304 or the processing of step S306, the main CPU 101 executes shift processing on the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103 (step S308). When executing the shift process of step S308 following the process of step S304, the main CPU 101 determines the earliest acquired information stored in the first reserved storage area 1035 for second special symbol determination. 1030, and the remaining acquired information is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 side. Also, when the shift process is executed following the process of step S306, the earliest acquired information stored in the first reservation storage area 1031 for the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area 1030. At the same time, the remaining acquired information is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 side.

Following the process of step S308, the main CPU 101 executes the big win determination process based on the random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S309). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has occurred, and when it is determined that a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot is determined. Then, special symbol setting information indicating the results of these processes is set in the main RAM 103 . This jackpot determination process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 41, when the start condition is satisfied that the jackpot game is not in progress and the symbols are not fluctuating, the main CPU 101, in this step S309, based on the jackpot random number or the like acquired at the time of winning the start gate, It is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player.

Following the process of step S309, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern of special symbols (step S310). This variation pattern selection process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the process of step S310, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol setting information set in the process of step S309, whether this special symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination, or to the second special symbol determination. A change start command including information indicating whether the change is relevant, setting information of the change pattern set in the process of step S310, information on the game state of the gaming machine 1, etc. is set in the main RAM 103 (step S311).

This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of an effect associated with the variable display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8. As a result, the variable display of decorative patterns on the liquid crystal display device 5 and the like are started.

Following the processing of step S311, the main CPU 101 starts variable display of special symbols based on the setting information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command set in the processing of step S311 (step S312). At that time, when the processing of steps S309 to S311 is performed in a state in which the acquisition information (random number) related to the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area 1030, in the first special symbol display 41 The variable display of the first special symbol is started. On the other hand, when the processing of step S309 to step S311 is performed in a state where the acquired information (random number) related to the second special symbol determination is stored, the second special symbol display device 42 fluctuates the second special symbol. to start.

Next, the main CPU 101 starts measuring the fluctuation time, which is the elapsed time after the start of the fluctuation display in step S312 (step S313).

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S313, or determines that the special symbols are being changed and displayed (step S302: YES), the main CPU 101 selects by the process of step S310 from the start of measurement of the change time in step S313. It is determined whether or not the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has passed (step S315). Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not passed (step S315: NO), the process proceeds to the normal design process of step S4.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation time has elapsed (step S315: YES), the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. A pattern confirmation command for notifying that the game has been played is set in the main RAM 103 (step S316). This symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, a process of stopping and displaying the decorative symbols that have been variably displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in a manner that indicates the determination result of the special symbol determination is performed.

Following the process of step S316, the main CPU 101 terminates the variable display of the special symbols started in the process of step S312 (step S317). Specifically, the special symbol (big win symbol or losing symbol) set in the process of step S309 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device which has been variably displaying the special symbol. It should be noted that the stop display of this special symbol is continued until at least a predetermined symbol fixing time (for example, 1 second) elapses.

In this way, the main CPU 101 variably displays the special symbols on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and then displays the special symbol indicating the determination result of the big win determination process on the first special symbol display 41. Alternatively, the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

Following the process of step S317, the main CPU 101 resets the variation time that has started to be measured in the process of step S313 (step S318), and performs stop processing including processing for starting a jackpot game in the event of a jackpot. Execute (step S319). This in-stop process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[Jackpot determination processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the big hit determination process in step S309 of FIG. The main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S3091). Specifically, whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 matches a preset winning value (see FIG. 6A) is used to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. judge.

The winning value here is the winning value of the jackpot defined in the high-probability jackpot random number table or the low-probability jackpot random number table. When the jackpot determination is executed in the high probability state (probability variable gaming state in this embodiment), the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table for high probability is used. On the other hand, when the jackpot determination is executed in the low probability state (normal game state or time saving game state in this embodiment), the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table for low probability is used.

In this way, the main CPU 101 stores in the determination storage area 1030 the acquired information such as the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. When the condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the jackpot random number.

Following the processing of step S3091, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the big win determination is a big win (step S3092). Here, when it is determined that it is a big win (step S3092: YES), the type of the big win is determined by referring to the symbol determination table for the big win stored in the main ROM 102 (see FIGS. 6B and 6C). Determine (step S3093).

Specifically, when the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 together with the jackpot random number used for the jackpot determination in step S3091 relates to the first special symbol determination, the symbol random number is , the type of jackpot is determined based on which random number values stipulated in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 6B) for the first starting opening winning match. On the other hand, if it relates to the second special symbol determination, the symbol random number matches with any random number defined in the symbol determination table for the second starting opening winning (see FIG. 6(C)). determines the type of jackpot.

Then, the main CPU 101 sets, in the main RAM 103, the setting information of the jackpot symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (step S3094). As a result, the jackpot pattern set here during the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display device 41 or the second special pattern display device 42, and the jackpot game corresponding to the special pattern is performed. will be taken.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big win (step S3092: NO), it sets the setting information of the losing symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S3095). As a result, the lost symbol set here during the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display . In this case, the jackpot game is not performed.

[Variation pattern selection processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 43 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S310 of FIG. After executing the big win determination process in step S309 of FIG. 41, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result in step S3091 is a big win (step S3101). Here, when it is determined that it is a big win (step S3101: YES), the big win variation pattern table (see FIGS. 17 and 18) is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3102).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3101: NO), whether or not the reach random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to perform a ready-to-win effect that makes the player expect a big win (step S3103). Here, if it is determined that the ready-to-win effect is performed (step S3103: YES), the ready-to-win variation pattern table (see FIG. 17C) is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3104). Conversely, when it is determined that the ready-to-win effect is not performed (step S3103: NO), the fluctuation pattern table for losing is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3105).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 refers to the fluctuation pattern table set in the main RAM 103 by the process of step S3102, the process of step S3104, or the process of step S3105, and executes the fluctuation pattern random number determination process (step S3106). Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern table or the reach variation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 is A variation pattern is selected by reading from the pattern table.

Also, when the fluctuation pattern table for losing is set in the main RAM 103, the number of pending special symbol determination is specified based on the number of pending storage areas in which various information is stored immediately before the shift processing of step S308 is performed. , A variation pattern is selected by reading a variation pattern corresponding to the specified pending number and the presence or absence of the current time saving from the variation pattern table for loss.

By selecting the special symbol variation pattern in this manner, the special symbol variation time is inevitably determined.

When the variation pattern is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the setting information of the selected variation pattern in the main RAM 103 (step S3107). This variation pattern setting information is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the effect control board 130 together with the pattern setting information set in the main RAM 103 by the jackpot determination process of step S309 described above.

[Stopping process by game control board 100]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the stop processing in step S319 of FIG. After resetting the variation time by the process of step S318, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (step S3191). Here, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S3191: YES), the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S3192).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving game flag and probability variable game flag stored in the main RAM 103 to "OFF" (step S3193). Here, the time saving game flag is a flag indicating whether or not it is a time saving state in which the electric chew support function is given, and the probability variation game flag is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol determination. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is in a high probability state.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game state is controlled by setting the time saving game flag and probability variation game flag. That is, when the game state is controlled to the variable probability game state, both the probability variable game flag and the time saving game flag are set to "ON", and when the game state is controlled to the time saving game state, the probability variable game flag is "OFF". , the time saving game flag is set to "ON", and both the probability variation game flag and the time saving game flag are set to "OFF" when controlling the game state to the normal game state.

Following the process of step S3193, the main CPU 101 sets an opening command to the main RAM 103 for notifying that the jackpot game will start (step S3194). This opening command includes information such as the type of jackpot and the opening pattern of the jackpot 13 during the jackpot game, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3191: NO), it determines whether or not the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3196). Here, if it is determined that the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3196: YES), the remaining time saving game count J stored in the main RAM 103 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3197). This time-saving game residual number J indicates the remaining number of times special symbol determination is executed in the time-saving state (high base state).

Following the process of step S3197, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the remaining time saving game count J is "0" (step S3198). Here, if it is determined that the time saving game residual number J is "0" (step S3198: YES), the time saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3199). As a result, the electric chewing support function is no longer provided.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3199, when it determines that the time saving game flag is not "ON" (step S3196: NO), or when it determines that the remaining time saving game number J is not "0" ( Step S3198: NO), it is determined whether or not the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S3201).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S3201: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the high probability game residual count K stored in the main RAM 103 by subtracting "1". (Step S3202). This high-probability game residual number K indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is executed in the high-probability state.

Following the process of step S3202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-probability game remaining number K is "0" (step S3203). Here, when it is determined that the high probability game residual number K is "0" (step S3203: YES), the probability variation game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3204). As a result, special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state.

When the processing of this step S3204 is performed, if it is determined that the probability variation gaming flag is not "ON" (step S3201: NO), if it is determined that the high probability game residual number K is not "0" ( Step S3203: NO), or when the processing of step S3194 is performed, the processing proceeds to the normal design processing of step S4.

[Game state setting processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of a game state setting process executed in the game control board 100 at the end of the jackpot game. In the gaming machine 1, the big winning game is executed by the big winning opening opening control process of step S6, but when the ending in this big winning game is completed, the game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 after the big winning game is completed. is executed.

When the ending of the jackpot game is completed, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot that triggered the current jackpot game is a variable probability jackpot based on the pattern setting information stored in the main RAM 103 (step S6261). Here, when it is determined that it is not a variable probability jackpot (step S6261: NO), the process proceeds to step S6266, which will be described later.

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is a variable probability jackpot (step S6261: YES), it sets the variable probability game flag to "ON" (step S6262), and sets the high probability game residual number K to, for example, "10000" (step S6263). By performing the processing of this step S6263, the high probability state is substantially continued until the next big hit.

Following the process of step S6263, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving game flag to "ON" (step S6264), and sets the remaining time saving game number J to "10000" (step S6265). By performing a series of processes from step S6262 to step S6265 in this manner, the game is controlled in the variable probability game state until the next big hit after the big hit game is completed.

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a probability variable jackpot (step S6261: NO), it sets the time saving game flag to "ON" (step S6266), and sets the time saving game remaining number J to "50" (step S6267). .

By performing a series of processes of steps S6266 and S6267 in this way, if a big hit does not occur on the way after the big hit game ends, the game can be played in a time saving game state until 50 special symbol determinations are performed. will be controlled.

[Timer interrupt processing by production control board 130]
When the game machine 1 is powered on, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets a CTC cycle, which is a cycle for performing timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. Then, the sub CPU 131 repeats a random number update process for updating the effect random number or the like used for determining the contents of the effect at a predetermined cycle shorter than the CTC cycle. That is, while the gaming machine 1 is running, the sub CPU 131 repeats the random number update process at a predetermined cycle and repeats the timer interrupt process at the CTC cycle.

Hereinafter, the timer interrupt processing executed in the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the effect control board 130. As shown in FIG. The sub CPU 131 repeats a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 46 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the same manner as the timer interrupt process performed by the game control board 100 . In addition, the process performed by the production|presentation control board 130 demonstrated based on the flowchart after FIG. 46 is performed according to the command which sub CPU131 issues based on the program memorize|stored in sub ROM132.

The sub CPU 131 first executes a command receiving process including a process of performing a process according to the command when a command is received from the game control board 100 (step S10). This command reception processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the processing of step S10, the sub CPU 131 executes command transmission processing (step S30). Specifically, the command set in the sub-RAM 133 by the process of step S10 is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 (and the lamp control board 150). By executing this command transmission process, the image sound control board 140 is instructed to execute effects such as image display and sound output, and the lamp control board 150 is instructed to execute effects such as lighting of various lamps. instructed.

Then, the sub CPU 131 executes data transfer processing (step S50). Specifically, since data relating to image sound control is transmitted from the image sound control board 140 , the data is transferred to the lamp control board 150 . As a result, the lamp control board 150 controls the production by the production media such as the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the production accessory 7, the production button 26, etc. so as to synchronize with the production performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24. be done.

[Command reception processing by production control board 130]
FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 47, the sub CPU 131 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the game control board 100 is received (step S11). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S11: NO), the process proceeds to step S30.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that it has received a command from the game control board 100 (step S11: YES), the command is step S219 (see FIG. 38) or step S229 (see FIG. 39) according to game control It is determined whether or not it is a hold command transmitted from the substrate 100 (step S12). Here, if it is determined that the command is not a pending command (step S12: NO), the process proceeds to step S14, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes hold command reception processing (step S13). This pending command reception process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a hold command (step S12: NO), the command is a variation start command transmitted from the game control board 100 according to the process of step S311 (see FIG. 41). It is determined whether or not there is (step S14). Here, if it is determined that the received command is not the variation start command (step S14: NO), the process proceeds to step S18, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is the variation start command (step S15: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes variation start command reception processing (step S15). This fluctuation start command reception process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the variation start command (step S14: NO), the command is the symbol determination command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the process of step S316 (see FIG. 41). It is determined whether or not (step S18). When the sub CPU 131 determines that it is a pattern confirmation command (step S18: YES), it terminates the variation display of the decorative symbols and stops displaying the decorative symbols indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination executed at the start of the symbol variation. A variable effect end command instructing execution of processing is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S19).

By transmitting this fluctuation effect end command to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the process of step S30, the special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is the second. Along with being stopped and displayed on the 1 special symbol display device 41 (or the second special symbol display device 42), a decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. It will be stopped and displayed.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the pattern confirmation command (step S18: NO), it determines whether the command is an operation command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 (step S21). This operation command is a command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 to notify the information when the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 detects the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27. It includes information indicating whether the key is the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, information indicating which key was operated when the effect key 27 was operated, and the like. If the sub CPU 131 determines that it has received an operation command (step S21: YES), it sets an operation notification command in the sub RAM 133M (step S22). By transmitting this operation command to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150, a process for realizing an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 and settings based on these operations is performed. done.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not an operation command (step S21: NO), it executes other processing (step S23).

[Pending command reception processing by production control board 130]
FIG. 48 is a detailed flowchart of pending command reception processing in step 13 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a pending command (step S12: YES), as illustrated in FIG. updated to the new value (step S130). Specifically, when the hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the number of reserves of the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1", and the hold command related to the second special symbol determination is received. When it does, it updates to the value which added "1" to the number of reservations of the 2nd special design decision.

Next, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received pending command includes the prior determination information (step S131), and if it determines that the prior determination information is not included (step S131: NO). , an icon display command is set (step S132).

This icon display command is a command to display a pending icon indicating that the special symbol determination has been suspended, and is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process of step S30. This icon display command includes winning start opening information, and the supervising CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140 determines, for example, which of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination has been suspended. A pending icon is displayed in the corresponding display area (the first pending icon display area 51 if the first special symbol determination is pending) by specifying based on the winning start opening information.

It should be noted that if the received pending command does not contain the pre-determination information, the pre-determination based on the pre-determination result described above cannot be performed. Therefore, when the process of step S132 is performed following the process of step S131, an icon display command that does not include the preliminary determination information is set, and in response to this, the normal icon is displayed as the pending icon. become.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received pending command contains the prior determination information (step S131: YES), the sub CPU 131 stores the prior determination information in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 133 (step S133).

Next, the sub CPU 131 executes a preliminary effect lottery (step S134). Specifically, first, a pre-rendering random number is acquired and stored in the sub-RAM 133 . This pre-effect random number is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the hold command as the pre-effect random number, Whether or not to execute the pre-rendering is determined based on whether or not it matches with any of the random numbers relating to the pre-rendering random numbers stored in the ROM 132 .

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the random number value related to suspension of the first special symbol determination stored in the sub ROM 132 has the following characteristics. That is, the combination in which the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big win" is associated with more random numbers than the combination in which the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "losing". there is Further, a combination of variation patterns in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long is associated with more random numbers than a combination of variation patterns in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively short. It is Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the reliability of the big win, the easier the pre-performance is executed, and conversely, the lower the reliability of the big win, the less likely the pre-performance is executed.

The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the pre-production based on the lottery result of step S134 (step S135), and if it determines to execute the pre-production (step S135: YES), for example, a production using random numbers is executed. A lottery is carried out to select one performance pattern from a plurality of performance patterns for preliminary performance, and the selected preliminary performance pattern is set in a sub-RAM 133 (step S136).

Here, the case where the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the pre-production and the lottery for selecting the production pattern of the pre-production are separate lotteries has been described as an example, but whether or not to execute the pre-production is explained as an example. In the case of execution, what kind of performance pattern the preliminary performance is to be executed may be determined by a single lottery.

After executing the process of step S136, the sub CPU 131 sets an icon display command in the sub RAM 133 (step S132). In this way, the icon display command including the information indicating the preliminary effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 133 by executing the process of step S132 following the process of step S136. By transmitting this icon display command to the image sound control board 140, the preliminary effect is realized.

[Variation start command reception processing by production control board 130]
FIG. 49 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S15 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command received from the game control board 100 is the variation start command (step S14: YES), it executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG.

That is, the sub CPU 131 acquires the value at the time when the variation start command is received from the game control board 100 and stores it in the sub RAM 133 with respect to the performance random number appropriately updated by the random number update process described above (step S150). Then, the received variation start command is analyzed (step S151).

As described above, the variation start command includes symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, and whether the symbol setting information is related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. Winning start opening information indicating whether or not, setting information of the variation pattern of the special symbol, information indicating the game state of the gaming machine 1, and the like are included. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation start command, it is possible to specify the type and result of the special symbol determination. In other words, it is possible to specify whether it is a big win or a loss, and if it is a big win, what kind of big win it is. Further, by specifying whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern for losing based on the setting information of the variation pattern, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach. . Also, based on the setting information of the variation pattern, it is possible to specify the variation time of the special symbol. Also, the current game state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the game state.

After analyzing the variation start command, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received variation start command is a variation start command related to "jackpot" based on the analysis result (step S152). Here, if it is determined that the command is not a variation start command related to "jackpot", the process proceeds to step S154, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received variation start command is a variation start command related to "big win" (step S152: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a big win notice effect pattern setting process (step S153). This jackpot announcement effect pattern setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S153, or when it determines that the received variation start command is not a variation start command related to the "jackpot" (step S152: NO), the liquid crystal A variable performance pattern setting process for setting the performance pattern of the variable performance performed on the screen 5 is executed (step S154). By executing this variable effect pattern setting process, the variation mode of the decorative pattern, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect, the type of the decorative pattern that constitutes the ready-to-win effect, the type and content of the ready-to-win effect, the type of the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed, etc. is determined. This variation effect pattern setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

The sub CPU 131, following the process of step S154, executes a reliability suggesting effect pattern setting process for setting a effect pattern of a reliability suggesting effect suggesting the reliability of a big win, such as a step-up effect and a speech announcement (step S155). This reliability suggestive effect pattern setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 131 starts a variable effect in the variable effect pattern set in the process of step S154, and starts a variable effect that instructs execution of the reliability suggestive effect in the reliability suggestive effect pattern set in the process of step S155. A command is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S157).

This variable effect start command includes at least information indicating the variable effect pattern set by the process of step S154 and information indicating the reliability suggestive effect pattern set by the process of step S155, and step S30. is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission processing of . As a result, the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 implement the variable effect and the reliability suggesting effect whose effect patterns are determined in the effect control board 130 .

It should be noted that when the setting information relating to the jackpot announcement is set in the sub-RAM 133 by the jackpot announcement effect pattern setting process to be described later, the variable effect start command including this setting information is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. sent. As a result, the big hit notice set by the sub CPU 131 is realized.

Following the process of step S157, the sub CPU 131 subtracts "1" from the pending number stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S158). Specifically, when the variation start command received from the game control board 100 is a command relating to the first special symbol determination, the number of reservations of the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1". On the other hand, when the received variation start command is a command relating to the second special symbol determination, the number of pending of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1".

[Big Win Notice Effect Pattern Setting Process by Effect Control Board 130]
FIG. 50 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot announcement effect pattern setting process in step S153 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received variation start command is a variation start command related to “jackpot” (step S152: YES), as illustrated in FIG. Store (step S1530). The jackpot prediction random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot prediction, and is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed. The sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time of determining that the variation start command related to the big win has been received as a big win notice random number and stores it in the sub RAM 133 .

Next, the sub CPU 131 reads the jackpot prediction type selection table corresponding to the game state and the variation pattern from the sub ROM 132 and sets it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1531). As described above, the received variation start command includes symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, and whether the symbol setting information is related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination Winning start opening information indicating whether or not it is a thing, setting information of the variation pattern of the special symbol, information indicating the game state of the gaming machine 1, and the like are included. The sub CPU 131 executes the following processes based on these pieces of information included in the variation start command.

That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big win" and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the variation pattern B, the sub CPU 131 selects the first jackpot announcement type from the sub ROM 132. A table (see FIG. 29A) is read out and set in the sub-RAM 133 .

Further, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is specified as variation pattern C, the sub CPU 131 selects the second big hit notice type from the sub ROM 132. The table (see FIG. 29B) is read out and set in the sub-RAM 133 .

Further, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big win" and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E), the sub ROM 132 The third jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29(C)) is read out and set in the sub-RAM 133 .

Further, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big win" and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is the variation pattern M (or variation pattern N), the sub ROM 132 The fourth jackpot announcement type selection table (see FIG. 29(D)) is read out and set in the sub-RAM 133 .

The above is the processing when the normal mode is set. When the jackpot advance notice up mode is set, any of the four selection tables for the jackpot advance notice up mode described above based on FIG. Alternatively, one selection table is read from the sub-ROM 132 and set in the sub-RAM 133 .

Following the process of step S1531, the sub CPU 131 executes jackpot announcement effect type selection process (step S1532). This jackpot notice effect type selection process reads the jackpot notice type corresponding to the jackpot notice random number obtained in the process of step S1530 from the selection table set in the process of step S1531, thereby determining whether or not to execute each jackpot notice. is determined, and which jackpot prediction is to be executed when the jackpot prediction is to be executed. Since this jackpot announcement effect type selection processing is as described above with reference to FIG. 29 and the like, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, based on the processing result of step S1532, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute a jackpot announcement (step S1533). Here, if it is determined not to execute the jackpot notice (step S1533: NO), that is, if all the jackpot notice types read from the set selection table correspond to no jackpot notice, a series of jackpots After the announcement effect pattern setting process is completed, the process proceeds to the variable effect pattern setting process of step S154.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines to execute the jackpot announcement (step S1533), the sub CPU 131 judges whether or not the jackpot announcement can be executed multiple times within the same variation (step S1534). Specifically, for each jackpot notice, information indicating the maximum number of times it can be executed within the same variation is stored in the sub ROM 132, and the sub CPU 131 refers to the above information regarding the jackpot notice determined to be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not it can be executed multiple times within the same variation. When it is determined that a plurality of types of jackpot notices are to be executed, the judgment processing of step S1534 is performed for each of these jackpot notices.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the jackpot announcement determined to be executed can be executed multiple times within the same fluctuation (step S1534: YES), it selects the number of times of execution and execution timing (step S1535). Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot notice that can be executed at the first execution timing and the second execution timing within the same variation, a first pattern that executes the jackpot notice only at the first execution timing and a second execution A random number value is associated in advance with each of a second pattern in which a big win prediction is executed only at timing and a third pattern in which a big win prediction is executed at both the first execution timing and the second execution timing. Then, a random number for selecting one of the first pattern to the third pattern is obtained, and the number of execution times and execution timing of the jackpot announcement are selected based on which pattern the obtained random number corresponds to. . For example, when a random number corresponding to the first pattern is acquired, the number of times of execution is one and the first execution timing is selected. Also, for example, when a random number corresponding to the third pattern is acquired, the number of times of execution is two and both the first execution timing and the second timing are selected.

In this embodiment, a jackpot notice that can be executed three or more times within the same fluctuation is also prepared, and the number of times of execution and execution timing are selected in the same way for this jackpot notice as well.

If the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1535, or if it determines that the jackpot notice determined to be executed cannot be executed multiple times within the same variation (step S1534: NO), the jackpot notice type selection in step S1532 Information indicating the result of the processing is set in the sub-RAM 133 as setting information for the jackpot announcement effect (step S1536). When the process of step S1535 is executed prior to the process of step S1536, setting information of the jackpot preview performance, which further includes information indicating the selection result of the number of times of execution and the execution timing, is set.

The setting information of this big hit notice is included in the variable effect start command, and is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission processing of step S30. As a result, the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 realize the big win notice corresponding to the setting information of the big win notice.

[Variation production pattern setting processing by production control board 130]
FIG. 51 is a detailed flowchart of the variable effect pattern setting process in step S154 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S153, or when it determines that the received variation start command is not a variation start command related to the "jackpot" (step S152: NO), the liquid crystal screen 5 finally displays stop. A decorative pattern to be (finally stopped) is set (step S1540).

Specifically, based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the game control board 100, at the end of the symbol variation, whether a special symbol indicating a big win is stopped or displayed, or a special symbol indicating a loss is displayed. It is specified whether the pattern is stopped and displayed, and when the special pattern indicating the big win is stopped and displayed, it is determined whether the special pattern is the big win pattern related to the probability variable jackpot or the big win pattern related to the normal jackpot. Identify. Then, when it is specified that the jackpot pattern indicating the probability variable jackpot is stopped and displayed, a decoration pattern for notifying the probability variable jackpot is set. In addition, in this embodiment, a 16R probability variable jackpot and a 6R probability variable jackpot are prepared as the probability variable jackpot related to the first special symbol determination (see FIG. 6(B)). Therefore, when the jackpot pattern X1 corresponding to the 16R probability variation is stopped and displayed, the decoration pattern of "777" is set, and when the jackpot pattern X2 corresponding to the 6R probability variation is stopped and displayed, "777" is set. Set decorative patterns other than In addition, when the jackpot symbol X3 corresponding to the 6R normal is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol representing the odd-numbered symbol is set. These things are the same also when notifying the big hit which concerns on 2nd special design determination. On the other hand, when it is specified that the special symbol indicating the failure is stopped and displayed, a decorative symbol for notifying the failure is set. The decorative pattern for informing of this loss is a rose eye or a reach loss eye.

Following the process of step S1540, the sub CPU 131 reads from the sub ROM 132 a variable performance pattern selection table for selecting a variable performance pattern of variable performance including variable display of decorative symbols and sets it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1541). . The sub-ROM 132 stores a variable performance pattern selection table for big wins and a variable performance pattern for losing. is read out and set in the sub-RAM 133, and when a variation start command relating to a loss is received, a variation effect pattern selection table for loss is read out and set in the sub-RAM 133. - 特許庁

Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 sets a variable effect pattern (step S1542). Specifically, the variation effect pattern selection table is prepared for each variation pattern of special symbols. When receiving a variation start command including setting information indicating a variation pattern A related to the probability variable jackpot illustrated in FIG. Set the production pattern selection table. In the variable performance pattern selection table for the variable performance pattern A, four types of variable performance patterns A are defined, and different performance random numbers are associated with the respective variable performance patterns A.例文帳に追加

Here, the first variable effect pattern is the variable effect pattern A in which the variable display of the decorative symbols in each row is started in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and then a collision effect is performed. The second variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern A in which the variable display of the decorative symbols in each row is started in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and then a collision performance is performed. The third variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern A in which the variable display of the decorative symbols in each row is started in the order of the right design, the middle design, and the left design, and then a collision performance is performed. The fourth variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern A in which the variable display of three rows of decorative symbols is started at the same time, and then a collision performance is performed.

The sub CPU 131 reads out one variable effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number obtained in the process of step S150 from the variable effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 133, and sets the information in the sub RAM 133 to obtain a variation of one. Set production patterns.

A plurality of variable performance patterns are prepared for each of the variable performance patterns corresponding to the variable patterns other than the variable pattern A, and one variable performance pattern is set in the same manner as the variable performance pattern A described above. .

In addition, in the process of setting the variable effect pattern in step S1542, which pattern is used to establish a ready-to-win effect when the ready-to-win effect is performed, and which decorative pattern is pseudo-stopped as a ready-to-win pattern during normal reach, character SP reach, and SPSP reach. It is also decided whether to allow According to this processing, when the 7-symbol ready-to-win is established in the normal game state, it is suggested that the probability of executing the big win game is relatively high although the reliability of the big win is not 100%. On the other hand, when the 7-symbol ready-to-win is established in the variable probability game state, the 16R probability variable becomes rich at that time, and the 7-symbol ready-to-win functions as a jackpot announcement.

[Reliability Suggestion Effect Pattern Setting Process by Effect Control Board 130]
FIG. 52 is a detailed flow chart of the reliability suggestive effect pattern setting process in step S155 of FIG. Sub-CPU 131 determines whether or not there is a setting of a big hit advance notice using a reliability suggestive effect, as illustrated in FIG. 52, following the process of step S154 in FIG. 49 (step S1550). Specifically, when the setting information of the big hit notice is set in the sub-RAM 133 according to the processing of step S1536 (see FIG. 50), the setting information related to the big hit notice using the reliability suggesting effect is added to the setting information. determines whether it contains For example, the title display, character display, cut-in, and other reliability suggestive effects may function as a jackpot announcement by being executed as rainbow-colored title display, rainbow-colored character display, and rainbow-colored cut-in, respectively. Therefore, if the setting information of the jackpot announcement includes setting information such as rainbow title display, rainbow character display, rainbow color cut-in, etc., it is determined to be "YES" in the processing of step S1550.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that there is a setting for a big hit notice using a reliability suggestive effect (step S1550: YES), it determines whether or not the setting information for the big win notice includes a setting for displaying a rainbow title ( step S1551). Here, if it is determined that the setting of the rainbow title display is included (step S1551: YES), the display color of the title display is set to rainbow color, and the setting information is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S1552). ). On the other hand, if it is determined that the rainbow-colored title display setting is not included (step S1551: NO), the process proceeds to step S1553, which will be described later. The display color is set to blue or red.

As is clear from this, the title display normally functions as a reliability indication effect that suggests the level of reliability of the jackpot by being displayed in blue or red, but by being displayed in rainbow color , functions as a jackpot announcement that definitely announces that a jackpot game will be executed (see FIG. 23).

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1552 or determines that the rainbow title display is not set (step S1551: NO), does the setting information of the jackpot announcement include the setting of the rainbow cut-in? It is determined whether or not (step S1553). Here, if it is determined that the setting of the rainbow cut-in is included (step S1553: YES), the display color of the cut-in is set to rainbow (see FIG. 26D), and the setting information is It is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S1554). On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting of the rainbow color cut-in is not included (step S1553: NO), the process proceeds to step S1555, which will be described later. , the display color is set to blue or red (see FIGS. 26B and 26C).

As is clear from this, the cut-in usually functions as a reliability indication effect that suggests the level of reliability of the jackpot by being displayed in blue or red, but by being displayed in rainbow color , functions as a jackpot announcement that definitely announces that a jackpot game will be executed (see FIG. 26).

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1554 or determines that there is no rainbow cut-in setting (step S1553: NO), does the setting information of the jackpot announcement include the setting of rainbow color character display? It is determined whether or not (step S1555). Here, if it is determined that the setting of rainbow-colored character display is included (step S1555: YES), the display color of the character display is set to rainbow color, and the setting information is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S1556). ). On the other hand, if it is determined that the rainbow color character display setting is not included (step S1555: NO), the process proceeds to step S1557. is set to blue or red.

As is clear from this, the character display usually functions as a reliability indication effect that suggests the degree of reliability of the jackpot by being displayed in blue or red, but by being displayed in rainbow color , functions as a jackpot announcement that definitely announces that a jackpot game will be executed (see FIG. 25).

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1556, when it determines that there is no setting of the jackpot notice using the reliability suggestion effect (step S1550: NO), or when the setting information of the jackpot notice is set to display rainbow colored characters. If it is determined that it is not included (step S1555: NO), another effect pattern of reliability suggesting effect is set (step S1557). Specifically, as other reliability suggesting effects, it is decided whether or not to execute various reliability suggesting effects that suggest the reliability of the big hit, such as dialogue notices and step-up notices, and the reliability suggesting effects are executed. If so, a process for determining in what manner it should be executed is performed.

If there are multiple production modes with different reliability (expectation for jackpot and expectation to shift to probability variable gaming state if it is a jackpot) in the reliability suggestion production, the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. In some cases, there is a tendency that a highly reliable rendering mode is likely to be selected and a less reliable rendering mode is less likely to be selected (the highly reliable rendering mode may always be used). Further, when the determination result of the special symbol determination is a failure, it is difficult to select a performance mode with high reliability, it is easy to select a performance mode with low reliability, and it is easy for the reliability suggesting performance to not be executed. There is a tendency (always may be executed in a low-reliability presentation mode). From these things, for example, when a variation pattern in which SPSP reach is executed is selected, a certain reliability suggestive effect (for example, title display) is a highly reliable effect mode (in this case, red title display: FIG. 24 (B)), it can be said that other reliability-indicating effects (for example, cut-in) are likely to be executed in a highly-reliable effect mode (in this case, red cut-in: FIG. 26(C)). Also, for example, when a variation pattern in which only normal ready-to-win effects are executed is selected, if a certain reliability suggestive effect is executed in a low reliability effect mode, other reliability suggestive effects are also executed in a low reliability effect mode. It can be said that it is easy to execute with In this way, any of the reliability suggesting performances is more likely to be executed in a highly reliable performance mode as the special symbol fluctuation time is longer, and conversely, as the special symbol fluctuation time is shorter, it is executed in a less reliable performance mode. It is easy to be carried out or not to be carried out.

[Timer Interrupt Processing by Image Sound Control Board 140]
Next, timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control board 140. As shown in FIG. The image sound control board 140 repeats the series of processes illustrated in FIG. 53 at regular time intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. do.

First, the overall CPU 141 executes image output control processing for controlling image display on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the command received from the effect control board 130 (step S41). This image output control processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the processing of step S41, the overall CPU 141 executes a sound effect output control process for outputting various sound effects from the speaker 24 in synchronization with or asynchronously with the effect display performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 ( step S42). When a variable effect start command including information about setting of one-shot notification as a jackpot announcement is transmitted from the effect control board 130, the process of step S42 is executed, thereby special effect sound used for one-shot notification. It will be output from the speaker 24 .

Following the processing of step S42, the overall CPU 141 executes data transmission control processing (step S44). Specifically, data relating to image sound control performed in the image sound control board 140 is transmitted to the effect control board 130 . In response to this, the effect control board 130 transfers the data received from the image sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150 . Thereby, the frame lamp 25, the effect button 26, the effect accessory 7, etc. are controlled so as to synchronize with the effect executed by the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24. FIG. That is, for example, a process of rotating the production accessory 7 while emitting rainbow light is performed during the victory suggestion production shown in FIGS. 11A and 15G.

[Image Output Control Processing by Image Sound Control Board 140]
FIG. 54 is a detailed flowchart of image output control processing in step S41 of FIG. The overall CPU 141 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the effect control board 130 is received (step S411). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S411: NO), the process proceeds to step S42.

On the other hand, when the overall CPU 141 determines that it has received a command from the effect control board 130 (step S411: YES), it sets the setting information included in the command to the control RAM 143 (step S412). Next, the supervising CPU 141 determines how various effects images should be displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the set setting information, and creates and controls a display list for controlling the drawing processing of the VDP 144. RAM 143 (step S413), and the display list is set in the display list storage area (step S414).

Here, the display list consists of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing in units of frames. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The display list storage area is provided in a VRAM having an SRAM capable of writing and reading image data at high speed. Executes the drawing process of the displayed image.

[Action and effect of the present embodiment]
According to the present embodiment, for example, the execution probabilities of the jackpot announcement are different between when the variation pattern A is selected and when the variation pattern B is selected. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the special symbol will be variably displayed according to the variation pattern with the higher execution probability of the big win notice.
Further, for example, since the jackpot predictions executed when the variation pattern A is selected and when the variation pattern B is selected are different from each other, the jackpot predictions common to these variation patterns are executed by executing the jackpot predictions. It is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of the problem that the appearance rate of the .
Further, for example, when the variation pattern B is selected, the normal reach is executed, but when the variation pattern A is selected, the normal reach is not executed. Based on , it is possible to identify potential jackpot announcements.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the variation pattern A is selected, the jackpot notice ("premier character effect" in the present embodiment) that can be executed when the variation pattern B is selected is not executed, so the jackpot notice It is possible to more effectively suppress the problem that the execution probability of is higher than necessary.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, when the variation pattern B is selected, the hit effect that can be performed when the variation pattern A is selected is not performed, so the execution probability of the big hit notice becomes higher than necessary. It is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of problems such as storage.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the hit effect is executed, the probability that the game is controlled in the variable probability game state after the jackpot game is executed is higher than the probability that the game is controlled in the normal game state. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively make the player expect that the variation pattern A will be selected and the performance will be executed.

Further, in this embodiment, for example, both when the variation pattern A is selected and when the variation pattern B is selected, for example, a common effect such as high-speed variation of decorative symbols is executed. For this reason, it becomes difficult to know which variation pattern has been selected, and which of the impact presentation and the premier character presentation is likely to be executed, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, a third time period from execution of the big win notice to execution of the winning notification effect, and a fourth time period from execution of the premier character effect to execution of the winning notification effect. are different from each other. Therefore, for example, when the third time is shorter than the fourth time, it is possible to give the player the impression that the execution of the jackpot game has been reported relatively soon after the performance of the hit performance is performed. You can get performance effects.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the number of times that the hit performance is performed within the same variation for the variation pattern A and the number of times that another big hit notice is performed for other variation patterns are different from each other, the big hit It is possible to provide various advance notices and, as a result, to improve the performance effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to the hit effect with only one execution timing, it is possible to execute a big hit announcement with multiple execution timings. Therefore, by executing the big win notice at the second execution timing without executing the big win notice at the first execution timing, the big win notice is not executed based on the fact that the big win notice is not executed at the first execution timing. It is possible to surprise and delight the player who thought that, and as a result, it is possible to obtain a high performance effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern C is selected, a capture success effect or a capture failure effect is performed as a result effect of the contest effect. Here, the success-of-capture performance functions as a big-hit notice for notifying that the big-win game will be executed, so that the player can enjoy the game while anticipating that the success-of-capture performance will be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the effect of notifying the establishment of the ready-to-win or the ready-to-win effect is executed, the hit effect is not executed, and other jackpot announcements are likely to be executed (even if it is always executed in the case of a big hit) good). Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while anticipating the appearance of another jackpot announcement different from the hitting effect after the ready-win effect is established or the ready-win effect is started.

In addition, in the present embodiment, one aspect of cut-in that can take a plurality of presentation aspects functions as a jackpot announcement. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that a rainbow cut-in will occur instead of a blue cut-in or a red cut-in.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the preliminary performance is executed, the big win notice is more likely to be executed than when the preliminary performance is not executed (it may always be executed in the case of a big win). Therefore, by executing the preliminary effect, it is possible to make the player expect the appearance of the big win notice before the change is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the hit production, in addition to the execution of the jackpot game, it is suggested that the game is controlled in the probability variation game state after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, it is possible to increase the pleasure of the player, and as a result, it is possible to obtain a high performance effect, as compared with the case of simply suggesting that the big winning game is to be executed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, it is possible to execute a big hit notice different from when the game is controlled in the variable probability game state. Therefore, compared with the case where the common jackpot notice is executed in these game states, the variation of the jackpot notice can be improved, and by executing the common jackpot notice, the jackpot notice itself becomes monotonous. You can effectively prevent it from happening.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot announcement up mode is set, the execution probability of the hit performance and the capture success performance does not change, but the execution probability of other jackpot announcements is increased. Therefore, the player can easily enjoy another big win notice. On the other hand, since the execution probability of the sudden hit effect and the capture success effect does not change, it is possible to effectively suppress the decrease in the rarity value of these jackpot announcements.

Further, in this embodiment, a rainbow cut-in, which is one of the jackpot announcements, is executed in accordance with the player's operation. For this reason, the player can be motivated to perform the operation, and the player can feel as if he or she has won a big win by performing the operation himself/herself. You can get performance effects.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, variation pattern D and variation pattern E can execute a common jackpot announcement (rainbow title display, rainbow cut-in, rainbow white character display). Therefore, as a result, there is an advantage that the appearance rate of these big win predictions increases, and the player can easily enjoy the big win predictions.

[First Modification of Jackpot Notice]
Next, referring to FIG. 55, a first modification of the jackpot announcement will be described. Here, FIG. 55 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the first mission effect.

For example, during a first specific period from when the variable display of the special symbol is started until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, a predetermined character "reach with '4'! (see FIG. 55(A)), and when the judgment result of the special design judgment performed at the start of the design fluctuation is "jackpot", during this first specific period 55(C) and (D)).

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "losing", the mission success production is not executed, but the mission failure production showing the failure of the presented mission is executed (see FIG. 55(B)). ). Note that FIG. 55(B) illustrates a state in which a predetermined character says "I'm sorry..." without achieving reach with 4 symbols.

During the presentation of the first mission, during the mission success presentation, and during the mission failure presentation, the decorative pattern of the first mode or the decorative pattern of the second mode may be displayed.

In this way, an effect (here, a mission success effect) executed during a specific period may be executed as a jackpot announcement. In addition, when the determination result of the special symbol determination is "big hit", when the first variation pattern whose variation time is the first time is selected, and when the variation time is the second time longer than the first time In a situation where a certain second variation pattern is selected, and when the special symbol is variably displayed in the second variation pattern, the first mission production illustrated in FIG. 55 and the subsequent mission It is conceivable to perform a successful performance. In another embodiment, the first mission effect and the mission success effect may be executed when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the first variation pattern.

[Second Modification of Jackpot Notice]
Next, referring to FIG. 56, a second modification of the jackpot announcement will be described. Here, FIG. 56 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the second mission effect.

For example, in a second specific period from the start of the variable display of the special symbols until a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, a second character stating "Destroy the enemy with repeated hits!" (See FIG. 56(A)). When this second mission is presented, the liquid crystal screen 5 displays an effect notifying the remaining number of enemies, a button image imitating the effect button 26, and prompting the player to hit repeatedly. character display and a gauge image display showing the remaining time of the valid period. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the special symbol judgment performed at the start of the symbol variation is "big hit", the number of remaining enemies becomes "0" in response to repeated hits during the second specific period. It is also possible to perform a mission success presentation that the enemy is successfully annihilated by pressing, and this mission success presentation may function as a jackpot announcement (see FIGS. 56(C) and (D)).

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "losing", the mission success production is not executed, but the mission failure production showing the failure of the presented mission is executed (see FIG. 56(B)). ). In addition, in FIG. 56(B), there is an effect display indicating that the second specific period has ended, "remaining 0 seconds", and that there are "50" remaining enemies at the end of the second specific period. and a gauge image or the like indicating that the valid period has expired.

It should be noted that this second mission effect and the resulting mission success effect may be performed when the special symbol is variably displayed according to the second variation pattern, or may be performed according to the first variation pattern. You may go when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Further, during the presentation of the second mission, during the mission success presentation, and during the mission failure presentation, the decorative pattern of the first mode may be displayed, or the decorative pattern of the second mode may be displayed. good.

[Other Modifications]
In addition, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may be, for example, in the following forms. That is, in the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a so-called type 1 type pachinko game machine has been described, but the present invention can be applied to other game machines such as a type 1 type and 2 types mixed type pachinko game machine. may

Also, in the present embodiment, the case where the reliability of various jackpot predictions is 100% has been described, but the reliability of jackpot predictions does not necessarily need to be 100% as long as it is a relatively high value. , for example, a value other than 100% such as 99.9999%.

Further, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it is needless to say that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operation modes. In addition, the order of processing, set values, thresholds used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be implemented with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The screen diagrams and the like exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be in other forms.

[Second embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, a case will be described in which multiple types of reliability suggestive effects and jackpot announcements are executed before a ready-to-win game is established. In the following description, the same names, reference numerals, and step numbers are assigned to configurations and processes common to those of the first embodiment, and descriptions thereof are omitted, and differences from the first embodiment are mainly described.

[Direction mode]
In the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, an effect is performed in one of three types of effect modes corresponding to the current game state, except during the jackpot game. Specifically, for example, when the game is controlled in the normal game state in the normal mode, when the game is controlled in the probability variable game state in the probability variable mode, when the game is controlled in the time saving game state time saving mode Each performance is performed in In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of production modes other than the time saving mode, the normal mode includes the normal mode A and the normal mode B, and the probability variable mode includes the probability variable mode A and the probability variable mode B. .

The production mode itself has no reliability for the big hit, and each production illustrated in FIG. 7 can be executed in any normal mode of the normal mode A and the normal mode B. Each effect illustrated in FIG. 8 can be executed even in the variable probability mode.

However, each production mode differs from each other in, for example, the types of executable reliability suggestive effects, the types of background images that can be displayed during variable display of special symbols, and the types of effects that can be output (for example, music). By providing such a difference, when the game state is the same, although the variation time itself of the special symbols is the same, the time required to notify the jackpot (that is, the type of reliability suggestive effect) can be varied. , different playability can be realized. Also, the player can recognize the current rendering mode (that is, the current game state) based on, for example, the type of background image.

Specifically, for example, in normal mode A, a background image showing a landscape with clouds floating in the blue sky is displayed, and a production mode such as "normal mode A" is displayed except during character SP reach and SP SP reach. A letter indicating the type of is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen. In addition, in normal mode B, a background image showing the scenery of lightning falling from a cloudy sky is displayed, and characters indicating the type of production mode such as "normal mode B" are displayed on the screen except during character SP reach and SPSP reach. displayed in the upper left corner.

The normal mode A and the normal mode B are switched to each other according to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition that does not involve the transition of the game state. For example, on the condition that the determination result of the special symbol determination is a predetermined number of times (eg, 30 times) consecutively during one of the production modes (for example, during the normal mode A), at the start of the next special symbol fluctuation ( Or, immediately before the stop display of the special symbols for the predetermined number of times), the mode is switched to the other production mode (normal mode B in this case). Also, on the condition that a loss is reported in a highly reliable variable performance (for example, a variable performance corresponding to the variation pattern J), the mode is switched to the other performance mode at the start of the next special symbol variation.

In the variable probability mode A, a background image representing the scenery of a ruined city is displayed, and in the variable probability mode B, a background image representing the scenery of an area with tall buildings is displayed. The variable probability mode A and the variable probability mode B are production modes that can be shifted on condition that the game is controlled in the variable probability game state. In this embodiment, the variable probability mode A and the variable probability mode B are configured as production modes that do not switch to each other. It is possible to select which of the production modes to perform the production. In addition, for example, on the condition that the determination result of the special symbol determination was consecutively lost a predetermined number of times (eg, 50 times) during one of the production modes (for example, during the probability variation mode A), the next special symbol fluctuation start Sometimes it may be switched to the other production mode (in this case, the variable probability mode B).

The time-saving mode is an effect mode in which a background image representing the scenery of a lake is displayed. In this embodiment, since only one production mode time saving mode is prepared corresponding to the time saving game state, it is not switched to another production mode during the time saving game state. In addition, according to the transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, the time-saving mode is immediately switched to the normal mode A or the normal mode B.

In another embodiment, the reliability of the big hit may be different for each production mode (the production mode functions as a so-called zone), and even if the normal mode A has a higher reliability than the normal mode B Good or low.

In addition, the number of production modes corresponding to the normal gaming state and the number of production modes corresponding to the variable probability gaming state may be 2 or more (for example, 4), and the number of production modes corresponding to the time-saving gaming state is 1 or more ( For example, two). Also, even if the game state is different, the same production mode may be used for the production. For example, when it is in the normal game state, the production is performed in one of the normal mode and the probability variable mode, and when it is in the probability variable game state, it is produced in a mode other than the normal mode (for example, the probability variable mode A and B). may be performed. In addition, production may be performed in the time saving mode when it is in the variable probability game state or the time saving game state.

[Variation pattern selection table used in normal game state in the second embodiment]
FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbols in the normal game state in the second embodiment.

As exemplified in FIG. 57, in the second embodiment, the types of variation effect patterns associated with variation patterns D, E, I, and J are different from those in the first embodiment, and are common to the first embodiment. is. The effects executed when the variation patterns B to E and G to J are selected will be described below.

When the variation patterns B and G are selected by the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 executes the pre-reach effect for 5 seconds from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and then normal reach. Run for 15 seconds. Similarly, when the variation patterns C and H are selected, after performing the pre-reach performance for 10 seconds from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the normal reach is performed for 10 seconds, and then the character SP reach performance is performed for 20 seconds. do.

Further, when the variation patterns D and I are selected, the SPSP ready-to-win performance is performed for 20 seconds after executing the pre-reach performance for 20 seconds from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. In this embodiment, when variation patterns D and I are selected, SPSP reach can be executed, but normal reach cannot be executed (normal reach has an appearance rate of 0%).

Further, when the variation patterns E and J are selected, after executing the ready-to-win performance for 20 seconds from the start of the variable display of the first special pattern, character SP ready-to-win is performed for 20 seconds, and then the SPSP ready-to-win performance is performed. In this embodiment, when variation patterns E and J are selected, character SP reach and SPSP reach can be performed, but normal reach cannot be performed (normal reach has an appearance rate of 0%).

As illustrated in FIG. 57, for the variation pattern selection table of FIGS. 57 (A) to (C), the variation time of the first special symbol and the selection ratio of each variation pattern are the variation patterns illustrated in FIG. Since they are the same, the following can be said. That is, the longer the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the first special pattern to the start of the ready-to-win performance (that is, the execution time of the ready-to-win performance), the easier it is to be selected in the case of a big win, and the higher the reliability of the big win. Further, when comparing the variable performance patterns associated with the variable patterns D, E, I, and J, they are common in that SPSP ready-to-win is executed as the ready-to-win performance. Developing from pre-reach production to character SP reach and then to SPSP reach is more reliable than developing from pre-reach production to SPSP reach. Therefore, it can be said that the longer the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to the start of the SPSP reach, the easier it is to be selected in the case of a big win, and the higher the reliability of the big win. In addition, the variation pattern that develops from SP reach to SPSP reach may be selected only in the case of a big hit, and may not be selected in the case of loss (that is, the selection rate of variation pattern J is 0%).

<Hold icon change effect>
Next, in the normal mode A or normal mode B, a description will be given of the "holding icon change effect" that can be executed when the preliminary determination result indicating that the variation patterns B to E and G to J are selected is obtained. It should be noted that the pending icon change effect is not executed when the variation pattern A or the variation pattern for loss without reach is selected. The "holding icon change effect" is one of the reliability suggesting effects that suggest in advance what color the holding icon will change, and the target (hereinafter referred to as "prefetching target") that has obtained the preliminary determination result. It is a production that suggests the reliability of the jackpot. Specifically, in the hold icon change effect, for example, immediately before the hold icon related to the prefetch target changes to another color (for example, 0.5 seconds before), a hold change suggestion image of the same color as the changed color is displayed. , is displayed for a predetermined period of time (eg, 0.5 seconds) near the changing pending icon.

The pending change suggesting image is, for example, an image similar to the enlarged display of the changed pending icon. The color of the pending change suggestion image is the same as the color of the special icon, and five types of "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are prepared in advance. Since the reliability of each color of the pending change suggesting image is the same as the reliability of the color of the special icon, the description is omitted here.

In this embodiment, the color of the pending icon always changes immediately after the pending icon change effect is executed. Therefore, it can be said that the pending icon change effect is an effect for changing the effect mode of the preliminary effect.

When the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 receives a pending command from the game control board 100 in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11, the process of setting the pre-effect pattern (step S136 in FIG. 48). Next, set the scenario of pending icon change effect (the color of the pending change suggestion image and the execution timing). The scenario of the pending icon change effect is determined based on the preliminary effect pattern, for example. Therefore, for example, in the case of a pre-rendering pattern in which the color of the pending icon changes multiple times, a scenario is set in which the pending icon change rendering is executed immediately before each change. Therefore, similar to the preliminary effect, the pending icon change effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. Easier to do than selected. For this reason, when displaying a pending change suggestive image of a color with high reliability (e.g. gold), compared to displaying a pending change suggestive image of a color with low reliability (e.g. blue), the fluctuation display of the look-ahead target , a highly reliable effect (for example, the icon change effect of changing the icon to a rainbow color, SPSP reach) is likely to be executed (may always be executed).

By the way, the suspended icon change effect is an effect that draws attention to the suspended icon. If such an effect is executed while the pending icon is not displayed (for example, during SPSP reach), the color of the pending icon will change without notice. In this case, there is a possibility that the impression as a whole is rough and that the production effect cannot be effectively enhanced.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a period in which the suspended icon change effect cannot be executed is determined in advance in relation to other effects, and during this period the scenario is not referred to (or the scenario is discarded) and the suspended icon change effect is not executed. A configuration is adopted in which icon change effects are controlled to be unexecutable. In addition, during the period when the pending icon change effect cannot be executed, the display of the special icon that is already displayed will continue, but by not referring to the pre-production pattern, it will be impossible to execute a new pre-production for the pending icon. Control.

For example, if a variable effect that notifies a jackpot is being executed, or if there is a hold that will result in a big win, a configuration is adopted that does not execute the pending icon change effect (and new pre-effect) (that is, the appearance rate 0%). In addition, when the variable effect in which the failure is reported is being executed, the execution of the pending icon change effect is controlled as illustrated in FIG. 58 .

FIG. 58 is a time chart showing a specific example of a period during which the pending icon change effect can be executed and a period during which it cannot be executed. Here, the relationship with the ready-to-win effect will be mainly described, and the relationship with other reliability suggestive effects will be described later with reference to FIG.

As exemplified in FIG. 58(A), when the pre-reach effect, the normal reach, and the effect of actually stopping the decorative symbols in the losing mode are executed by selecting the variation pattern G, the pending icon change effect is before the reach. Can be executed during production and during normal reach. That is, during the performance of permanently stopping the decorative symbols in the losing mode, the suspended icon change performance (and the new preliminary performance) is controlled to be unexecutable.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 58(B), when the variation pattern I is selected, the pre-reach effect, the SPSP reach effect, and the effect of permanently stopping the decorative symbols in the losing mode are executed. can only be performed during the pre-reach staging. That is, during the SPSP reach and during the effect of actually stopping the decorative symbols in the losing mode, the suspended icon change effect (and the new preliminary effect) is controlled to be unexecutable.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 58(C), by selecting the variation pattern J, when the pre-reach effect, the character SP reach, the SPSP reach, and the effect of permanently stopping the decorative symbols in the losing mode are executed, The pending icon change effect can be executed only during the pre-reach effect. That is, during character SP reach, during SP SP reach, and during the effect of actually stopping decorative symbols in a losing mode, the pending icon change effect (and new preliminary effect) is controlled to be unexecutable.

Although illustration of the variation pattern H is omitted, when the pre-reach effect, normal reach, character SP reach, and effect of permanently stopping the decorative symbols in the losing mode are executed by selecting the change pattern H, the effect is reserved. The icon change effect can be executed during the pre-reach effect and during the normal reach. That is, during the character SP reach and during the effect of actually stopping the decorative symbols in the losing mode, the suspended icon change effect (and the new preliminary effect) is controlled to be unexecutable.

In addition, although illustration is omitted for the fluctuation pattern for reach without loss, when the production before reach and the production of stopping the decorative pattern in the losing mode is executed by selecting such a fluctuation pattern, the reservation icon The change performance can be executed during the pre-reach performance. That is, during the performance of permanently stopping the decorative symbols in the losing mode, the suspended icon change performance (and the new preliminary performance) is controlled to be unexecutable.

As illustrated in FIG. 58, the pending icon change effect (and new preliminary effect) in this embodiment can be executed before the start of the character SP reach and before the start of the SP reach during the variable display of the first special symbol, These ready-to-win effects are not executed after starting (that is, the appearance rate is 0%). In other words, the pending icon change effect (and the new preliminary effect) can be executed while the decorative symbols of the first mode are displayed, but cannot be executed while the decorative symbols of the second mode are displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pending icon change effect is not executed in the variable effect in which the big win is notified. For this reason, for example, when a suspended icon change effect is executed during normal reach and the normal reach develops into SP reach, the suspended icon change effect is executed to inform that a failure is reported in the variable effect being executed. It may be predictable. However, since the special icon changed by execution of the reserved icon change effect gives the player a sense of expectation for a big win, it is possible to give the player a motivation to continue playing the game. It should be noted that, in another embodiment, the pending icon change effect (and new pre-effect) is executed in the variation effect in which the big win is notified (that is, during the effect executed when the variation patterns A to E are selected). Alternatively, it may be executed during the stop display of the first special symbol.

Also, a variation pattern in which the pending icon change effect (and the new preliminary effect) can be executed and a variation pattern in which the performance cannot be executed may be set in advance. For example, the pending icon change effect (and new pre-effect) may be executable when variation pattern G is selected, and may be unexecutable when variation patterns H to I are selected. If a variation pattern is selected in which a predetermined effect (for example, SPSP reach) is executed regardless of whether it is possible, it may be impossible to execute.

In another embodiment, the pending icon change effect (and new pre-effect) may be controlled to be unexecutable during normal reach, may be executed during character SP reach, or during SPSP reach. may be executed. Also, the rate of appearance of the pending icon change effect (and the new preliminary effect) may be lower during the effect with a higher degree of reliability for the big win. For example, the appearance rate may be in the relation of pre-reach production >= normal reach > character SPSP reach > SPSP reach > 0%, or pre-reach production = normal reach = character SPSP reach > SPSP reach > 0. % relationship is also acceptable.

It should be noted that the variable probability mode A and the variable probability mode B (that is, the variable probability gaming state) may also execute the pending icon change effect. For example, during the variable display of the second special symbol, the pending icon change effect (and pre-effect) is controlled to be executable during the non-reach effect and before the start of the battle reach (that is, during the pre-reach effect), but after the start of the battle reach. may be controlled to be infeasible. For example, when the hold icon change effect is executed in the variable probability mode than in the normal mode, the expectation of the jackpot and the expectation of shifting to the variable probability gaming state in the case of a jackpot may be higher or lower. may be the same.

In addition, the pending icon change effect is, for example, under a predetermined situation (for example, in the case of normal mode A, in the case of variable probability mode, in the variable display of the prefetch target or in the variable display before the prefetch target, a predetermined reliability suggestion Effects (for example, background effects and pattern change effects described later) may be executed only in the case of a big hit, and may not be executed in the case of a loss. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the pending icon change effect but also in other effects (including the effect mode itself).

Note that in other embodiments, the pending icon change effect and the preliminary effect may be configured as one effect. In addition, there may be a case where the preliminary effect is executed after the pending icon change effect and a case where the preliminary effect is not executed (so-called false effect), and during the period when the pending icon change effect cannot be executed, the false effect is controlled to be unexecutable. You may

<Relevant icon change effect>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, the “applicable icon change effect” that can be executed when variation patterns B to E and G to J are selected in normal mode A or normal mode B will be described. It should be noted that the icon change effect is not executed when the variation pattern A or the variation pattern for loss without reach is selected.

The "relevant icon change effect" is one of the reliability suggesting effects that preliminarily suggests to what color the corresponding icon will change, and is a effect that suggests the reliability of the big hit of the variable effect being executed. In the present embodiment, the color of the icon always changes immediately after the "applicable icon change effect" is executed (that is, the effect mode of the preliminary effect changes). Specifically, in the icon change effect, for example, immediately before the icon changes to another color (for example, 0.5 seconds before), an icon change suggestion image of the same color as the changed color is displayed. It is displayed near the icon for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

The icon change suggesting image is, for example, an image similar to the enlarged display of the icon after the change, and has the same aspect as the image used as the pending change suggesting image. The color of the icon change suggestion image is the same as the color of the special icon, and five colors of "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are prepared in advance. In this embodiment, the reliability for each color of the icon change suggesting image and the icon is 3% for “blue”, 16% for “green”, 45% for “red”, and 45% for “gold”. is 65% and "Rainbow" is 100%. When displaying an icon change suggesting image in a color with high reliability (e.g., gold), compared to displaying an icon change suggesting image in a color with low reliability (e.g., blue), a highly reliable effect (e.g., night background, SPSP reach) are likely to be executed (although they may always be executed).

The icon change effect is an effect that changes the effect mode of the pre-effect, like the pending icon change effect. However, the icon change effect is not the reserved icon but the effect of changing the icon, and the effect that is executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination rather than the preliminary determination information. Different from change production.

For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect when starting the variable effect (for example, following the process of step S1557 in FIG. 52). The sub CPU 131, for example, refers to the icon change effect execution lottery table (not shown) pre-stored in the sub ROM 132, and determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on the information as to whether or not the jackpot is won. Determined by lottery.

The icon change effect execution lottery table is, for example, a table in which a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect is predetermined. In the case of a big hit, a judgment value of “0 to 39” is assigned to the judgment result of “executing” the icon change effect among the judgment values of “0 to 99” (percentage of execution is 40% ), and a determination value of "40 to 99" is assigned to the determination result that the icon change effect is "not executed" (percentage of non-execution is 60%). On the other hand, in the case of a failure, among the judgment values of "0 to 99", the judgment value of "0 to 29" is assigned to the judgment result of "execute" (percentage of execution is 30%), " A determination value of "30 to 99" is assigned to the determination result "not executed" (percentage of non-execution: 70%).

In this way, since the icon change effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss, the game is considered to be more reliable when the icon change effect is executed than when it is not executed. person can recognize.

In addition, the icon change effect is, for example, under a predetermined situation (for example, in the case of normal mode A, in the case of variable probability mode, a predetermined reliability suggestive effect (for example, background effect or pattern change effect described later) is executed. In case of winning), it may be executed only in the case of a big win, and may not be executed in the case of a loss. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the icon change effect but also in other effects (including the effect mode itself).

In addition, when the pending icon (rendering mode of the pre-rendering effect) is "rainbow" in response to the execution of the pending icon change rendition, the rendition mode of the pre-rendering cannot be changed any more, so the icon changing rendition is Not executable (see Figure 59). Therefore, the icon change effect is a reliability suggestive effect that may be executed when the pending icon is not a rainbow.

When it is determined to execute the icon change effect, the sub CPU 131, for example, refers to the icon display mode determination table (not shown) pre-stored in the sub ROM 132, and obtains information on whether or not a big win and the variation pattern. The change pattern of the icon is determined by random number lottery based on the type.

The icon display mode determination table includes, for example, a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining the change pattern of the icon, and the color of the pending icon immediately before displayed as the icon (hereinafter, "last color on hold"). ) and the color change pattern of the icon until the icon is erased are associated in advance.

Here, the change pattern of the icon will be described. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the icon at the time of the big win, and FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the icon at the time of losing. 59 and 60, the "first changing color" is the color that changes first after the suspended icon is displayed as the icon, and the "final color at that time" is the color immediately before the icon is deleted. Color. "No change" indicates that the icon change effect is not executed (that is, the color of the icon does not change or cannot be changed any more). 59 and 60, the column of "percentage" indicates how many determination values are assigned out of the determination values "0 to 99" that are compared with the random numbers for determining the change pattern of the icon. is shown.

In this embodiment, the change pattern of the icon includes a pattern in which the first changing color changes directly to the final color at the time (the number of executions of the icon changing effect is two), and the first changing color is the final color at the time. and a pattern in which the icon change effect is executed once), and a pattern in which the first change color changes to another color to change to the final color at that time (the icon change effect is executed three times or more). There is

As exemplified in FIG. 59, when it is a big hit and variation patterns B to E are selected, if the final color at the time of suspension is "white", the final color at that time is "blue", "green", "red , 'Gold', or 'Rainbow' are 2%, 5%, 39%, 53%, and 1%, respectively. For this reason, among the judgment values of "0 to 99", the judgment value of "0, 1" is assigned to the judgment result that the final color at that time is "blue", and the judgment result of "green" is assigned. A judgment value of “2 to 6” is assigned to “red”, a judgment value of “7 to 45” is assigned to the judgment result of “gold”, and a judgment value of “gold” is assigned to A determination value of "46 to 98" is assigned to each image, and a determination value of "99" is assigned to the determination result of "rainbow".

Also, if it is a big hit and fluctuation patterns B to E are selected, if the final color at the time of holding is "blue" or "green", the final color at that time is "red", "gold", or "rainbow" are 40%, 58%, and 2%, respectively. Therefore, among the judgment values of "0 to 99", the judgment value of "0 to 39" is assigned to the judgment result that the final color at that time is "red", and the judgment result of "gold" is assigned. is assigned a determination value of "40 to 97", and "98, 99" is assigned as a determination value to the determination result of "rainbow".

As exemplified in FIG. 60, in the case of a loss, the ratio of each change pattern depending on which of 0 to 3 the number of suspensions of the first special symbol determination at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is is different. Specifically, for example, when it is a loss and the variation pattern G to J is selected, and when the final color at the time of suspension is "white", the number of suspensions in the first special symbol determination is 0 When and when it is 1 will be described.

In this case, if the number of reservations for the first special symbol judgment is 0, the percentage of the final color being "blue", "green", "red", "gold", or "rainbow" is 60%. , 27%, 10%, 3% and 0%. Therefore, among the judgment values of "0 to 99", the judgment value of "0 to 59" is assigned to the judgment result that the final color at that time is "blue", and the judgment result of "green" is assigned. A judgment value of "60 to 86" is assigned to "red", a judgment value of "87 to 96" is assigned to the judgment result of "gold", and a judgment value of "gold" is assigned to A judgment value of “97 to 99” is assigned to the judgment result, and no judgment value is assigned to the judgment result of “rainbow” (the appearance rate of rainbow is 0% at the time of failure).

Also, if the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is 1, the percentage of the final color at that time being "blue", "green", "red", "gold", or "rainbow" is 65%, 26%, 7%, 2% and 0%. For this reason, among the judgment values of "0 to 99", judgment values of "0 to 64" are assigned to the judgment result that the final color is "blue" at that time, and the judgment result of "green" is assigned. A judgment value of "65 to 90" is assigned to "red", a judgment value of "91 to 97" is assigned to the judgment result of "gold", and a judgment value of "gold" is assigned to are assigned judgment values of “98, 99”, and no judgment value is assigned to the judgment result of “rainbow” (the appearance rate of rainbow is 0% at the time of failure).

As illustrated in FIGS. 59 and 60, in the present embodiment, the higher the reliability of the final color at the time of suspension, the more likely the final color at that time will be a color with high reliability. Specifically, at the time of the big hit, the final color during suspension is white, and after that, in response to the execution of the icon change effect, the color of the icon (pre-production effect mode) turns blue and then gold. is 21% (=0.4×0.53×100). In addition, when the color of the pending icon (preliminary effect effect mode) becomes blue in accordance with the execution of the pending icon change effect at the time of the big win, the corresponding icon change effect is executed after that. The probability that the icon is gold is 23% (=0.4*0.58*100).

In addition, when the final color is white at the time of losing, the probability that the icon will become gold after the color of the icon changes to blue in response to the execution of the icon change effect is 0.9% (=0 .3×0.03×100). Also, if the color of the pending icon turns blue in response to the execution of the pending icon change effect at the time of loss, the probability that the icon will become gold in response to the execution of the icon change effect after that is 3.9% (=0.3×0.13×100).

Also, the probability for each pending final color that the final color at that time becomes a rainbow according to the execution of the icon change effect is high in the order of white<blue (or green)<red<gold. This makes it possible to expect the icon to be more rainbow as the color of the pending icon becomes more reliable.

As a result, the higher the reliability of the pending icon, the more likely the icon is to have a higher reliability. Also, even if the color of the pending icon is the same, the color of the icon is likely to have a higher degree of reliability in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. As a result, the expectation for the big win can be maintained from when the pending icon is displayed in a highly reliable manner. Note that when the pending icon is in the first predetermined mode (for example, green) or above, the icon corresponding to this pending icon may always be in the second predetermined mode (eg, rainbow color or gold).

As exemplified in FIG. 60, in the present embodiment, in the case of a loss, the smaller the number of reservations, the more likely the final color at that time will be a color with high reliability. In addition, when the number of reservations is a predetermined number (eg, 0), the final color at that time may be a predetermined color (eg, blue).

In another embodiment, the higher the reliability of the final color on hold, the less likely it is that the final color on hold becomes a color with a higher degree of reliability (the final color on hold is always higher than the final color on hold). does not have to be). In addition, the lower the reliability of the final color on hold, the more likely it is that the final color on hold will be a color with high reliability (for example, when the final color on hold is a predetermined color (for example, blue), The final color may be iridescent). Also, in the case of a big hit, the higher the reliability of the final color at the time of holding, the more likely the final color at that time will be the color with high reliability. may be difficult to be a reliable color.

Further, in another embodiment, the icon change effect is changed between a variation pattern in which an effect with a high degree of reliability (for example, SPSP reach) can be executed and a variation pattern in which only an effect with a low degree of reliability (for example, normal reach) is executed. Patterns may be determined in different proportions. For example, variation pattern E may be more likely than variation pattern B to result in a final color with a high degree of reliability at that time (a predetermined color with a high degree of reliability will always be obtained in response to variation pattern E). is also good.). In addition, the final color may be more likely to be a highly reliable color at that time in the variation pattern J than in the variation pattern G. good.). Also, the longer the variation time of the first special symbol is, the more likely the final color is to be a color with high reliability at that time, or the more difficult it is to become.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a period during which the icon change effect can be executed and a period during which the icon change effect cannot be executed will be described. FIG. 61 is a time chart showing a specific example of a period during which the icon change effect can be executed and a period during which the icon change effect cannot be executed. Here, the relationship with the ready-to-win effect will be mainly described, and the relationship with other reliability suggestive effects will be described later with reference to FIG.

In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the icon is displayed until immediately before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, by changing the icon at various timings during the variable display of the first special symbol, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for the notification of the big win by the variable performance being executed. However, by drawing attention to the icon by executing the icon change effect, the player's attention may be distracted from other effects being executed, and the interest may not be enhanced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a period in which the icon change effect cannot be executed is determined in advance in relation to other effects, and the icon change effect is controlled to be executable during a period other than this period. . In addition, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the color of the icon (that is, the effect mode of the preliminary effect related to the icon) does not change unless the icon change effect is executed. Therefore, during the period in which the icon change effect cannot be executed, the effect mode of the preliminary effect related to the icon does not change.

As illustrated in FIG. 61(A), when the variation pattern A is selected, the icon change effect cannot be executed from the start of variation of the first special symbol to the stop display.

As exemplified in FIG. 61(B), when the pre-reach effect, normal reach, and the effect of permanently stopping the decorative pattern are executed by selecting the variation pattern B or G, the icon change effect is the pre-reach effect. can only be executed while That is, during the normal reach and during the effect of permanently stopping the decorative symbols, the icon change effect is controlled to be unexecutable. In the variation patterns B and G, the winning or losing is reported immediately after the start of the normal reach (for example, after 10 seconds). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the variation patterns B and G are selected, by adopting a configuration in which the icon change does not change during the normal reach, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from giving a rushed impression. there is

As exemplified in FIG. 61 (C), when the pre-reach effect, the SPSP reach, and the effect of permanently stopping the decorative pattern are executed by selecting the variation pattern D or I, the icon change effect is before the reach It can be executed during the production and during a part of the period during the SPSP reach. Specifically, during the SPSP ready-to-win, it cannot be executed during the title display and during the effects after the operation prompting effect, but it can be executed during the battle effect.

As illustrated in FIGS. 23 and 24 (C) and (D), the title display itself functions as a reliability suggestive effect, so the icon change effect having the same function is not executed while the title is being displayed. It is configured as follows. In another embodiment, control may be performed so that the icon change effect can be executed while the title is being displayed. In the case of such a configuration, even if a blue title display with a relatively low reliability for a big win is displayed, the icon is displayed in a highly reliable color (for example, gold or rainbow) by the icon change effect during the title display. color) may change. As a result, the player can continue playing the game without losing the sense of anticipation for the subsequent development.

As exemplified in FIG. 26, the operation promotion effect is a effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26, and the player's awareness of the button image, the gauge image, and the effect button 26 (and the up key and the down key). It is a production that makes you turn. If the icon changes during such an effect, the player may be surprised and may not be able to perform an appropriate operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the icon change does not change during the operation promotion effect, the player can concentrate on the operation promotion effect and perform appropriate operations.

As illustrated in FIGS. 26(B) to (D), the cut-in itself functions as a reliability suggestive effect. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for the same reason as during title display, the icon change effect is not executed during cut-in.

After the cut-in, in the case of a jackpot, after the victory notification effect and the effect of pseudo-stopping with the decorative patterns of the second mode matching the patterns, after the pseudo-stopping of the decorative patterns of the first mode matching the patterns is performed. A big hit is notified by this stop. Further, in the case of a loss, after the decorative pattern of the second mode is pseudo-stopped with a reach-losing pattern, the decorative pattern of the first mode is pseudo-stopped with a reach-losing pattern and then the actual stop is performed, thereby announcing the loss. Even if the icon changes at this point during the performance of the win/lose notification, there is a possibility that the performance effect cannot be effectively enhanced. Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the icon change effect is not executed after the cut-in.

As exemplified in FIG. 61(D), when variation pattern E or J is selected, pre-reach effect, character SP reach, SPSP reach, and effect of permanently stopping decorative symbols are executed, the icon change The effect can be executed during the pre-reach effect and during part of the character SP reach and SPSP reach. Specifically, during character SP reach, execution is not possible during title display and during capture failure rendering (and development suggestion rendering), but is executable during competition rendering. It should be noted that during the SPSP reach, the control is performed in the same manner as described with reference to FIG.

As exemplified in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the title display related to the character SP reach itself functions as a reliability suggestive effect. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for the same reason as during title display related to SPSP reach, the icon change effect is not executed during title display related to character SP reach.

During the capture failure presentation, the player may watch the progress of the presentation while having a sense of anticipation that the development suggestive presentation may be executed, although it may be a loss. If the icon changes (for example, it changes to a rainbow color that heralds a big win) during such an effect, it may not be possible to effectively increase the sense of danger that the game may be lost. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed during the capture failure effect.

In addition, during the development suggestive effect executed when the character SP reach is developed into the SPSP reach, the player may be pleased with the continuation of the variable effect and heighten his expectations for the SPSP reach. If the icon changes during such an effect, the expectation will be too high, and if a blue title is displayed at the start of the SPSP reach, there is a risk of disappointment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the icon change does not change during the development suggestion effect.

Although illustration of variation patterns C and H is omitted, when variation pattern C or H is selected, pre-reach effect, normal reach, character SP reach, and effect of permanently stopping the decorative pattern are executed. The icon change effect can be executed during pre-reach effects, during normal reach, and during competition effects in character SP reach. On the other hand, during the title display in the character SP ready-to-win mode, during the capture failure performance, during the capture success performance, and during the performance of permanently stopping the decorative pattern, the icon change performance is controlled to be unexecutable.

In addition, the illustration of the variation pattern for no-reach loss is also omitted, but if the icon change effect is executed when the variation pattern for no-reach loss is selected, the player will feel uncomfortable, and on the contrary. There is a possibility that the production effect will be lowered. Therefore, when the variation pattern for no reach loss is selected, the icon change effect is controlled to be unexecutable.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when a short variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern for no-reach loss of 13.5 seconds or less and variation pattern A) is selected, the icon change effect is not executed, and the relative When a long variation pattern B to E or G to J is selected, the icon change effect can be executed.

In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the icon change effect (and the preliminary effect related to the icon) during display of any of the decorative symbols of the first mode and the decorative symbols of the second mode.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the icon change effect is executed during the pre-reach effect or during the normal reach, more than when the icon change effect is executed during the character SP reach or the SPSP reach, It is configured so that a big hit can be easily notified. In other words, when the icon change effect is executed while the decorative pattern of the first mode is being displayed, it is easier to report a big win than when it is executed while the decorative pattern of the second mode is being displayed (always It can be a big hit). In addition, it may be easier to notify the big hit when the icon change effect is executed during character SP reach or SPSP reach rather than when the icon change effect is executed during reach pre-reach or normal reach (always may be a jackpot), and the degree of expectation for a jackpot may not be different.

In addition, when the revival effect is executed in which the three decorative symbols of the same pattern are simulated to be stopped after pretending to be lost at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win, the icon may be executed. For example, after the effect of pretending to be lost by pseudo-stopping the decorative pattern of the first mode with a reach-losing eye, and before the start of the revival effect (or the revival effect) of pseudo-stopping the decorative pattern of the first mode in a pattern-matching mode At the start), the color of the icon may be changed to a rainbow color according to the execution of the icon change effect. During the icon change effect, the decorative pattern of the first mode may be displayed, or the decorative pattern of the second mode may be displayed.

Further, in the SPSP ready-to-win, control may be performed so that the icon change effect can be executed after the operation promoting effect. In the case of such a configuration, for example, it is configured such that the big win is more likely to be notified when the icon change effect is executed after the operation promotion effect than when the icon change effect is not executed after the operation promotion effect. (It may always be a big win), and the degree of expectation for a big win may not be different.

In addition, if the development suggestion effect is executed following the capture failure effect, the icon change effect can be executed during the capture failure effect, and if the non-development suggestion effect is executed following the capture failure effect, the capture failure. The icon change effect may be controlled to be unexecutable during the effect. In such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the icon change effect is executed during the capture failure effect, and that it will develop into SPSP ready-to-win and that the expectation of a big win is high.

Further, control may be performed so that the icon change effect can be executed during the development suggestion effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation for the big win by the synergistic effect of the development suggestion effect and the icon change effect.

In addition, the icon change effect may be executed also in the variable probability mode A and the variable probability mode B (that is, the variable probability game state). For example, during the variable display of the second special symbol, the icon change effect (and the pre-effect related to the icon) is controlled to be executable during the non-reach effect and before the start of the battle reach (that is, during the pre-reach effect), After the start of Battle Reach, it may be controlled to be unexecutable (that is, the appearance rate is 0%). Alternatively, the relationship of the appearance rate of the icon change effect may be controlled so as to satisfy the relationship during no ready-to-win effect and before start of battle ready-to-win effect (that is, during pre-ready to reach effect)>after start of battle ready-to-win effect>0%. For example, when the icon change effect is executed in the variable probability mode than in the normal mode, the expectation of the big win and the expectation of shifting to the variable probability gaming state in the case of a big win may be higher or lower. may be the same.

<Pseudo continuous performance>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63, in normal mode A or normal mode B, variation patterns B to E, G to J, or a variation pattern for reach-to-loss with a variation time of 13.5 seconds is selected. A “pseudo continuous effect” that can be executed in the case of Incidentally, when the variation pattern for no-reach-loss whose variation time is shorter than 13.5 seconds or the variation pattern A is selected, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a series of effects in the pseudo-continuous effect, and FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect and the reliability. It should be noted that, in FIG. 62, for convenience of explanation, the notation of characters indicating the types of presentation modes is omitted.

The pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 62) is an effect executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, and all the pseudo-stopped decorative symbols of the first mode are variably displayed so as to be scrolled again at high speed. (hereinafter also referred to as "restart"). For example, when the decorative symbols are restarted once by the pseudo continuous effect, it seems that the decorative symbols are variably displayed twice while the special symbols are variably displayed once. For example, when a "pseudo-continuous pattern" (FIGS. 62(A)(c) and (B)(c)) is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) as a middle symbol on the activated line, all is restarted (see, for example, FIGS. 16A, 16C, and 16D). The pseudo-continuous symbol is a special symbol (decorative symbol not used during normal variable display) suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect.

The pseudo-continuous effect can be executed 0 to 3 times, and is a effect that suggests the reliability of the big win depending on how many times it has been executed. A big win tends to be executed more times than a loss, and only in the case of a big win, it can be executed three times. Also, if the variation time of the first special symbol is long, the number of executions tends to increase (for example, 2 times), and if the variation time is short, the number of executions tends to decrease (for example, 0 times or 1 time). The number of executions is one or more in the case of a big win, and may be zero in the case of a loss.

There are two types of pseudo-continuous effects: "normal pseudo-continuous effects" and "story pseudo-continuous effects", and one type is selected during the non-reach effect or the pre-reach effect (that is, during the display of the decoration pattern of the first mode). can be executed. The “normal pseudo-continuous effect” is an effect that does not involve changing the background image, and the “story pseudo-continuous effect” is an effect that involves changing the background image.

In this embodiment, based on the variation pattern determined when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the type of pseudo continuous effect and the number of executions are determined to be any one of 0 to 3 times. . Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern for reach without loss or the fluctuation pattern B, C, G, H with a fluctuation time of 13.5 seconds is selected, it can be executed 0 times or once, and the fluctuation patterns D, I , J is selected, it can be executed 0 to 2 times (it may always be executed 2 times). Further, when the variation pattern E is selected, it can be executed 0 to 3 times (it may always be executed 2 or more times). Note that the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect may be uniquely determined based on the variation pattern.

Since the pseudo continuous effect is executed during the non-reach performance or during the pre-reach performance, there are cases where the ready reach is established after the pseudo continuous performance is executed, and there are cases where the ready reach is not established. Incidentally, it is also possible to make it possible to execute the pseudo-continuous effect when the variation patterns B to E and G to J are selected, so that the ready-to-win state is established without fail after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

As illustrated in FIG. 62(A), when the "normal pseudo continuous effect" is performed once, the following effects are performed, for example. Specifically, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, first, a pseudo first variable variable display is started in which the decorative symbols of the first mode are scrolled at high speed for a time shorter than the variable time of the special symbol. (See FIG. 62(A)(a)).

Then, for example, at the end of the first simulated streak of variable display, after the left and right symbols (both decorative symbols of the first mode) made up of different decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped at the center of the screen, a pseudo-continuous middle symbol is displayed. A symbol (for example, a special symbol representing the Chinese character "Ren") is pseudo-stopped on the active line (see FIGS. 62A, 62B, and 62C). When the pseudo-continuous pattern as the medium symbol is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds), the first pseudo-continuous effect is performed to restart the left, medium and right symbols. From this, the pseudo second continuous variable display is started (see, for example, FIGS. 62A and 62D).

In the present embodiment, when the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is restarted, the performance accessory 7 is operated in the direction toward the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 in an operation pattern that informs the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance. (Refer to FIG. 62(A)(d)). Along with this, an effect image is displayed as the background of the production accessory 7 to notify execution of the pseudo-continuous production.

When the action of the effect accessory 7 is completed, as shown in FIGS. 62A and 62E, a character indicating a pseudo-running number such as "×2" (a character indicating a pseudo-second run) appears on the upper left of the screen. displayed in the corner. Also, a pseudo-run effect image of a predetermined color indicating the pseudo-run (for example, green indicating that it is the second pseudo-run) is displayed along the inside of the peripheral portion of the screen. The decorative design being restarted is the decorative design of the first aspect.

As exemplified in FIG. 62(B), when the "story pseudo continuous effect" is performed once, the following effects are performed, for example. Specifically, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, first, a pseudo first variable variable display is started in which the decorative symbols of the first mode are scrolled at high speed for a time shorter than the variable time of the special symbol. (See FIG. 62(B)(a)).

In the present embodiment, when the pseudo-first streak variable display is started, the performance accessory 7 is moved to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 in an operation pattern suggesting that the pseudo-story streak effect may be executed. direction (see FIG. 62(B)(a)). Along with this, an effect image similar to the effect image notifying the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is displayed as the background of the effect accessory 7 .

When the action of the performance accessory 7 is finished, a story image representing the past of the ally character is displayed on the entire screen, as shown in FIGS. 62(B)(b). Accompanying this, a sound effect (for example, a narration introducing the past of the teammate character) related to the content of this image is output from the speaker 24 . As a result, the player can know the background of the ally character, and can recognize that there is a possibility that the pseudo-story continuous effect will be executed.

Then, for example, at the end of the first simulated variable display, while the story image is displayed on the entire screen, left and right patterns (both decorative patterns of the first mode) consisting of different decorative patterns are simulated in the center of the screen. After being stopped, a pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, a special symbol representing "su" in katakana) is pseudo-stopped on the active line as a middle symbol (see FIG. 62(B)(c)). In this embodiment, the pseudo-continuous symbols related to the story pseudo-continuous effect are not used when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player which pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed depending on the type of pseudo-continuous symbol. Incidentally, the same pseudo-continuous pattern may be used for the normal pseudo-continuous effect and the story pseudo-continuous effect.

When the pseudo-continuous pattern as the middle symbol is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds), the first story pseudo-continuous effect is performed to restart the left, middle and right symbols. From this, the pseudo second continuous variable display is started (see, for example, FIGS. 62A and 62D).

In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is restarted by executing the pseudo-story effect, the production accessories 7 are operated in the same operation pattern as when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed. (See FIG. 62(B)(d)). Along with this, an effect image similar to the effect image notifying the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is displayed as the background of the effect accessory 7 .

When the action of the effect accessory 7 is completed, as illustrated in FIGS. 62B and 62E, the story image related to the pseudo second row, which is the continuation of the story image related to the pseudo first row, is displayed on the entire screen. be done. Accompanying this, a sound effect (for example, a narration introducing the past of the teammate character) related to the content of this image is output from the speaker 24 . The decorative design being restarted is the decorative design of the first aspect. Note that unlike the case where the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image is not displayed.

In this embodiment, when the variation patterns D, E, I, and J are selected, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed twice. When the pseudo continuous effect is performed twice, the second pseudo continuous effect is performed after the first pseudo continuous effect is performed. Except for the fact that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed not during the pseudo-first streak variable display but during the pseudo-second streak variable display, when the second pseudo-continuous effect is performed, refer to FIG. Production of the same flow as the production described above is performed. Although detailed explanation is omitted, for example, after the left and right symbols (both decorative symbols of the first mode) are simulated at the end of the second pseudo-variation display, the pseudo-continuous symbol is simulated as the middle symbol. It is stopped (see FIG. 63(c)). When the pseudo-continuous pattern as the medium pattern is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds), the second pseudo-continuous effect is performed to restart all the decorative symbols. From this, the variable display of the pseudo third row is started. For example, when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, during the variable display of the pseudo-3rd streak, a character indicating the pseudo-continuous number such as "x3" is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, or the pseudo-3rd streak is displayed. A pseudo-continuous effect image of a predetermined color (for example, red) indicating that is displayed along the inside of the screen peripheral portion (see, for example, FIG. 72(F)). When the ready-to-win state is established during the pseudo-3rd streak variable display, for example, all the images related to the pseudo-to-last effect are erased, the ready-to-win effect develops, and the SPSP ready-to-win is always executed (see FIG. 63(d)). .

In this embodiment, when the variation patterns D and E are selected, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed three times. When the pseudo continuous effect is performed three times, the third pseudo continuous effect is performed after the second pseudo continuous effect is performed. This third pseudo-continuous performance functions as a jackpot announcement that definitely announces that the game will be a jackpot. Except for the fact that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed during the pseudo-continuous variable display, not during the pseudo-first variable display, but during the pseudo-continuous variable display, the third pseudo-continuous effect is performed with reference to FIG. Production of the same flow as the production described above is performed. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the third pseudo-continuous effect is performed, after the left symbol and the right symbol (both decorative symbols of the first mode) are pseudo-stopped at the end of the pseudo third variable display , pseudo-continuous symbols are pseudo-stopped as middle symbols (see FIG. 63(e)). When the pseudo-continuous pattern as the middle symbol is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds), the third pseudo-continuous effect is performed to restart all the decorative symbols. As a result, the variable display of the pseudo fourth line is started. For example, when the normal pseudo-continuation effect is executed, during the variable display of the pseudo-fourth streak, a character indicating the pseudo-sequence number such as "x4" is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, or the pseudo-fourth streak is displayed. A pseudo-continuous effect image of a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color) indicating that is displayed along the inside of the screen peripheral portion (not shown). In addition, the frame lamp 37 emits rainbow-colored light while these images are being displayed. If the ready-to-win state is established during the pseudo 4th variable display, for example, all the images related to the pseudo-to-play effect are erased, and the ready-to-win effect develops, and the jackpot is always announced at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win (Fig. 63 ( f) see).

In this embodiment, the reliability for each number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is performed is predetermined to increase in the order of 0 times<1 time<2 times<3 times. When the variation patterns B to E, G to J, or the variation pattern for no reach loss with a variation time of 13.5 seconds is selected, a small number of times (for example, once) of pseudo-continuous effects can be executed. Therefore, when the number of times of the pseudo-continuous effect is small (for example, 0 times or 1 time), the normal reach, the character SP reach, and the SPSP reach can be executed, and following the effect before the reach, the decorative pattern changes to the first mode. There are cases where it becomes the second mode and cases where it becomes the second mode.

In addition, when the variation patterns D, E, I, and J are selected, a large number of times (for example, two times) of the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed, and when the variation patterns D and E are selected, a greater number of times. (For example, three times) pseudo-continuous effect can be executed. Therefore, SPSP ready-to-win can be executed when the number of pseudo-continuous effects is large (for example, two times), and the decoration pattern tends to be in the second mode following the pre-reach effect. It should be noted that the SPSP reach may always be executed when the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect is two or more.

Only when the ready-to-win state is established after the pseudo-continuous effect is performed three times, the "full-rotation ready-to-win effect" may be executed in which the decorative symbols are scrolled at a low speed while the symbols are aligned. In the "full rotation reach effect", for example, when the combination of "111" is displayed, the combination of "222" is displayed next, and the same left pattern, middle pattern and right pattern are synchronized. It is a reach production that scrolls slowly while the pattern is aligned. The all-rotation ready-to-win effect is a ready-to-win effect that is executed only in the case of a big hit, and is not executed in the case of a loss (reliability: 100%). Therefore, the all-rotation ready-to-win effect can be regarded as a jackpot announcement that definitely announces that the jackpot game will be executed. For example, when the variation pattern E is selected, through the normal reach (or without) with a small probability (for example 1%) to develop into a full rotation reach, the remaining probability (in this case 99%) SPSP May develop into reach.

In addition, the full rotation reach may be performed using only the decorative pattern of the first mode, may be performed using only the decorative pattern of the second mode, or may be performed using only the decorative pattern of the first mode and the second mode. You may perform using the decorative pattern of a mode. For example, in all-rotation reach, the decorative pattern of the first mode may be displayed at the beginning, the decorative pattern of the second mode may be displayed in the middle, and the decorative pattern of the first mode may be displayed at the end. Further, for example, in the full rotation reach, the decorative pattern of the second mode may be displayed at the start, and the decorative pattern of the first mode may be displayed from the middle.

In addition, the normal pseudo-continuous effect is a pseudo-continuous effect that suggests that the possibility of a "jackpot" in the variable display during execution is relatively low, and the story pseudo-continuous effect is a "jackpot" in the variable display during execution. may be a pseudo-continuous effect suggesting that there is a relatively high possibility of becoming ". In other words, the normal pseudo-continuous effect may be less likely to be executed and the story pseudo-continuous effect may be more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. For example, when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, it may be a big hit or a loss, and when the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed, it may be a big win. Also, for example, when the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed, it may be easier to execute a highly reliable effect (for example, SPSP reach) after that than when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (it is always executed). may be used).

Further, the possibility of a "big win" in the variable display being executed may be higher in the normal pseudo-continuous effect than in the story pseudo-continuous effect. In other words, the normal pseudo-continuous effect may be more likely to be executed and the story pseudo-continuous effect to be less likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. For example, when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, it is a big win, and when the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed, it may be a loss or a big win. Also, for example, when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, it may be easier to execute a highly reliable effect (for example, SPSP reach) later than when the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed (it is always executed). may be used).

In addition, regarding the reliability suggestive effect that can be executed in a plurality of effect modes, depending on the effect mode, the expectation of the jackpot and the expectation of shifting to the probability variable gaming state in the case of a jackpot may be different. It doesn't have to be a performance. For example, the normal simulated continuous effect and the background effect have a higher degree of expectation when executed in the normal mode A than in the normal mode B, and the pending icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed in any normal mode. The above two expectations do not have to change even in the mode.

<Background effect>
Next, referring to FIG. 64, in normal mode A, variation patterns B to E, G to J, or all variation patterns for reach-less loss (for example, variation times are 3 seconds, 8 seconds, and 13.5 The “background effect” that can be executed when the second is selected will be described. Note that the background effect is not executed when the variation pattern A is selected. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a series of effects when a background effect is executed.

The background effect (see FIGS. 64(D) and (E)) is a effect executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination. This is an effect for transitioning to a state in which a plurality of types (in this embodiment, two types) of background images are displayed. There are two types of background images after transition that are displayed by the background effect: a bird background in which birds are displayed, and a night background in which the moon and stars are displayed. The bird background is a form of background rendering that suggests that the possibility of a "jackpot" in the running variable display is relatively low. The night background is a background production that suggests that the possibility of a "jackpot" is relatively high in the variable display being executed, and has a higher degree of reliability than when the bird background is executed (e.g. SPSP Reach) is an effect that is likely to be executed after that (may always be executed). The night background is more likely to win big than the bird background, and the respective reliability is 10% and 25%. Both are images with a wide display area for the entire screen (specifically, images displayed over the entire screen).

The background effect is one of the reliability suggesting effects executed during the non-reach effect or the pre-reach effect (that is, when the decoration pattern of the first mode is scrolled at low speed or high speed). The background effect is executed at any timing of the start of the variable effect, the start of the restart of the pseudo second run related to the normal pseudo continuous effect, and the start of the restart of the pseudo third run. . The degree of expectation for a big win and the degree of expectation for transitioning to the variable probability gaming state in the case of a big win may be different depending on the execution timing of the background effect, or may be the same. For example, it may be set in advance such that the longer the time from the start of the variable effect to the execution of the background effect, the higher (or lower) the above two expectations. Also, for example, the above-mentioned two expectations may be higher when executed at the start of the pseudo third restart than when executed at other timings. It should be noted that when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the night background may be executed more easily than when it is not executed (always the night background may be used).

During the execution of the background effect, the decorative pattern of the highly decorative first mode is displayed instead of the decorative pattern of the second mode with the low decorative effect, so that the background image relating to the background effect is colored, and when the variable effect is started. It is possible to make a gorgeous impression.

For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 determines whether or not to execute the background effect when starting the variable effect (for example, following the process of step S1557 in FIG. 52). and the night background to be displayed and the display timing are determined by random number lottery.

For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to a background effect execution lottery table (not shown) pre-stored in the sub ROM 132, and determines by random number lottery whether or not to execute the background effect based on the information as to whether or not the jackpot will be won. . The background effect execution lottery table is, for example, a table in which a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining whether or not to execute the background effect is determined in advance. In the case of a big hit, among the judgment values "0 to 99", the judgment value "0 to 39" is assigned to the judgment result of "executing" the background effect (execution rate 40%), A judgment value of "40 to 99" is assigned to the judgment result that the background effect is "not executed" (percentage of non-execution is 60%). On the other hand, in the case of a failure, among the judgment values of "0 to 99", the judgment value of "0 to 29" is assigned to the judgment result of "execute" (percentage of execution is 30%), " A determination value of "30 to 99" is assigned to the determination result "not executed" (percentage of non-execution: 70%).

In this way, the background effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss, so the player recognizes that the background effect is more reliable than the case where it is not executed. It is possible. It should be noted that the background effect may be executed in the case of a big win, and may not be executed in the case of a loss.

In FIG. 64 (A), in the normal mode A, with two pending icons displayed in the first pending icon display area 51, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 A state in which the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) indicating that the determination result is lost is stopped and displayed is exemplified. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as white pending.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the start of the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, the first Special symbol determination is executed and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, in the normal mode A, the variable display of decorative patterns (decorative patterns of the first aspect) is started (see FIG. 64(C)). In this example, it is predetermined that the background effect is executed when the variable effect is started.

When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, first, the decorative patterns (decorative patterns of the first mode) that have been stopped and displayed slightly move slightly upward, and then start scrolling downward at a low speed. , an effect display is performed in which the scroll speed gradually increases.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the operation prompting effect executed immediately before the background effect is started. In this embodiment, when the background effect is executed, the operation prompting effect is always started immediately before the background effect is started. FIG. 64(C) illustrates a state in which the operation prompting effect is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the first mode). The operation prompting effect executed during the display of the decoration pattern of the first aspect can be executed in the normal mode A, but cannot be executed in the normal mode B. On the other hand, the operation-promoting effect executed immediately before the cut-in while the decorative pattern of the second mode is being displayed can be executed in the normal modes A and B.

In the operation promoting effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, a normal button image (see FIGS. 64(C) and 65(A)) simulating the effect button 26 in the normal state and the effect button 26 in the projecting state are simulated. Any one of the projecting button images (see FIG. 65(B)) is displayed together with the gauge image. The operation-promoting effect (weak mode) in which normal button images are displayed is an operation-promoting effect that suggests that the possibility of a "big win" in the variable display being executed is relatively low (for example, a reliability of 10%). The operation-promoting effect (strong mode) of displaying a protruding button image is an operation-promoting effect suggesting that there is a relatively high possibility of a "jackpot" in the variable display being executed (for example, the reliability is 60%), It is a mode in which a highly reliable effect (for example, SPSP reach) is more likely to be performed later than when it is performed in the weak mode (it may always be performed). It should be noted that the operation prompting effect (strong mode) may be executed when the jackpot is won, and may not be executed when the win is lost.

As exemplified in FIG. 65(A), in the operation promotion effect (weak mode), the effect button 26 emits white light in a normal state during a predetermined valid period (for example, 3 seconds from the start of the operation promotion effect). A button lamp, which is a light-emitting element built in the production button 26, is controlled as shown in FIG. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 65B, in the operation prompting effect (strong mode), the effect button motor and the button lamp are activated so that the effect button 26 is projected and emits red light during the effective period. controlled. Note that the frame lamp 37 is controlled to be turned off during the valid period.

For example, the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 receives the data transmitted from the image sound control board 140 by executing the process of step S44 in FIG. The height of the performance button 26 is changed from the normal state to the projecting state by operating the accessory motor. The performance button 26 can be operated in any state of the normal state and the projecting state.

When the effect button 26 is operated (for example, pressed) during the effective period, the effective period ends according to the operation, the normal button image (or the projecting button image) and the gauge image are erased, and the background effect is started. . FIGS. 64C and 64D illustrate how the background image changes to a bird background or a night background when the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the first mode) is scrolled at a low speed.

When the effect button 26 is not operated during the effective period, the operation promoting effect ends at the end timing of the predetermined effective period, and the background image changes to a bird background or a night background accordingly. When the background effect is executed without being operated, the bird background is more likely to be displayed than the night background.

Here, in the present embodiment, the background image related to the background effect is displayed only for the variable effect being executed. The background image related to the background effect is not displayed at the time when the character SP ready-to-win state is developed, or when the SP SP ready-to-win state is developed, or at the timing when the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed with the broken eyes. For example, when a failure is reported in this variable effect, the default background image (FIG. 64 (A) or (B)) of normal mode A (or normal mode B) is displayed along with the stop display of the first special symbol. will be The reach development timing and the stop display timing of the first special symbol are both uniquely determined corresponding to the variation pattern, and are timings that do not change regardless of the presence or absence of operation during the valid period. Therefore, for example, the display time of the background image related to the background effect is longer when the operation is performed during the valid period than when the operation is not performed during the valid period.

Note that the background effect is an effect that can be executed in the normal mode A, but is an effect that cannot be executed in the normal mode B. Here, while the first special symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the normal mode is B, and the normal mode A may be entered at the same time as the variable display of the decorative symbol starts along with the variable display of the first special symbol. Even in such a case, the background effect can be executed, and the background effect is executed after the operation prompting effect is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols (flow from (E) to (B) in FIG. 64).

In addition, for example, when the decorative pattern of the first mode is pseudo-stopped in a failing mode, the normal mode B is shifted to the normal mode A (or from the normal mode A to the normal mode B), and the decorative pattern of the first mode is changed. may be stop-displayed along with the stop-display of the first special symbol without changing the state as it is. That is, the probability that the production mode shifts from the stop display of the decorative pattern of the first mode to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first mode along with the variable display of the first special pattern is 0%. be. In this case, in the variable display in which the background effect is executed, it can be controlled so that the normal mode A is always set when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first mode is started. This makes it possible to smoothen the flow of the presentation when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started and to effectively prevent the presentation from becoming complicated.

Note that the BGM for the normal mode A may be switched to the BGM for the background effect at the execution timing of the background effect. For example, BGM for a bird background may be output from the speaker 24 while a bird background is being displayed, and BGM for a night background may be output from the speaker 24 while a night background is being displayed.

<Relationship between Presence or Absence of Operation During Operation Promoting Rendering Executed Immediately Before Start of Background Rendering and Rendering Mode>
With reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, the relationship between presence/absence of an operation during the operation-promoting effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect and the effect mode of the effect after the operation-promoting effect will be described. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the effect after the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect at the time of the big win. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the effect after the operation promotion effect which is executed immediately before the background effect is started at the time of losing.

In this embodiment, if the variation pattern for reach without loss, variation patterns B and G are selected, if it is normal mode A, the background effect (and the operation promotion effect immediately before that) can be executed, but the title display ( 23 and 24) cannot be executed. On the other hand, when the variation patterns C to E and H to J are selected, in the normal mode A, the background effect (and the immediately preceding operation promotion effect) and the title display can be executed. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win differs between the case where only the background effect is executed and the case where the background effect and the title display are executed.

The background effect can be executed regardless of whether or not there is an operation during the operation promoting effect executed immediately before the background effect starts, and if the effect button 26 is not operated during the operation promoting effect, the bird background is higher than if it was operated. Although it is easy to shift to , it shifts to any background. In the present embodiment, such an operation promoting effect and a background effect are used as a chance-up that increases the reliability of the title display, thereby motivating the player to operate. Note that the title display is performed for the character SP reach and the SPSP reach, but for convenience of explanation, the SPSP reach title display will be described here, and the description of the character SP reach title display will be omitted.

In the case of a big win, as the operation promoting effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the strong mode operation promoting effect is more likely to appear than the weak mode. When the effect button 26 is operated during this operation promoting effect, the background effect in the effect mode determined at the start of the variable effect (for example, following the process of step S1557 in FIG. 52) is executed. In the case of a big win, the night background is more likely to be displayed than the bird background (in FIG. 66A, it is easier to proceed from (a) to (c) than to (b)).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation patterns D and E are selected and the effect button 26 is operated during the operation promoting effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the bird background and the night background are displayed. No matter which one of them is displayed, the title display of the performance mode determined at the start of the variable performance is displayed during the SPSP reach. Therefore, during the SPSP reach, any one of the blue title display, red title display, and rainbow color title display can be displayed (Fig. 66 (A) (b) or (c) to (d ) to (h)).

On the other hand, if the effect button 26 is not operated during the operation promoting effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, even if it is decided to display the night background at the start of the variable effect, the effect will be displayed according to the end of the effective period. A bird background may appear. Therefore, the night background is less likely to be displayed when there is no operation during the operation promotion effect than when there is an operation (Appearance rate in FIG. 66(B)(c) < FIG. 66(A) ( The rate of occurrence of c)). In the case of a big hit, the bird background may always be displayed when there is no operation (the appearance rate of the night background is 0%), or the bird background may be displayed more easily than the night background (0 %<appearance rate of night background <appearance rate of bird background), and the night background may be displayed more easily than the bird background (appearance rate of night background>appearance rate of bird background>0%).

Further, in this embodiment, when the variation patterns D and E are selected and there is no operation during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the background effect starts, a blue title display or a red title is displayed during the SPSP reach. While the display can be displayed, the rainbow color title display is not displayed (pattern proceeding from (d) to (g) from FIG. 66(B)(b) or (c)). Further, for example, even if it is decided to display a red title display at the start of the variable effect, a blue title display may actually be displayed.

In this way, when there is no operation during the operation promoting effect, a title display other than the effect mode determined at the start of the variable effect may be displayed during the SPSP reach, and there is no operation during the operation promoting effect. 66(B)(e) and (g) < FIG. 66(A)(e) and (g) ). In the case of a big hit, if there is no operation, the blue title display may always be displayed (the appearance rate of the red title display is 0%), or the blue title display may be displayed more easily than the red title display. Good (0%<appearance rate of red title display<appearance rate of blue title display). Red title display may be displayed more easily than blue title display (appearance rate of red title display>appearance rate of blue title display>0%).

In the case of losing, as the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the weak mode is more likely to appear than the strong mode operation promotion effect. When the performance button 26 is operated during this operation promoting performance, the background performance of the performance mode determined at the start of the variable performance is executed. In the case of losing, the night background is more difficult to display than the bird background (it is more difficult to proceed from (a) to (c) in FIG. 67 than to (b)).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation patterns I and J are selected and the effect button 26 is operated during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the bird background and the night background are displayed. No matter which one of them is displayed, the title display of the performance mode determined at the start of the variable performance is displayed during the SPSP reach. Therefore, during SPSP reach, either blue title display or red title display can be displayed (pattern from (b) or (c) to (d) to (g) in FIG. 66).

On the other hand, if the effect button 26 is not operated during the operation promoting effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, even if it is decided to display the night background at the start of the variable effect, the effect will be displayed according to the end of the valid period. A bird background may appear. Therefore, the night background is less likely to be displayed when there is no operation during the operation prompting effect than when there is an operation. In addition, in the case of a failure, the bird background may always be displayed when there is no operation (the appearance rate of the night background is 0%), or the bird background may be displayed more easily than the night background (0 %<appearance rate of night background <appearance rate of bird background), and the night background may be displayed more easily than the bird background (appearance rate of night background>appearance rate of bird background>0%).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation patterns I and J are selected and there is no operation of the effect button 26 during the operation promoting effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, there is an operation. Red title display is less likely to be displayed. In addition, in the case of a failure, if there is no operation, the blue title display may always be displayed (the appearance rate of the red title display is 0%), or the blue title display may be displayed more easily than the red title display. Good (0%<appearance rate of red title display<appearance rate of blue title display). Red title display may be displayed more easily than blue title display (appearance rate of red title display>appearance rate of blue title display>0%).

In this way, when there is an operation during the operation promotion performance executed immediately before the start of the background performance, even if the bird background is displayed according to the operation, the red title display is likely to appear during the SPSP reach. Further, when there is no operation, even if the night background is displayed according to the operation, the blue title display is likely to appear during the SPSP reach. In this way, the presence or absence of the operation at the time of starting the variable effect affects not only the effect mode of the background effect executed immediately after the operation, but also the effect mode during the SPSP ready-to-win. With such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to operate, and effectively enhance the interest of the player-participation type presentation.

Further, the rainbow-colored title display can be displayed when operated, but is not displayed when not operated. As a result, it is possible to give the player a motivation to actively operate from the start of the variable presentation.

Here, if the background presentation (or the operation promoting presentation just before that) is executed in a manner of definitely notifying that a big win will occur, it will be understood that the big win will occur from the start of the variable presentation. In this case, even if an effect such as a fail-to-capture effect that makes the player feel uneasy is executed to increase interest, the effect of the effect may not be enhanced effectively. On the other hand, for example, in the middle or the end of the variable performance, if a performance related to the subsequent performance and the content is executed as a jackpot announcement, the player can be given a special feeling and can concentrate on the subsequent performance. It is possible. For example, the title display representing the content of the SPSP ready-to-win battle presentation may be used as a big win notice, or the cut-in representing the content of the victory presentation may be used as a big win notice, thereby effectively increasing the effect of the production.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the aspect that functions as a jackpot notice is not provided in the background effect executed at the start of the variable effect (and the operation promoting effect immediately before that), but is provided in the title display and the cut-in. ing.

In another embodiment, in addition to the bird background and the night background, the background effect may include a rainbow background that displays a rainbow-colored background image that functions as a big win notice. In addition, in addition to the weak mode and the strong mode, there is a rainbow mode in which a rainbow-colored protruding button image that functions as a jackpot notice is displayed in the mode of the operation promotion mode that is executed immediately before the start of the background mode. good too. For example, when the variation patterns B to E for big wins are selected, the background performance of the rainbow background and the operation promotion performance of the rainbow mode can be executed by different random number lotteries with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%). . For example, after the rainbow-mode operation-promoting effect is executed, the rainbow-background background effect may be difficult to execute, or may be easy to execute. Further, after the operation prompting effect other than the rainbow mode is executed, the background effect of the rainbow background may be difficult to execute, or may be easy to execute. Further, after the background effect of the rainbow background and/or the operation promotion effect of the rainbow mode is executed, the rainbow title display may be difficult or easy to execute.

Even if there is no operation during the operation promoting effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the background effect and title display may be executed in the effect mode determined at the start of the variable effect, or the rainbow color title may be displayed. Display may be displayed.

Note that the reliability of the big win may differ depending on the combination of the operation promotion effect and the background effect. This makes it possible to make the user interested in these presentations.

For example, any of the following (1) to (4) may be used as the relationship between the level of reliability relating to the combination of the effect modes of the operation promoting effect and the background effect.
(1) Bird background after operation-promoting effect (weak mode)<night background after operation-promoting effect (weak mode)<bird background after operation-promoting effect (strong mode)<night background after operation-promoting effect (strong mode).
In the above (1), the reliability is high when the operation-promoting effect (strong mode) is executed regardless of the effect mode of the background effect, and the reliability is low when the operation-promoting effect (weak mode) is executed. It is easy to understand the degree relationship.
(2) Night background after operation-promoting effect (weak mode)<bird background after operation-promoting effect (strong mode)<night background after operation-promoting effect (strong mode)<bird background after operation-promoting effect (weak mode).
In the above (2), there is a case opposite to the relationship of the reliability of only the background effect. As a result, when the bird background is displayed, the expectation may be heightened more than when the night background is displayed, and it is possible to effectively prevent the interest of the bird background from deteriorating. Also, even if the operation prompting effect (weak mode) is started, it is possible to continue the game without losing the sense of anticipation.
(3) Bird background after operation-promoting effect (weak mode)<bird background after operation-promoting effect (strong mode)<night background after operation-promoting effect (weak mode)<night background after operation-promoting effect (strong mode).
In the above (3), the reliability is high when the night background is displayed, and the reliability is low when the bird background is displayed, regardless of the presentation mode of the operation promotion presentation. Therefore, the reliability is easy to understand.
(4) Bird background after operation-promoting effect (strong mode)<bird background after operation-promoting effect (weak mode)<night background after operation-promoting effect (weak mode)<night background after operation-promoting effect (strong mode).
In the above (4), the lowest reliability is for the stagnation, the medium reliability is for the stagnation, and the highest reliability is for the performance modes with high reliability.
Note that the relationship between the levels of reliability associated with the combination of the operation-promoting effect and the background effect is not limited to the above relationships (1) to (4), and may be any relationship.

Note that in other embodiments, the operation promotion effect may not be executed immediately before the background effect starts (appearance rate 0%), or may not be executed (appearance rate 0% or more and less than 100%). . For example, the background effect may be executed at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbols of the first mode is started along with the variable display of the first special symbol (without executing the operation promotion effect).

Also, the reliability of the big win may differ depending on the combination of the effect modes of the background effect and the title display. As a result, it is possible to make the user interested in the background effect, and to effectively increase interest in the case where both the background effect and the title display are executed.

For example, any of the following (1) to (4) may be used as the relationship between the degree of reliability associated with the combination of the effect mode of the background effect and the title display.
(1) Blue title display after bird background<red title display after bird background<blue title display after night background<red title display after night background.
In the above (1), the reliability of the combination of the background effect and the title display is such that the reliability is high when the night background is executed, and the reliability is high when the bird background is executed, regardless of the effect mode of the title display. Since the degree is low, it is easy to understand the relationship of reliability.
(2) Red title display after bird background<blue title display after night background<red title display after night background<blue title display after bird background.
In (2) above, the relationship of the reliability regarding the combination of the background effect and the title display may be opposite to the relationship of the reliability of the title display alone. As a result, the display of the blue title display may increase the sense of anticipation more than the display of the red title display, and it is possible to effectively prevent the interest of the blue title display from decreasing. be. In addition, even if the bird background is displayed, it is possible to continue the game without losing the sense of anticipation.
(3) Blue title display after bird background<blue title display after night background<red title display after bird background<red title display after night background.
In the above (3), the reliability is high when the red title display is displayed, and the reliability is low when the blue title display is displayed, regardless of the effect mode of the background effect, so the reliability is easy to understand.
(4) Blue title display after night background<blue title display after bird background<red title display after bird background<red title display after night background.
In the above (4), the lowest reliability is for the upstart, the medium reliability is for the upstart, and the highest reliability is for the performance modes with high reliability.
Note that the relationship between the levels of reliability associated with the combination of the background effect and the title display is not limited to the above relationships (1) to (4), and may be any relationship.

In addition, for example, when variation patterns E and J capable of executing character SP reach and SPSP reach are selected, background effect is executed, and variation patterns A to D and G to which character SP reach and SPSP reach cannot both be executed are selected. If the variation pattern for I or no reach loss is selected, the background effect may not be executed (appearance rate 0%). Also, in the latter case, the appearance rate of the background effect may be lower or higher than in the former case.

Further, during the operation prompting effect executed immediately before the background effect is started, the decorative pattern of the second mode may be displayed. In such a case, the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is not superimposed behind the normal button image (or projecting button image) and the gauge image, so that the screen configuration is easy to understand and the operation promotion effect is executed. It is easy for the player to notice the presence.

It should be noted that, for example, the decoration pattern of the first mode may be displayed during the operation promotion presentation (weak mode), and the decoration pattern of the second mode may be displayed during the operation promotion presentation (strong mode).

In addition, the operation promotion effect (weak mode) executed immediately before the start of the background effect is different from the effect mode of the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the cut-in during the SPSP reach. No message is displayed. Note that the effect mode of the operation-promoting effect executed immediately before the background effect is started may be the same as the effect mode of the operation-promoting effect executed during the SPSP reach.

In addition, the background effect is a effect in which the effect accessory 7 is not operated, and is an effect executed when the effect accessory 7 is at the initial position. In another embodiment, the effect accessory 7 may be operated at the start timing of the background effect.

In this embodiment, the background effect is not executed after the start of the ready-to-win effect (that is, the appearance rate is 0%). In other embodiments, the background effect may be executed during the SPSP reach, or may be executed in the promotion effect (first half). For example, in the SPSP reach, the degree of expectation for a big win may be higher when a night background is displayed than when a bird background is displayed (it may always be a big win). Also, in the promotion effect (first half), if the night background is displayed rather than the bird background is displayed, the promotion success effect is easier to execute, and the promotion failure effect may be less likely to be executed (always the promotion success effect may be executed).

<Chance eye production>
Next, referring to FIG. 68, in normal mode A, variation patterns B to E, G to J, or all variation patterns for reach-less loss (for example, variation times are 3 seconds, 8 seconds, and 13.5 A description will be given of the “chance effect” that can be executed when a preliminary determination result indicating that the second is selected is obtained. Incidentally, the chance eye effect is not executed when the variation pattern A is selected. In the "chance eye effect", when notifying that the judgment result of the first special pattern judgment is "losing", the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is stopped and displayed with a predetermined specific number combination. By doing so, it is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility that there is a "big hit" in the suspension of the first special symbol determination. That is, the chance presentation is one of the reliability indication presentations that preliminarily suggests that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be played.

At the time of losing, immediately before the decorative symbols are stop-displayed, the decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first mode) are pseudo-stopped in the same combination as the stop-displayed number combination. In addition, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in accordance with the start of the variable display of the next first special design, the decorative design (decorative design of the first mode) which has been stopped and displayed slightly moves. is displayed (for example, see FIG. 74(B)). For this reason, the second chance is from immediately before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, 0.5 seconds before) to a predetermined timing after the start of the fluctuation display of the next first special symbol (for example, 1 second after the start of the fluctuation display). ) is displayed.

In this way, during execution of the chance presentation, the decorative symbols of the first mode with large numbers are displayed instead of the second mode with small numbers constituting the decorative symbols. This makes it easy to understand that a chance eye is displayed.

There are two types of chances displayed by the chances presentation, ie, a weak chance and a strong chance. A weak chance eye is a chance eye suggesting that there is a relatively low possibility that there will be one that is judged to be a "jackpot" while the first special symbol judgment is pending. In other words, it is a chance to give the player the impression that the variable display of the prefetch target may be a chance. A weak chance eye in this embodiment is a loose eye composed of three even-numbered symbols (for example, a combination of "8", "4" and "4": see FIG. 74A). If only the weak chance is displayed before the variable display of the prefetch target starts, the variable display of the prefetch target may establish a reach, but it is difficult to achieve a reach. In addition, even if reach is established in the variable display of the prefetch target, only low-reliability reach performance (for example, normal reach) is performed, and in most cases, loss is notified.

A strong chance eye is a chance eye that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility that there is one that is judged to be a "jackpot" among the pending judgment of the first special symbol. A strong chance eye in this embodiment is a loose eye composed of three odd-numbered symbols (for example, a combination of "7", "3", and "3": see FIG. 75(D)). When the strong chance is displayed before the variable display of the prefetch target starts, the ready-to-win state is always established during the variable display of the pre-read target, and the ready-to-win effect (for example, character SP reach) is performed. That is, the strong chance eye is a chance eye suggesting that the read-ahead target variable display will develop into, for example, a ready-to-win effect that is greater than or equal to the normal reach. Therefore, it can be said that the strong chance eye is an effect having the same function as the blue pending icon described with reference to FIG. When a strong chance is displayed, the SPSP reach may be executed during the variable display of the look-ahead target. Therefore, by displaying strong chances before the variable display of the look-ahead target starts, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the big win.

Note that, in the present embodiment, chance numbers may be displayed a plurality of times before the variable display of the look-ahead target starts. For example, there is a case where the weak chance eye is displayed in the variable display two before the prefetch target, and the weak chance eye is also displayed in the variable display one before the prefetch target. Also, there is a case where a weak chance eye is displayed in the variable display two before the prefetch target, and a strong chance eye is displayed in the variable display one before the prefetch target. Further, there is a case where a strong chance eye is displayed in the variable display two before the look-ahead target, and a strong chance eye is displayed in the variable display one before the look-ahead target.

In this way, when the chance number is displayed a plurality of times before the variable display of the prefetch target starts, the type of the chance number displayed in the variable display one before the prefetch target is the big hit of the variable display of the prefetch target. It has a role to suggest reliability. Therefore, when the weak chance is displayed, the player can enjoy the chance performance while expecting the strong chance to be displayed before the variable display of the look-ahead target starts.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the second chance eye is displayed using the first special symbol that is continuously displayed twice. The number of chances may be displayed three or more times before the variable display begins.

When the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 receives a pending command from the game control board 100 in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11, the process of setting the pre-effect pattern (step S136 in FIG. 48). Subsequently, it is determined by random number lottery whether or not to execute the chance presentation. Then, when it is determined to execute the eye-of-chance effect, the sub CPU 131 determines, by random number lottery, what kind of effect pattern the eye-of-chance effect is to be executed.

By the way, the derivation display of the chance number is performed using the variation of reach-to-loss. For this reason, when it is decided to execute the chance eye effect based on the pre-determination result of the prefetch target, whether or not all the variable effects related to the variable display executed before the variable display of the prefetch target are the non-reach effect. is determined, and when there is at least one variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is performed, control is performed such that the chance performance is not executed.

It should be noted that whether or not to execute the chance effect may be determined by the following processing. Specifically, when a pre-determination result (for example, a pre-determination result indicating a variation pattern in which a ready-to-win effect can be executed) that can be executed for a chance effect is obtained when a hold command is received, the sub CPU 131 , it is determined whether or not the variable presentation relating to the variable display executed prior to the variable display to be read-ahead includes the presentation with reach. Then, the sub CPU 131 decides not to execute the chance game effect when it determines that it is included, and decides to execute the chance game effect when it determines that it is not included.

<Design change effect>
The chance eye effect is a effect having a function of suggesting the degree of reliability of the big win of the look-ahead target. For this reason, it is preferable that the player can easily recognize which chance number was displayed in the previous variable display even after the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the mode of the chance number start to be variably displayed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by changing a part (or all) of the decorative symbols displayed in the form of chance numbers (decorative patterns of the first form), the possibility of a big win is suggested and the chance numbers are displayed. A "symbol change performance" suggesting that the performance has been executed is executed. Note that the symbol change effect is an effect that is executed using the decorative symbols of the first mode, so it is an effect of displaying an image with a wide display area with respect to the entire screen.

In this embodiment, when the chance eye effect is executed, the symbol change effect is always executed. For this reason, the pattern change effect is the same as the chance eye effect, in normal mode A, the variation patterns B to E, G to J, or all the variation patterns for loss without reach (for example, the variation time is 3 seconds, 8 seconds, and 13.5 seconds) is selected. Note that the symbol change effect is not executed when the variation pattern A is selected. Also, the pattern change effect is one of the reliability suggesting effects that preliminarily suggest that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be played.

FIG. 68 is a time chart for explaining the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect. As illustrated in FIG. 68(A), when the chance effect is not executed, the variable display of the decorative symbols accompanying the variable display of the first special symbols, and the decoration accompanying the stop display of the first special symbols (loss notification) The stop display of the pattern (the stop display of the separated stitches) is repeated.

On the other hand, when the chance eye effect is executed, the weak chance eye may be stopped and displayed in the variable effect two before the look-ahead target, and the strong chance eye may be displayed in the change effect one before the look-ahead target ( See FIG. 68(B)). In such a case, at the start of the variable performance immediately before the look-ahead target, a pattern change performance is executed to suggest that the weak chance eye is displayed in the variable performance two-stage before the look-ahead target. Specifically, among the three even patterns (decorative patterns of the first aspect) that form the weak chance, the numbers that make up the even patterns are changed from the default color (for example, blue) to a predetermined color (green in this embodiment). A production display that changes all at once is performed.

In addition, when a strong chance eye is displayed in the variable performance immediately before the look-ahead target, it suggests that a strong chance eye was displayed in the variable performance immediately before the look-ahead target at the start of the variable performance for the look-ahead target. A symbol change effect is executed. Specifically, among the three odd patterns (decorative patterns of the first aspect) that form the strong chance eye, the numbers that make up the odd patterns are changed from the default color (for example, green) to a color other than a predetermined color (this embodiment A production display that changes all at once to red in the form is performed.

In addition, during the pattern change production, the decorative patterns forming the chance eye move slightly. The timing at which the decorative pattern changed by the pattern change performance is returned to the default state may be the timing when scrolling is started, the timing when it is no longer displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 due to scrolling, or during high-speed scrolling.

In this way, when the variable display is started, the possibility that the prefetch target becomes a big hit is reduced by executing the pattern change effect of changing the element related to the color of the decorative pattern using the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed. It is possible to suggest There are two types of pattern change effects, one is to change the color element of the decorative pattern to red and the other is to change it to green. The mode of changing to red is a pattern change production of a mode suggesting that the possibility of the presence of a "jackpot" being determined as a "jackpot" among the suspension of the first special symbol determination is relatively low. The mode of changing to green is a pattern change effect of a mode suggesting that there is a relatively high possibility that there will be one judged as a "jackpot" among the suspension of the first special pattern judgment. When the pattern change effect is executed in the mode of changing to red, the reliability of the big hit of the prefetch target is higher than when it is executed in the mode of changing to green.

The pattern change effect is executed using the decorative patterns of the first mode in which the size of the numbers constituting the decorative patterns is large, not the decorative patterns in the second mode in which the sizes of the numbers are small. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to understand in what kind of presentation mode the symbol change presentation was executed.

Also, the symbol change effect is executed using the decorative symbols of the highly decorative first mode instead of the decorative symbols of the second mode having the low decorativeness. As a result, the originally high decorativeness of the decorative pattern of the first aspect can be further enhanced by the pattern change effect. As a result, it is possible to give a gorgeous impression at the start of the variable presentation.

In addition, along with the effect display of the above-described pattern change effect (or instead of the above-described effect display of the pattern change effect), effect display that changes the color of only the character's clothes attached to the numbers that make up the decorative pattern. may be performed. For example, in the pattern change effect suggesting that the weak chance eye is displayed, the characters' clothes are changed to green all at once, and in the pattern change effect that suggests that the strong chance eye is displayed, the character's clothes are changed. You may change to red all at once.

The chance eye effect and the pattern change effect are effects whose execution timing is uniquely determined by being linked to the variation pattern of the first special symbol before the look-ahead object. Therefore, the execution interval is not constant when the chance eye effect is executed twice or more, and the execution interval is not constant when the symbol change effect is executed twice or more. On the other hand, the execution interval between the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect immediately after that is constant no matter how many times these effects are executed.

In other embodiments, the symbol change effect may be executed without executing the chance eye effect. In this case, by executing the symbol change effect using the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first mode) that was stopped when notifying that the determination result of the first special symbol determination was "losing", It is possible to suggest that there is a possibility that there is one that is determined as a "jackpot" while the first special symbol determination is pending.

Further, in another embodiment, the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect may be configured as one effect. Further, the chance eye effect may be configured as an effect accompanied by an effect display in which, when the decorative symbols forming the chance eye are stopped and displayed, the periphery of the decorative symbol emits light in a luminescent color corresponding to the intensity of the chance eye. .

Further, in another embodiment, the production mode of the chance eye production and the pattern change production may include a mode that functions as a big win notice that definitely announces that a big win will occur. It may be executed with a predetermined probability (eg, 1%) when E is selected.

Further, the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect are effects in which the effect accessory 7 is not operated, and are effects executed when the effect accessory 7 is at the initial position. In another embodiment, the production accessory 7 may not be operated in the chance eye production, but may be operated at the start timing of the pattern change production.

In this embodiment, the chance eye effect and the pattern background effect are not executed after the start of the ready-to-win effect (that is, the appearance rate of both is 0%). In another embodiment, the chance eye effect and the pattern background effect may be executed during the SPSP reach, or may be executed in the promotion effect (first half). For example, in the SPSP ready-to-win game, chance numbers may be displayed instead of ready-to-win symbols, and strong chance numbers may be displayed rather than weak chance numbers, so that the expectation for the big win may be higher. Also, for example, in the SPSP ready-to-win, a pattern change effect may be executed in which the color of the numbers that make up the decorative pattern (reach pattern) is changed from the default color to another color, and the color of the even-numbered ready-to-win pattern is changed from the default color to green. , or the color of the reach symbol of the odd number symbol may be changed from the default color to red. Reach symbols can be displayed in the default colors, green and red, and the confidence in the jackpot is higher in that order. Also, for example, in the promotion performance (first half), a pattern change effect may be executed in which the color of the decorative pattern in the jackpot mode is changed from the default color to another color, and the color of the decorative pattern in the jackpot mode is different than the default color. The color of (eg, red) has a higher probability of shifting to a variable gaming state (eg, shifting with a probability of 100%).

<Relationship between Reliability Suggestion Productions>
With reference to FIG. 69, the relationship between reliability suggestive effects that can be executed in normal mode A will be described. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reliability suggestive effects. As described above, the pending icon change effect, the icon change effect, the normal pseudo-continuous effect, and the story pseudo-continuous effect are the reliable effects that can be executed when the effect is executed in the normal mode A or the normal mode B. It is a suggestive performance. Also, the background effect (and the operation promotion effect), the chance effect, and the symbol change effect are the reliability suggesting effects that can be executed when the normal mode A effect is being executed.

When a certain reliability suggestive effect is executed in a highly reliable manner, it is not executed in a highly reliable manner (specifically, when it is executed in a highly reliable manner or when it is not even executed). In comparison, a plurality of reliability-suggesting effects are likely to be executed in a highly-reliable manner, and there is a high possibility of a big win. For example, with respect to the background effect, the following can be said in comparison with the case where the night background with high reliability is executed compared with the case where the bird background with low reliability is executed.
・Before the start of the variable display in which the night background is executed, the pending icon is likely to become a highly reliable color (that is, the pending icon change effect and preliminary effect are likely to be executed in a highly reliable manner (even if they are always executed good)).
・Before the start of the variable display in which the night background is executed and in the variable display in which the night background is executed, it is easy to execute the chance eye effect and the pattern change effect with this variable display as a prefetch target (although it may always be executed). ).
- In the variable display in which the night background is executed, other reliability suggestive effects (for example, pseudo-continuous effects) are likely to be executed (although they may always be executed).
The same applies to the case where the reliability suggestive effect other than the background effect is executed in the highly reliable effect mode. Therefore, in some cases, a situation may arise in which execution of all of these is decided.

However, depending on the aspect of each effect, simultaneous execution may feel redundant or excessive. In addition, the amount of image data increases, and there is a risk that processing failures may occur or frames may be dropped due to double buffering.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a prohibition condition is set in advance between the reliability suggesting effects for the following reasons. In addition, there are cases where the contents of change when the prohibition condition is satisfied are specified.

The relationship between the pending icon change effect and other effects will be described with reference to the row in FIG. 69(A).

First, the relationship between the pending icon change effect and the icon change effect will be described. In the present embodiment, the same effect image as the icon change suggesting image displayed in the icon change effect is used as the pending change suggesting image displayed in the pending icon change effect. Therefore, when these two types of effects are executed at the same time, it becomes difficult to understand what is happening, and there is a risk of giving a complicated impression. In addition, for example, when the pending icon and the icon change at the same time, and the icon changes to a more reliable mode (for example, gold color), the expectation for the big win is increased with respect to the variable effect corresponding to the icon. likely to hold. In such a case, if a failure is reported in the variable effect corresponding to the icon, there is a possibility that the player will not have a sense of expectation for the pending icon, which has a lower reliability (for example, green color). Also, for example, when the pending icon changes to a highly reliable mode (for example, a rainbow color indicating a big win), there is a high possibility that the player will lose interest in the variable effect being executed.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "relevant icon change effect" in the row of FIG. 69A, the pending icon change effect and the relevant icon change effect cannot be executed at the same time, and execution of one effect is determined. If so, control is performed so that the other effect is not executed at the same timing. "Control not to execute" means, for example, when execution of one effect is determined, the random number lottery process itself for determining whether to execute the other effect is not executed. can be considered.

In other embodiments, the icon change effect may be executed during execution of the pending icon change effect, or the pending icon change effect may be executed during execution of the icon change effect. Further, for example, control may be performed such that an effect related to the mode after change with higher reliability is executed, and an effect related to the mode after change with lower reliability is not executed.

Next, the relationship between the pending icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect, and the relationship between the pending icon change effect and the story pseudo-continuous effect will be described.

Regarding the relationship between the pending icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect, for example, if the pending icon changes to a highly reliable mode (for example, a rainbow color indicating a big win), there is interest in the variable effect being executed. likely to disappear. In addition, in this embodiment, when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, a pseudo-continuous effect image of a predetermined color indicating the pseudo-continuous number (for example, green indicating that it is the pseudo-second streak) is displayed along the inside of the screen periphery. is displayed. Since the pseudo-continuous effect image is superimposed and displayed in front of the pending icon, the visibility of the pending icon is reduced. Therefore, even if the pending icon change effect is executed while the pseudo-continuous effect image is being displayed and the color of the pending icon changes, the effect may not be effectively improved.

Regarding the relationship between the pending icon change effect and the pseudo-story continuous effect, the pseudo-story continuous effect is an effect that draws attention to the story image displayed on the entire screen and the effect sound related to the contents of this image. During such an effect, for example, if a hold change suggestion image is displayed superimposed on the front side of the story image, or if a production sound (for example, a production sound such as “picon”) related to the hold icon change production is output, The player's attention is diverted to the hold icon. In addition, it is difficult to hear the effect sound related to the pending icon change effect due to the effect sound related to the story pseudo-continuous effect, and there is a risk that the interest in both effects will decrease.

Therefore, as shown in the columns of "normal pseudo-continuous effect" and "story pseudo-continuous effect" in the row of FIG. It is assumed that the production and the story pseudo-continuous production cannot be executed at the same time.

For example, when the execution timing of the pending icon change effect comes during the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (normal pseudo-continuous effect and story pseudo-continuous effect), the variation effect related to the pseudo-continuous effect is completed and the next change The execution of the pending icon change effect is carried over until the effect is started. Also, for example, when execution of the pending icon change effect is determined, the number of times of execution of the pseudo continuous effect is reduced, or the pseudo continuous effect is executed at a timing that does not overlap with the execution timing of the pending icon change effect. controlled.

In other embodiments, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed during execution of the pending icon change effect, or the pending icon change effect may be executed during execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. In addition, the pending icon change effect and the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed simultaneously when, for example, the pending icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), and when the color changes to a color with a lower reliability than the predetermined color. may control not to execute the pending icon change effect. In addition, if the pseudo continuous effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, two times or more), the pseudo continuous effect is executed without executing the pending icon change effect, and if it is executed less than the predetermined number of times, the pending icon change effect is executed. may be executed.

Next, the relationship between the pending icon change effect and the background effect (and the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the background effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, the pending change suggesting image displayed in the pending icon change effect is an image with a narrow display area relative to the entire screen. On the other hand, the bird background and the night background displayed in the background effect are images with a wide display area. Therefore, even if these two kinds of effects are executed at the same time, it is easy to understand what is happening on the screen as a whole.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "background effect (operation promoting effect)" in the row of FIG. 69A, the pending icon change effect and the background effect are controlled to be executable at the same time. That is, the background effect can be executed while the pending icon change effect is being executed, and the pending icon change effect can be executed while the background effect is being executed.

Note that in other embodiments in which the pending change suggesting image is an image with a wide display area for the entire screen (for example, an image displayed on the entire screen), even if the pending icon change effect and the background effect cannot be executed at the same time, good. This is because if the background image becomes completely (or almost) invisible due to the suspension change suggesting image, and the background image has changed without realizing it, the presentation may become complicated as a result. In such a case, for example, when execution of one effect is determined, it may be controlled so as not to execute the other effect at the same timing. In addition, for example, when the execution timing of the pending icon change effect arrives during the execution of the background effect, the pending icon change effect is completed until the next variable effect is started after the variable effect related to the background effect is completed. may be carried over.

Further, in another embodiment, when the pending icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), the pending icon change effect is executed without executing the background effect, and the color is changed to a color with a lower reliability than the predetermined color. In the case of change, the background effect may be executed without executing the pending icon change effect. Also, for example, when the night background is displayed, the background effect is executed without executing the pending icon change effect, and when the bird background is displayed, the pending icon change effect is executed without executing the background effect. good too.

Next, the relationship between the pending icon change effect and the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect) will be described. The pending icon change effect is an effect that draws attention to the pending icon, and the chance eye effect (and pattern change effect) is an effect that draws attention to the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode). When these two types of effects are executed at the same time, for example, the pending change image is displayed superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern, so that the visibility of the decorative pattern is lowered, and the effect as a whole may be difficult to understand. be. In addition, there is a possibility that the effect sound related to the pending icon change effect may be difficult to hear due to the effect sound (for example, the effect sound such as "Zoo") output from the speaker 24 during execution of the chance effect (and symbol change effect).

Therefore, as shown in the columns of "chance eye effect" and "symbol change effect" in the row of FIG. 69A, the pending icon change effect and these effects cannot be executed at the same time.

In another embodiment, the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect) may be executed during execution of the pending icon change effect, or the pending icon change effect may be executed during execution of the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect). may be executable. Further, for example, when the pending icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), the pending icon change effect is executed without executing the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect), and the reliability is higher than the predetermined color. If the color changes to a lower color, the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect) may be executed without executing the pending icon change effect. Further, for example, when a strong chance is displayed, the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect) is executed without executing the pending icon change effect, and when a weak chance symbol is displayed, the chance eye effect (and symbol) is executed. The pending icon change effect may be executed without executing the change effect).

Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and other effects will be described with reference to the row in FIG. 69(B).

First, the relationship between the icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect will be described. Both the pseudo-continuous effect image displayed in the normal pseudo-continuous effect and the icon change suggestive image displayed in the icon change effect are images having a narrow display area with respect to the entire screen. When these two types of effects are executed at the same time, it is possible to heighten expectations for the variable effects being executed due to the synergistic effect.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "normal pseudo-continuous effect" in the row of FIG. 69B, the icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are controlled to be executable at the same time. That is, the normal pseudo-continuous effect can be executed during execution of the icon change effect, and the icon change effect can be executed during the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect. For example, when the icon changes to a predetermined color or more (e.g., gold or more) due to the icon change effect, the number of times the pseudo continuous effect is executed is increased (e.g., twice) compared to when the icon does not change to the predetermined color. It may be easy, or the normal pseudo continuous effect may always be executed.

Note that in other embodiments, the icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect may not be executed at the same time. For example, when execution of one effect is determined, it may be controlled so as not to execute the other effect at the same timing. Also, for example, when the icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), the icon change effect and the normal pseudo continuous effect can be executed at the same time. A normal pseudo continuous effect may be executed without executing the icon change effect. In addition, when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, two times or more), the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed without executing the icon change effect, and when it is executed less than the predetermined number of times, the icon change You may perform a performance.

Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and the story pseudo-continuous effect will be described. As described above, the story pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that draws attention to the story image and the effect sound related to the content of this image. During such an effect, for example, if an icon change suggestion image is displayed superimposed on the front side of the story image, or if an effect sound related to the icon change effect (for example, a sound effect such as "shwa") is output, The player's attention is diverted to the icon. In addition, it is difficult to hear the effect sound related to the icon change effect due to the effect sound related to the story pseudo-continuous effect, and there is a risk that the interest in both effects will decrease.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "pseudo story continuous effect" in the row of FIG. 69B, the icon change effect and the pseudo story continuous effect cannot be executed at the same time. For example, when the icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), the icon change effect is executed without executing the story pseudo-continuous effect, and when the icon changes to a color with a lower reliability than the predetermined color The story pseudo-continuous effect may be executed without executing the icon change effect. In addition, if the simulated story continuous effect is executed a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two times or more), the simulated story continuous effect is executed without executing the icon change effect, and if the simulated story continuous effect is executed less than the predetermined number of times, the icon change is executed. You may perform a performance.

Note that in other embodiments, the pseudo story continuous effect may be executed during execution of the icon change effect, or the icon change effect may be executed during the execution of the pseudo story continuous effect. For example, when the icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), it can be executed at the same time. You may perform a performance. In addition, if the simulated story continuous effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, two times or more), the simulated story continuous effect is executed without executing the icon change effect, and if it is executed less than the predetermined number of times, it can be executed at the same time. may be

Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and the background effect (and the operation promoting effect executed immediately before the background effect) will be described. In this embodiment, the icon change suggestion image is an image with a narrow display area, and the bird background and the night background displayed in the background effect are images with a wide display area. Therefore, even if these two kinds of effects are executed at the same time, it is easy to understand what is happening on the screen as a whole.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "background effect (operation promoting effect)" in the row of FIG. 69B, the icon change effect and the background effect are controlled to be executable at the same time. That is, the background effect can be executed while the icon change effect is being executed, and the icon change effect can be executed while the background effect is being executed.

Note that in other embodiments in which the icon change suggestion image is an image with a wide display area for the entire screen (for example, an image displayed on the entire screen), even if the icon change effect and the background effect cannot be executed at the same time, good. This is because the icon change suggesting image may make the background image completely (or almost) invisible, and the background image may have changed without any explanation, giving a crude impression. In such a case, for example, when the icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), the icon change effect is executed without executing the background effect, and the color is changed to a color with a lower reliability than the predetermined color. If so, the background effect may be executed without executing the icon change effect. In addition, when the background effect in which the night background is displayed is executed, the background effect is executed without executing the icon change effect, and when the background effect in which the bird background is displayed is executed, the background effect is executed. Alternatively, the icon change effect may be executed.

Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect) will be described. In this embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is always executed when the icon becomes blue or higher. On the other hand, the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect) is executed using the variable effect related to the no-reach effect. Therefore, the icon change effect is not executed in the variable display before the prefetch target. When the look-ahead object of the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) corresponds to the icon change effect, the icon change effect and the chance effect (and the symbol change effect) can be executed at the same time.

In other embodiments, the icon change effect and the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) may or may not be executed at the same time under any circumstances.

Next, the relationship between the normal pseudo continuous effect and other effects will be described with reference to the row of FIG. 69(C).

Regarding the relationship between the normal pseudo-continuous effect and the story pseudo-continuous effect, any one type of pseudo-continuous effect can be executed in one variation effect. For this reason, a situation in which the pseudo first continuous effect is executed normally and the pseudo second continuous effect is executed in the pseudo second sequence does not occur. Also, these two types of pseudo-continuous effects are not executed at the same time.

Next, the relationship between the normal pseudo continuous effect and the background effect (and the operation promoting effect executed immediately before the background effect) will be described. The pseudo-continuous effect image is an image with a narrow display area with respect to the entire screen, and the background image is an image with a wide display area. Therefore, even if these two kinds of effects are executed at the same time, it is easy to understand what is happening on the screen as a whole. In addition, it is possible to heighten expectations for the variable performance being executed due to the synergistic effect.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "background effect (operation promotion effect)" in the row of FIG. 69(C), the normal simulated continuous effect and the background effect are controlled to be executable at the same time. That is, the background effect can be executed while the normal pseudo-continuous effect is being executed, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect can be executed while the background effect is being executed. For example, in the case of executing the night background, the number of executions of the normal pseudo-continuous effect may be increased (for example, twice) compared to the case of executing the bird background without executing the night background. Continuous performance may be performed.

Next, the relationship between the normal pseudo continuous effect and the chance effect (and symbol change effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, these effects are executed at different timings, so they are not executed at the same time. This is the same for the relationship between the story pseudo-continuous effect and the chance effect (and symbol change effect) (“chance effect” and “symbol change effect” in the rows of (C) and (D) in FIG. 69). column).

In another embodiment, it is possible to execute the chance game effect (and symbol change effect) during execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (normal pseudo-continuous effect and story pseudo-continuous effect), or the chance game effect (and symbol change effect). ), it may be possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect during execution. Specifically, for example, by functioning as a pseudo-continuous symbol of chance, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed in response to the simulated stop of the chance. A pattern change effect may be performed.

Next, the relationship between the simulated story continuous effect and other effects will be described with reference to the row of FIG. 69(D).

The relationship between the pseudo-story effect and the background effect (and the operation-promoting effect executed immediately before the background effect) will be described. As described above, both the story image and the background image are images that have a large display area with respect to the entire screen and are displayed on the entire screen. For example, even if the background image is changed behind the story image, it cannot be visually recognized.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "background effect (operation promotion effect)" in the row of FIG. 69(D), it is assumed that the simulated story effect and the background effect cannot be executed at the same time, and execution of one effect is determined. If so, control is performed so that the other performance is not executed at the same timing. That is, the background effect can be executed when the number of times the pseudo-story effect is executed is small (specifically, 0 times), and the background effect is not executed when the number of times the pseudo-story effect is executed is large (for example, 2 times). . Specifically, for example, when a variation pattern for reach without loss whose variation time is shorter than 13.5 seconds is selected, the background effect can be executed, and when the variation patterns D, I, J are selected It is not necessary to execute the background effect when the pseudo-story sequence is executed twice.

Note that, in another embodiment, for example, when the pseudo story continuous effect is executed a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two times or more), the pseudo story continuous effect is executed without executing the background effect, and the pseudo story continuous effect is executed less than the predetermined number of times. background production may be performed if necessary. Also, for example, when the night background is displayed, the background effect is executed without executing the pseudo-story effect, and when the bird background is displayed, the pseudo-story effect is executed without executing the background effect. good too.

In addition, pseudo-continuous effects (normal pseudo-continuous effects and story pseudo-continuous effects) may be executed during normal reach, character SP reach, or SPSP reach. The relationship with the effect may be the same relationship as described with reference to the rows of FIGS. 69(C) and (D). In the following description, the pseudo-continuous effect executed during the non-reach effect or the pre-reach effect is called pre-reach pseudo-continuous, and the pseudo-continuous effect executed after the reach is established is called post-reach pseudo-continuous.

It should be noted that the reach is always established after the pseudo-continuation after the reach, but there are cases where the same reach is established with the same reach symbol before and after the pseudo-continuation after the reach, and there are times when the reach is established with different reach symbols. For example, after a reach is established with an even-numbered symbol, there are cases where the reach is established again with an even-numbered symbol and cases where the reach is established with an odd-numbered symbol through a pseudo-continuation after reaching, and the latter is more likely than the former. However, the rate at which SPSP reach is executed may be high, and the jackpot may be likely to occur. For example, when the ready-to-win is established with 7 patterns through the pseudo-continuous effect after reaching to the ready-to-win, the jackpot may always be awarded.

For example, the rate at which the SPSP reach is executed may differ depending on the timing at which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Specifically, during the variable display of the first special symbol, only the pre-reach pseudo-run is executed, the pre-reach pseudo-run and the post-reach pseudo-run are executed, and only the post-reach pseudo-run is executed. It may be executed, and the rate of development to SPSP reach may be high or low in this order. It should be noted that the SPSP reach may be executed whenever the post-reach pseudo-continuation is executed.

The reliability of the post-reach pseudo-run for the jackpot may be higher, substantially the same, or lower than the reliability of the pre-reach pseudo-run. For example, the reliability is relatively low when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed only once during the variable display of the first special symbol, but the reliability is very high if the pseudo-continuous effect is pseudo-continuous after the reach. The rate of appearance of post-reach pseudo-runs and pre-reach pseudo-runs may be determined in advance so as to achieve (for example, a reliability of 70%). SPSP reach may be executed more easily (always be executed) when a highly reliable pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

When the pseudo-continuation after reaching reach is performed during normal reach, the effect of the flow is almost the same as the effect explained with reference to FIG. is done. Although detailed description is omitted, for example, a pseudo continuous symbol is pseudo-stopped as a medium symbol between the left symbol and the right symbol that constitute the ready-to-win symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect). Then, all the decorative patterns (decorative patterns of the first mode) are restarted, and after that, the ready-to-win state is established again without fail with the decorative patterns of the first mode.

The difference is that when the pseudo-continuation after reach is performed during character SP reach or SPSP reach, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the state where the decoration pattern of the second mode is displayed instead of the decoration pattern of the first mode. , and a flow effect that is substantially the same as the effect described with reference to FIG. 62 is performed. Although detailed explanation is omitted, for example, when the left and right symbols that constitute the ready-to-win pattern (decorative pattern of the second mode) are pseudo-stopped at the upper left corner of the screen, a pseudo-continuous medium symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. The pattern is pseudo-stopped. Then, from the state in which the ready-to-win pattern was displayed, all the decorative patterns of the first mode are restarted. After that, the decorative pattern of the first mode always establishes the ready-to-win state again, and the state where the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed is changed to the second mode in the same manner as the effect display described with reference to FIGS. The decorative pattern of is displayed. It should be noted that there are times when reach is established with the same reach symbol before and after the pseudo-continuation after reach, but there are times when reach is established with different reach symbols.

It should be noted that the post-reach pseudo-continuation can be executed during the competition effect during the character SP reach, and does not have to be executed at other timings, and can be executed during the battle effect during the SP SP reach, but is executed at other timings. It doesn't have to be.

Next, the relationship between the background effect (and the operation promoting effect executed immediately before the background effect) and the chance effect (and the symbol change effect) will be described with reference to the row of FIG. 69(E).

The background effect is a effect that draws attention to how the background image changes. If the chance eye is displayed in front of the background image, it may be difficult to recognize the change in the background image. Therefore, as shown in the columns of "chance effect" and "symbol change effect" in the row of FIG. 69(E), these effects cannot be executed at the same time. For example, when it is determined that the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect) will not be executed, the background effect can be executed, and in the opposite case, the background image is controlled not to be executed.

Regarding the relationship between the chance eye effect and the pattern change effect, as described above, the symbol change effect is an effect using the chance eye, so these effects can be executed at the same time ("symbol column of "change effect"). That is, the symbol change effect can be executed while the chance effect is being executed, and the chance effect can be executed during the execution of the symbol change effect.

[Specific example: pattern in which background effect and normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in normal mode A]
FIG. 70 is a screen diagram illustrating how the background effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. FIG. 70 shows a specific example of the effect executed when any one of the variation patterns B to E and G to J of the first special symbol is selected. It is assumed that, at the time of starting the variable effect, it is determined that the operation promotion effect, the background effect of displaying the bird background, and one normal pseudo-continuous effect are to be executed during the pre-reach effect.

In FIG. 70(A), in a state where two reserved icons are displayed in the first reserved icon display area 51 in the normal mode A, determination of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is performed. A state in which a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) of a mode indicating that the result is a loss is stopped and displayed is illustrated. In addition, the earliest pending icon has become blue pending in response to execution of the pending icon change effect.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the blue reservation is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. is started. Along with this, the variable display of decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) is started (see FIGS. 70A and 70B). FIG. 70(B) shows a state in which the default background image of normal mode A is displayed, and the blue pending image is shifted to the area 53 without change and displayed as the blue icon. exemplified. In addition, the scrolling speed of the decorative patterns in the first mode, which started scrolling downward, is gradually increasing, and the normal button image and the gauge image are displayed due to the start of the operation prompting effect immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns. This is an example of how it is done.

When the player operates the effect button 26 during the valid period relating to the operation promoting effect, the valid period ends and the operation promoting effect ends according to the operation. Then, the background image is changed to a bird background by executing the background effect according to the operation (see FIG. 70(C)). FIG. 70(C) illustrates a state in which the bird background is displayed by executing the background effect, and the left pattern (decoration pattern of the first mode) is pseudo-stopped.

After that, after the right symbol (decorative symbol of the first mode) is pseudo-stopped while the bird background is displayed, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol, the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (Fig. 70 (D) reference). A specific example of the effect mode of the normal pseudo-continuous effect has been described above with reference to FIG. In FIG. 70(D), the left symbol and the right symbol (both decorative symbols of the first mode) are pseudo-stopped with the bird background displayed, suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect. is exemplified as a medium symbol that is pseudo-stopped. In FIG. 70(E), characters indicating a pseudo-run number such as "x2" and a pseudo-run effect image are displayed with a bird background displayed. is exemplified.

When the ready-to-win state is established with four symbols in the pseudo second row, for example, it is notified that the ready-to-win state has been established. When reach is established, a white reach line is superimposed on the front side of the reach pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) (see FIG. 70 (E)), or "reach!" The voice of the character (hereinafter referred to as "reach establishment sound") is output from the speaker 24 to inform the user. These are effects suggesting that the ready-to-win effect is started, and are effects to suggest that the reliability of the big win is higher than when the ready-to-win effect is not executed.

If the normal reach is started with the bird background displayed after the ready reach is established, the loss may be announced at the end of the normal reach while the bird background is displayed (pattern from (F) to (G) in FIG. 70). . Also, at the end of normal reach, the bird background is erased to develop into character SP reach, and at the end of this character SP reach, winning or losing is announced (pattern from (F) to (H) in FIG. 70).

It should be noted that there is also a case where a big win is announced at the end of the normal reach (pattern progressing from (F) to (I) in FIG. 70). In FIG. 70(I), while the bird background continues to be displayed, the effect image related to the pseudo-continuous effect is erased, and the decorative pattern of the jackpot mode (decorative pattern of the first mode) is pseudo-stopped. An example is shown. The bird background is erased following the example shown in FIG. will be executed.

Also, if the bird background is erased after the reach is established, it develops into SPSP reach through (or not through) character SP reach, and the win or loss may be announced at the end of this SPSP reach (Fig. 70 (E) , (J), (K)).

[Specific example: a pattern in which the icon change effect (jackpot announcement), background effect, and normal pseudo continuous effect are executed in normal mode A]
FIG. 71 is a screen diagram illustrating how the icon change effect (jackpot announcement), the background effect, and the normal simulated continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. FIG. 71 shows a specific example of an effect executed when any one of the big winning variation patterns B to E of the first special symbol is selected. In addition, at the start of the variable production, one icon change production (jackpot notice) that changes the icon to a rainbow, an operation promotion production, a background production that displays the night background, and one normal pseudo-continuous production reach. It is assumed that it has been determined to be executed during the pre-rendering.

In FIG. 71(A), similarly to FIG. 70(A), two suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 51 in the normal mode A, and the icon displayed in the area 53 A state in which the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is stopped and displayed to indicate that the determination result of the corresponding first special symbol determination is a loss is illustrated. In addition, the earliest pending icon has become blue pending in response to execution of the pending icon change effect.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol determination corresponding to blue reservation is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, the variable display of the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the first aspect) is started (see FIGS. 71(A) and (B)). In FIG. 71(B), the default background image of the normal mode A is displayed, and the decoration pattern of the first mode is displayed by scrolling. The icon is shifted and displayed as the blue icon, exemplifying how the icon change effect is being executed. This icon change performance is executed in a mode of displaying an icon change suggesting image suggesting that the icon changes to a rainbow, and functions as a big win notice that definitely notices the big win. In response to the execution of the icon change performance, the blue icon changes to the rainbow-colored icon functioning as a big win notice that definitely announces the big win. In the example shown in FIG. 71(B), the normal button image and the gauge image are displayed because the operation prompting effect is started immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols.

When the player operates the effect button 26 during the valid period relating to the operation promoting effect, the valid period ends and the operation promoting effect ends according to the operation. Then, the background image changes to the night background by executing the background effect according to the operation (see FIG. 71(C)). In FIG. 71(C), a rainbow-colored icon (jackpot notice) is displayed in a state where a night background is displayed by executing the background effect, and the left pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is displayed. is quasi-stopped.

After that, when the pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is stopped as a middle symbol with the night background displayed, the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (see FIG. 71(D)). In FIG. 71(D), the night background and the rainbow-colored icon are displayed, and the left and right symbols (both of which are decorative symbols of the first mode) and the pseudo-continuous symbols are quasi-stopped. The situation is illustrated. In FIG. 71(E), characters indicating a pseudo run number such as "x2" and a pseudo run effect image are displayed in a state where the night background is displayed. is exemplified.

When the reach is established with 3 symbols in the pseudo second row, for example, a white reach line is superimposed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) along with the reach establishment (see FIG. 71 (E)), or the reach establishment sound is played by the speaker. 24 is output. If the normal reach starts with the night background displayed after the reach is established, the night background is erased at the end of this normal reach and develops into character SP reach, and at the end of this character SP reach, a jackpot may be announced ( Patterns progressing from (F) to (G) in FIG. 71).

In addition, there is a case where a big hit is announced at the end of the normal reach (pattern progressing from (F) to (H) in FIG. 71). In FIG. 71(H), while the night background continues to be displayed, the effect image related to the pseudo-continuous effect is erased, and the decorative pattern of the jackpot mode (decorative pattern of the first mode) is pseudo-stopped. An example is shown.

In addition, when the night background is erased after the reach is established, it develops into the SPSP reach through (or not through) the character SP reach, and the jackpot is announced at the end of this SPSP reach (Fig. 71 (E), (I ), (J)).

In this specific example, in any pattern, before the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode, similarly to the flow described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12A, The first reflex effect, the promotion effect, and the second reflex effect are executed (see FIGS. 11 and 12(A)).

In FIG. 71, the icon change effect as the big win notice is executed during the operation promoting effect, and the advance effect as the big win notice (the effect of displaying the corresponding rainbow icon) is during the background effect, the pseudo continuous effect, and the ready-to-win effect. It is executed during the production that informs the establishment. For this reason, compared to the flow of FIG. 70 in which the big hit notice is not executed during these effects (that is, there may be a loss), in the flow of FIG. 71, for example, the reach pattern is relatively reliable It is easy to become 3 patterns (or 7 patterns), the rate of execution of highly reliable SPSP reach is high, and the rate of big wins is high (probability of big wins 100%).

[Specific example: pattern in which the icon change effect, the background effect, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A]
FIG. 72 is a screen diagram illustrating how the icon change effect, the background effect, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. FIG. 72 shows a specific example of the effect executed when any one of the variation patterns D, E, I, and J of the first special symbol is selected. In addition, at the start of the variable production, one icon change production that changes the icon to blue, an operation promotion production, a background production that displays the night background, and two normal pseudo-continuous productions during the pre-reach production. It is assumed that it is determined to be executed.

In FIG. 72(A), in a state where two reserved icons are displayed in the first reserved icon display area 51 in the normal mode A, the determination of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is performed. A state in which a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) of a mode indicating that the result is a loss is stopped and displayed is illustrated. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as white pending.

After the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the first white reservation is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, the variable display of decorative patterns (decorative patterns of the first mode) is started (see FIGS. 72A and 72B). In FIG. 72(B), the default background image of the normal mode A is displayed, and the decoration pattern of the first mode is displayed by scrolling. The icon is shifted and displayed as a white icon, exemplifying how the icon change effect is being executed. This icon change effect is executed in a mode of displaying an icon change suggesting image suggesting that the icon will change to blue. In response to the execution of the icon change effect, the white icon changes to the blue icon. In the example shown in FIG. 72(B), the normal button image and the gauge image are displayed by starting the operation promotion effect immediately after starting the variable display of the decorative symbols.

When the player operates the effect button 26 during the effective period of the operation promotion effect, the operation promotion effect ends in response to the operation, and the background image changes to the night background by executing the background effect (FIG. 72 ( C)). In FIG. 72(C), the icon is displayed in a state where the night background is displayed by executing the background effect, and the icon has changed to blue, and the left pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is pseudo-stopped. The state of doing is exemplified.

After that, when the pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is stopped as a medium symbol with the night background displayed, the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (see FIG. 72(D)). FIG. 72(D) shows a state in which the night background and the blue icon are displayed, and the left and right symbols (both of which are decoration symbols of the first mode) and the pseudo-continuous symbols are quasi-stopped. is exemplified.

In the pseudo second row, when the pseudo consecutive symbols suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo continuous effect are pseudo-stopped as medium symbols, the second pseudo continuous effect is executed to start the pseudo third row variable display ( See FIG. 72(E)). In FIG. 72(E), the night background, the characters indicating the pseudo-run, and the pseudo-run effect image are displayed, and the left and right symbols (both are decoration symbols of the first mode) and the pseudo-run. A state in which the symbols are in a simulated stop is illustrated.

When the reach is established with 4 symbols in the pseudo third row, for example, a white reach line is superimposed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) with the establishment of the reach (see FIG. 72 (F)), or the reach establishment sound is played by the speaker. 24 is output. In FIG. 72(F), a red pseudo-run effect image is displayed along the inside of the screen peripheral portion in a state in which a night background and characters indicating a pseudo-run number such as "x3" are displayed. , and a state in which the reach is established in the pseudo third row is exemplified.

When the night background is erased after the Reach is established, it develops into the SPSP Reach through (or without) the Character SP Reach, and at the end of this SPSP Reach, the winning or losing is reported (Fig. 72 (F), (G), A pattern that proceeds in the order of (I), or a pattern that proceeds in the order of (F), (H), and (I)).

In the case of a big hit (that is, when the variation patterns D and E are selected), in the same way as the flow described with reference to FIGS. ) is stop-displayed, the first reflex effect, the promotion effect, and the second reflex effect are executed.

[Concrete example: a pattern in which the icon change effect (jackpot announcement), background effect, and normal pseudo continuous effect are executed in normal mode A]
FIG. 73 is a screen diagram illustrating how the icon change effect (jackpot announcement), the background effect, and the normal simulated continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. FIG. 73 shows a specific example of an effect executed when one of the big hit variation patterns D and E of the first special symbols is selected. In addition, at the start of the variable effect, the icon change effect (jackpot notice) that changes the icon from blue to rainbow twice, the operation promotion effect, the background effect that displays the night background, and the two times It is assumed that it has been determined that the normal pseudo continuous effect is to be executed during the pre-reach effect.

In FIG. 73(A), similarly to FIG. 72(A), two suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 51 in the normal mode A, and the icon displayed in the area 53 A state in which the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is stopped and displayed to indicate that the determination result of the corresponding first special symbol determination is a loss is illustrated. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as white pending.

After the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the first white reservation is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, the variable display of decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) is started (see FIGS. 73A and 73B). In FIG. 73(B), the default background image of the normal mode A is displayed, and the decoration pattern of the first mode is displayed by scrolling. The icon is shifted and displayed as a white icon, exemplifying how the icon change effect is being executed. This icon change effect is executed in a mode of displaying an icon change suggesting image suggesting that the icon will change to blue. In response to the execution of the icon change effect, the white icon changes to the blue icon. In the example shown in FIG. 73(B), the normal button image and the gauge image are displayed by starting the operation promotion effect immediately after starting the variable display of the decorative symbols.

When the player operates the effect button 26 during the effective period of the operation promotion effect, the operation promotion effect ends in response to the operation, and the background image changes to the night background by executing the background effect (Fig. 73 ( C)). In FIG. 73(C), the night background is displayed by executing the background effect, and the icon is changed to blue, and the left pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is pseudo-stopped. The state of doing is exemplified. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 73, the icon change effect (jackpot announcement) is executed to display an icon change suggesting image suggesting that the icon will change to a rainbow. In response to the execution of the icon change effect, the blue icon changes to the rainbow icon (big hit notice).

After that, when the pseudo-continuous pattern suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is stopped as a middle symbol with the night background displayed, the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (see FIG. 73(D)). In FIG. 73(D), the night background and the rainbow-colored icon (jackpot notice) are displayed, and the left pattern and the right pattern (both are decoration patterns of the first mode) and the pseudo-continuous pattern are simulated. A stopped state is illustrated.

After that, when the pseudo-continuous pattern suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is pseudo-stopped as a middle symbol in the pseudo-second row, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed for the second time, and the pseudo-third row variation display is started. (See FIG. 73(E)). In FIG. 73(E), a night background, a rainbow-colored icon, characters indicating a pseudo-run, and a pseudo-run effect image are displayed, and the left symbol and the right symbol (both of which are of the first mode) are displayed. A state in which a decorative pattern) and a pseudo-continuous pattern are quasi-stopped is exemplified.

When the reach is established with 3 symbols in the pseudo third row, for example, a white reach line is superimposed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) along with the reach establishment (see FIG. 73 (F)), or the reach establishment sound is played by the speaker. 24 is output. In FIG. 73(F), a night background, a rainbow-colored icon, letters indicating a pseudo-run number such as "x3", and a red pseudo-run effect image are displayed. The example shows how the reach was established.

When the night background is erased after the reach is established, it develops into the SPSP reach through (or not through) the character SP reach, and at the end of this SPSP reach, a big hit is announced (Fig. 73 (F), (G), A pattern that proceeds in the order of (I), or a pattern that proceeds in the order of (F), (H), and (I)). Before the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode, the first reflection effect, promotion effect, and A second reflex effect is executed.

In FIG. 73, the icon change effect as the big win notice is executed during the background effect, and the advance effect as the big win notice (the effect of displaying the corresponding rainbow colored icon) is during the background effect, during the pseudo continuous effect, and when the ready-to-win state is established. is executed during the production that notifies the For this reason, compared to the flow of FIG. 72 in which the big hit notice is not executed during these effects (that is, there may be a loss), in the flow of FIG. 73, for example, the reach symbol is relatively reliable. It is easy to become 3 patterns (or 7 patterns), the rate of execution of highly reliable SPSP reach is high, and the rate of big wins is high (probability of big wins 100%).

[Concrete example: a pattern in which a chance eye effect and a symbol change effect are executed in the normal mode A]
FIG. 74 is a screen diagram illustrating how the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. FIG. 74 is an effect executed in normal mode A when a preliminary determination result indicating that any one of the variation patterns B to E and G to J of the first special symbol is selected is obtained A specific example is shown. In addition, when the display of the pending icon related to the prefetch target is started, the chance eye effect of displaying the weak chance eye and the pattern change effect are executed in the variable effects two and one before the prefetch target. shall be determined.

In FIG. 74(A), two suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 51 in the normal mode A, and three weak chance eyes are formed at the end of the variable effect two before the look-ahead target. A state in which even-numbered symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) are stopped and displayed to notify of a loss is exemplified. Note that the earliest pending icon is displayed as white pending, and the pending icon related to the prefetch target is blue pending in response to the execution of the pending icon change effect.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the stop display of the first special symbol and the three even-numbered symbols forming the weak chance eye is started, the first special symbol determination one before the look-ahead target is executed. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, the earliest white pending is displayed as the icon without change, and the blue pending related to the prefetch target is shifted and displayed to the area 53 side (FIGS. 74A and 74B). (B)).

Almost at the same time that the icon and the pending icon are shift-displayed, the symbol change effect is executed, so that the numbers composing the three even-numbered symbols stopped and displayed in a manner forming weak chances are changed to the default color ( For example, from blue) to green all at once (see FIG. 74(B)). It should be noted that during the pattern change production, the even-numbered patterns that form the weak chance are moving slightly.

Thereafter, as exemplified in FIG. 74(C), the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the first mode) starts scrolling downward, and the scrolling speed gradually increases to high-speed scrolling. Then, the scroll speed is gradually lowered, and the decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first mode) are stopped in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. It should be noted that here, since it is predetermined to display a weak chance eye in the variable effect immediately before the look-ahead target, as illustrated in FIG. After the even-numbered symbols (decorative symbols of the first mode) are pseudo-stopped, they are stopped and displayed.

When a predetermined fixed time elapses after the stop display of the first special symbol and the three even symbols forming the weak chance eye is started, the first special symbol determination relating to the look-ahead target is executed, and the first special symbol is determined. Variable display is started. Along with this, the blue reservation related to the prefetch target is displayed as the icon without change (see FIG. 74(E)).

Almost at the same time that the icon and the pending icon are shifted and displayed, the symbol change effect is executed, so that the numbers composing the even-numbered symbols slightly moving in a manner forming weak chances are changed to the default color (for example, blue). to green all at once (see FIG. 74(E)). After that, after the decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first mode) are scrolled at high speed, the game is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 74(F)). In addition, when it is determined to execute a pseudo-continuous effect at the start of the variable effect related to the look-ahead target, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed before developing into the ready-to-win effect.

[Concrete example: a pattern in which a chance effect, a symbol change effect, and the icon change effect are executed in the normal mode A]
FIG. 75 is a screen diagram illustrating how the chance eye effect, the symbol change effect, and the icon change effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. FIG. 75 shows a specific example of the effect executed in the normal mode A when a preliminary determination result indicating that one of the variation patterns B to E of the first special symbol is selected is obtained. showing. In addition, when the display of the pending icon related to the prefetch target is started, the weak chance eye is displayed in the variable performance two before the prefetch target, and the strong chance eye is displayed in the variable performance one before. , and the symbol change effect are determined to be executed. Further, it is determined that the icon change effect (big hit notice) for changing the icon to a rainbow is executed when the variable effect related to the look-ahead target is started.

The flow of FIGS. 75(A) to (C) is the same as that of FIGS. 74(A) to (C), so the description is omitted here. As exemplified in FIG. 75(D), in the variable performance immediately before the look-ahead object, three odd-numbered symbols (decorative symbols of the first mode) forming a strong chance eye are stopped after being pseudo-stopped. be.

When a predetermined fixed time elapses after the stop display of the first special symbol and the three odd symbols forming the weak chance eye is started, the first special symbol determination relating to the look-ahead target is executed, and the first special symbol is determined. Variable display is started. Along with this, the pending icon related to the prefetch target, which has been blue pending in response to the execution of the pending icon change effect, is displayed as the icon without changing in the same state (Fig. 75 (E) reference).

Almost at the same time that the icon and the reserved icon are shifted and displayed, the symbol change effect is executed, so that the numbers composing the odd-numbered symbols slightly moving to form strong chances are changed to the default color (for example, green). to red all at once (see FIG. 75(E)). Further, the icon change effect (big hit notice) is executed to display an icon change suggesting image suggesting that the icon will change to a rainbow. In response to the execution of the icon change effect, the blue icon changes to the rainbow icon (big hit notice).

Thereafter, while the rainbow-colored icon is displayed, the decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the first mode) is scrolled at high speed, and then pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 75(F)), and after developing into a ready-to-win effect, a jackpot is produced. be notified. In addition, when it is determined to execute a pseudo-continuous effect at the start of the variable effect related to the look-ahead target, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed before developing into the ready-to-win effect.

In FIG. 75, the icon change effect as the big hit notice is being executed during the display of the chance number and during the symbol change effect. For this reason, compared to the flow of FIG. 74 in which no jackpot announcement is executed during these effects (that is, there may be a loss), the flow of FIG. It is easy to achieve a reach with 7 symbols, the rate of execution of highly reliable SPSP reach is high, and the rate of a big hit is high (100% probability of a big hit).

[Modified example of SPSP reach]
For example, it may be possible to display the decorative pattern of the first mode or the decorative pattern of the second mode during the SPSP reach (specifically, during the battle production). FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of SPSP reach (battle effect). As exemplified in FIG. 76, two types of production modes of battle production in SPSP ready-to-win are prepared in advance, and these modes may differ from each other in the mode of decorative symbols displayed as ready-to-win symbols. Specifically, during the battle production, mode A (see FIG. 76(A)) in which the decorative symbols of the first mode are displayed in three symbol rows forming reach at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5; There is also mode B (see FIG. 76(A)) in which the second mode of decorative design is displayed. Mode B is more likely to appear than mode A at the time of a big win, and mode B is less likely to appear than mode A at the time of loss. For this reason, mode B has a higher reliability for the big win than mode A. The player can enjoy the game while expecting that the battle presentation will be executed in the mode B. In addition, the title display, operation promotion effect, and cut-in during SPSP reach are executed when SPSP reach is mode B, but do not need to be executed when SPSP reach is mode A. You can lower it.

For example, when the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 starts the variable effect (for example, following the process of step S1557 in FIG. 52), the variation pattern corresponding to the variable effect to be started this time is D, E, I, J In the case of , it is determined in which one of mode A and mode B the battle effect is to be executed. The sub CPU 131, for example, refers to a battle presentation mode lottery table (not shown) pre-stored in the sub ROM 132, and selects a battle presentation presentation mode based on the information on whether or not the jackpot will be won and the type of the corresponding variation pattern. Determined by random lottery.

The battle effect mode lottery table is, for example, a table in which determination values to be compared with random numbers for determining the effect mode of the battle effect are determined in advance. The rate determined for Mode B (the number of judgment values assigned to Mode B) is higher for big wins than for losses, and is lower in the order of variation patterns E>D>J>I. In addition, the rate determined in mode A is lower in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss, and is higher in the order of variation patterns E<D<J<I.

Further, in another embodiment, during the SPSP reach, either an operation promotion effect (weak mode) of displaying a normal button image or an operation promotion effect (strong mode) of displaying a protruding button image is executed. (See FIG. 65). When the reliability of the big win is higher in the strong mode than in the weak mode, the case where the operation promoting presentation (weak mode) is executed during the SPSP reach is the case where the operation promoting presentation (strong mode) is executed. Alternatively, the blue cut-in may be displayed more easily and the red cut-in less likely to be displayed, or the blue cut-in may be less likely to be displayed and the red cut-in more likely to be displayed.

Specifically, for example, any of the following (1) to (4) may be used as the relationship between the degree of reliability associated with the combination of the operation prompting effect and the cut-in.
(1) Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) < red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) .
In the above (1), the reliability is high when the operation-promoting effect (strong mode) is executed regardless of the cut-in effect mode, and the reliability is low when the operation-promoting effect (weak mode) is executed. It is easy to understand the degree relationship.
(2) Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) < blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) < red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) < blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) .
In the above (2), there is a case opposite to the relationship of reliability only for cut-in. As a result, the display of the blue cut-in may raise expectations more than the display of the red cut-in, and it is possible to effectively prevent the interest of the blue cut-in from decreasing. be. In addition, even if the operation prompting effect (weak mode) is started, it is possible to continue the game without losing the sense of anticipation.
(3) Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) .
In the above (3), the reliability is high when the red cut-in is displayed, and the reliability is low when the blue cut-in is displayed, regardless of the presentation mode of the operation promotion presentation. Therefore, the reliability is easy to understand.
(4) Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) .
In the above (4), the lowest reliability is for the upstart, the medium reliability is for the upstart, and the highest reliability is for the performance modes with high reliability.
Note that the relationship between the levels of reliability associated with the combination of the operation prompting effect and the cut-in is not limited to the above relationships (1) to (4), and may be any relationship.

[Small pattern]
In another embodiment, the variable display may be started with the variable display of the special symbols, and the "small symbol" which is stopped and displayed with the stop display of the special symbols may be displayed at the lower left of the liquid crystal screen 5. For example, the small pattern is, for example, a pattern in which the decorative pattern of the second mode is reduced to 1/8 size, and is composed of three small patterns: a left small pattern, a medium and small pattern, and a right small pattern. .

The small symbols indicate whether the determination result of the special symbol determination is a big win or a loss depending on the combination of the numbers indicated by the three stopped small symbols. Specifically, for example, at the time of a big win, the decorative patterns are stopped in the order of the left pattern (and the right pattern) and the middle pattern so as to form a combination that informs the big win, and then the three decorative patterns are stop-displayed. At this time, along with the pseudo-stopping of the middle symbols, the small symbols (left small symbols, medium and small symbols, and right small symbols) are pseudo-stopped with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbols, and then the combination of the three small symbols is decorated. A combination of the same numbers as the symbols is stopped and displayed to notify a big win. In addition, at the time of loss, the left pattern (and right pattern) and the middle pattern are pseudo-stopped in the order of the left pattern (and the right pattern) so that the combination that informs the loss (loose eye or reach losing eye), and then the combination of the three decorative patterns Stop and display in the same manner without any change. At this time, along with the stop display of the three decorative patterns, the small patterns (left small pattern, medium and small patterns, and right small pattern) are stopped and displayed in the same combination of numbers as the decorative patterns. For this reason, for example, when shifting to the customer waiting state, the small symbols are stopped and displayed in the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbols.

In this way, the variable display of the small symbols and the variable display of the decorative symbols are synchronized. For this reason, the small symbols are corresponding displays corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols being executed, similarly to the decorative symbols.

Incidentally, the small symbols may be variably displayed by displaying a predetermined specific combination in order. For example, "1, 3, 5" → "2, 4, 6" → "3, 5, 7" → "4, 6, 8" → ... as "left small pattern, medium and small pattern, right small pattern" Such a combination may be variably displayed, and when a big win is made, the small patterns with the same combination of numbers as the decorative patterns are pseudo-stopped and then displayed stopped, and at the time of losing, the small patterns may be stopped and displayed with a combination different from the decorative patterns. As a result, the number of patterns used as small patterns can be made smaller than that of decorative patterns, and the data volume can be reduced.

The decorative symbols and the small symbols are common in that the variable display is started with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and the stop display is performed with the stop display of the special symbols.

However, the decorative pattern and the small pattern are different in the following points. First, the decorative pattern is usually displayed relatively large in the center of the screen, while the small pattern is displayed relatively small in the lower left corner of the screen. The size, speed of variable display, direction of variable display) does not change, and the display position does not change during the variable effect.

For example, along with the variable display of the special symbols, the decorative symbols slowly start to variate, or move slightly upward and then start scrolling downward, while the small symbols are displayed at a constant speed and in a constant direction. to start the fast changing display. The speed at which the small symbols are variably displayed may be faster (or slower) than the speed at which the decorative symbols in the first mode and the second mode are scrolled at high speed, or may be the same. Moreover, it may be faster (or slower) than the speed at which the fourth pattern is variably displayed, or may be the same.

Also, as for the decorative symbols, some of the decorative symbols in the three columns may stop during the variable display of the special symbols. On the other hand, as for the small symbols, some of the small symbols in the three lines do not stop in a pseudo manner. For example, when the reach effect is executed, the right pattern slowly scrolls when the left pattern is pseudo-stopped (for example, the effect display in the ready-to-reach effect), and the right pattern becomes the left pattern. A pseudo stop may occur with the same symbol, and the middle symbol may be displayed variably. Further, when the left pattern and the right pattern are pseudo-stopped with the same pattern, the middle pattern is variably displayed in such a manner that the middle pattern is likely to stop in the reach-losing eyes, and then the reach performance with high reliability (for example, SPSP reach). may develop into In addition, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the pseudo-stop is performed with different left, middle, and right symbols.

On the other hand, the small patterns do not slow down the speed at which they are variably displayed, or variably display the small and medium patterns while the left small pattern and the right small pattern are pseudo-stopped, even if the ready-to-win establishment inciting effect or the ready-to-win effect is executed. . Also, even if the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the left small pattern, the medium and small pattern, and the right small pattern are not stopped in a pseudo manner. In other words, even when the decorative symbols are quasi-stopped, the small symbols in the three rows remain variably displayed without being quasi-stopped.

In addition, the decorative design becomes the decorative design of the second mode when the decorative design of the first mode is reduced and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the SPSP reach). On the other hand, small patterns are not displayed in reduced size. In other words, even when the decorative patterns are reduced, the small patterns in the three columns are not displayed in a reduced size, but are variably displayed as they are.

Also, the decorative pattern is used for the first reflection effect, the second reflection effect, and the third reflection effect, but the small pattern is not used for these effects. For this reason, even when the decorative symbols that are pseudo-stopped in the big win mode are highlighted, the small symbols are not illuminated.

In addition, during the variable display of the special symbols, the decorative symbols may be partially or entirely displayed by superimposing another effect image (for example, a button image) on the front side, or by moving the effect accessory 7 to the front side. may become invisible. On the other hand, the small pattern is displayed on the front side of the other performance images, and is displayed in a position where it can be visually recognized even if the performance accessory 7 is operated, so that part or all of the pattern is not visually recognized. For example, when the operation prompting effect is executed, the middle pattern of the three rows of decorative patterns may become invisible, while the small patterns of the three rows may not become partially invisible, and the middle pattern may not be visible. Even while the symbols cannot be visually recognized (or are hidden), the small and medium-sized symbols are still displayed (variably displayed). In another embodiment, the small pattern may not be visible when the performance accessory 7 is operated.

[Modified example of decorative pattern]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, 1 symbol to 6 symbols, 8 symbols, 1 symbol to 6 symbols, and 8 It is set in advance so that the rates of selection of the pattern and the 9 patterns are equal. Also, in the probability variable losing ready-to-win design selection table (see FIG. 20(A)), it is preset so that the proportions of decorative symbols other than 3, 5, and 7 symbols to be selected are equal. As a result, it is possible to provide the function of suggesting the degree of reliability of the big win to the type of the number constituting the decorative pattern, i.e. which of the numbers 1 to 9 it is.

However, not all odd symbols are more difficult to be selected than even symbols when losing. For this reason, regardless of the type of numbers, the default color for numbers that make up odd numbers is green, and the default color for numbers that make up even numbers is blue. It was not possible to give the element related to the color of 2 a function that suggests the reliability of the jackpot.

Therefore, in order to give a function of suggesting reliability to the element related to the color of the decorative pattern, the reach pattern selection table for normal loss and the reach pattern selection table for loss at probability variation (Fig. 19 (A) and Fig. 20 (A) )) may be set in advance so that even-numbered symbols have a higher selection rate than odd-numbered symbols.

Specifically, for example, in the ready-to-win pattern selection table for normal loss, out of the ready-to-win pattern selection random numbers from "0" to "99", 9 random numbers for each of 1 pattern, 5 patterns, and 9 patterns , 7 random numbers are assigned to 3 symbols, and 6 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols. In addition, 15 random numbers are assigned to each of 2 patterns, 4 patterns, 6 patterns, and 8 patterns.

Also, for example, in the reach symbol selection table for probability variation, for example, among the reach symbol selection random numbers of "0" to "99", 5 symbols for each of 1 symbol, 3 symbols, 5 symbols, and 9 symbols A random number value of 0 is assigned to each of the 7 symbols. Also, 20 random numbers are assigned to each of 2, 4, 6, and 8 symbols.

By configuring the ready-to-win pattern selection table for losing as described above, it is possible to make a big hit more easily when a ready-to-win is established with an odd-numbered pattern than when a ready-to-win is established with an even-numbered pattern. As a result, it is possible to give the function of suggesting the reliability of the big win to the element related to the color of the decorative pattern (specifically, the number). In addition, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, even numbered symbols and odd numbered symbols may be selected as the reach symbol, while if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 6R normal Odd symbols are not selected (see FIGS. 19(B) and (C) and FIGS. 20(B) and (C)). For this reason, it is possible to provide a function of suggesting the degree of reliability for transitioning to the variable probability gaming state to the element related to the color of the decorative pattern. That is, for example, the SPSP reach is more likely to be a big hit when an odd pattern of a predetermined color (for example, 7 patterns) is displayed than when an even pattern (for example, 2 patterns) other than the predetermined color is displayed. It can be said that the degree of expectation to shift to the probability variation gaming state is high. If the ready-to-win pattern is an even-numbered pattern, it is a loss or a big hit, and if the ready-to-win pattern is an odd-numbered pattern, it may be a big hit.

In addition, the ready-to-win pattern selection table for losing may be configured as described above, and even-numbered symbols may be displayed more easily than odd-numbered symbols as loose symbols to be stopped and displayed in order to notify a failure. . Specifically, for example, in the process of step S1540 in FIG. 51, even-numbered patterns are more likely to be determined as decorative patterns forming loose stitches than all odd-numbered patterns. You can refer to the table. All of the decorative patterns forming the loose stitches may necessarily be even-numbered patterns, or a predetermined decorative pattern (for example, the left pattern) of the loose stitches is an odd-numbered pattern, and the other decorative patterns (for example, the right pattern) are even-numbered patterns. It's okay.

Note that the default colors of the numbers (elements related to the colors of the decorative patterns) forming the decorative patterns are not limited to the colors described above, and may be any color. For example, the color of numbers forming odd-numbered patterns may be red, and the color of numbers forming even-numbered patterns may be purple.

In addition, it is sufficient that the numbers composing the odd-numbered patterns and the numbers composing the even-numbered patterns have different colors. . Specifically, when the color of the number "7" constituting the 7 patterns among the odd patterns is red, and the color of the numbers constituting the odd patterns other than the 7 patterns is green, the even patterns are formed. The color of the number to be displayed may be blue (ie, a color other than red and green).

A plurality of colors may be associated with one number forming each decorative pattern. For example, white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors are prepared in advance as the colors of the numbers constituting each decorative pattern, and the reliability for the big win and the reliability for shifting to the variable probability gaming state are prepared in this order. (That is, the degree of expectation not to shift to the time-saving gaming state) may be set in advance so as to be high. For example, the reliability is higher when the reach symbol is a white odd number symbol than when the reach symbol is a white even number symbol, and furthermore, the reliability is higher when the reach symbol is a red odd number symbol. (It may be a big hit confirmation). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more interested in the elements related to the colors of the decorative patterns.

Also, a plurality of types of characters may be prepared in advance as additional displays for each number forming each decorative pattern. For example, a character as additional display may be different for each number constituting the decorative pattern, and a plurality of characters may be associated as additional display for one number. Specifically, the characters A to C, which are additionally displayed with seven symbols, may not be additionally displayed with decorative symbols representing other numbers. For example, it may be set in advance so that the reliability for the big hit and the reliability for shifting to the variable probability gaming state (that is, the degree of expectation not to shift to the time-saving gaming state) are increased in order of the characters A to C. For example, the reliability is higher when the ready-to-win state is established by the decorative pattern of the first mode to which the character B is added than when the ready-to-reach state is established by the decorative pattern of the first mode where the character A is added, and further, Reliability is higher when a ready-to-win state is established with the decoration pattern of the first mode to which the character C is added (a big hit may be determined). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more interested in elements related to the additional display of decorative symbols. A plurality of types of characters corresponding to any of the patterns 1 to 9 may be prepared in advance as additional displays. For example, characters A to C may be prepared as additional displays corresponding to all of the patterns 1 to 9. may

Modifications of the decorative designs of the first and second modes will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modified example of the additional display displayed in addition to the numbers forming the decorative pattern. FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining modifications of the decorative designs of the first mode and the second mode.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the decorative patterns of the first mode are composed of numbers and characters as additional displays corresponding to these numbers, and the decorative patterns of the second mode are composed of numbers without additional displays. Configured. In the modified example described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78, any one of the additional images A to C, which are effect images different from the character, is the decorative pattern regardless of the form of the decorative pattern. is always appended to the digits that make up the The additional images A to C are additional displays that are superimposed on the rear side of the numbers forming the decorative design in any of the decorative designs of the first mode and the second mode.

Specifically, in the decorative pattern of the first aspect, any one of the additional images A to C is superimposed and displayed behind the numbers and in front of the character, which is another additional display (Fig. 78(A)). In addition, in the decorative pattern of the second mode, one of the additional images A to C is superimposed and displayed behind the number (see FIG. 78(B)).

The additional images A to C may or may not move in the same manner as the additional display characters. Specifically, the additional images A to C are, for example, when the decorative design of the first mode is in a pseudo-stop state, and when the decorative design of the first mode changes to the decorative design of the second mode (and On the contrary), it flickers in synchronism with the minute movements of the numbers that make up the decorative pattern. Further, when scrolling, the additional images A to C do not flicker regardless of the scrolling speed. Further, when the special symbols are statically displayed, the numerals constituting the decorative symbols become static images, and the additional images A to C are static images as well as the additional characters. In another embodiment, while the special symbols are still displayed, the numbers forming the decorative symbols may be static images, while the additional images A to C may flicker.

The additional image A is an ocher image, and is an additional display corresponding to odd-numbered patterns other than the 7 patterns (see FIG. 77A). The additional image B is a silver image having the same pattern as the additional image A, and is an additional display corresponding to even-numbered patterns (see FIG. 77B). Further, the additional display C is a golden image with a pattern different from that of the additional images A and B, and is an additional display corresponding to 7 patterns.

Since the type of the additional image is uniquely determined for one decorative pattern, it is possible to determine whether the number forming the decorative pattern is an odd number, an even number or "7" depending on the type of the additional image. As a result, for example, the element related to the color of the decorative pattern (specifically, the number) is green and the additional image A is the additional image A (that is, the odd-numbered pattern other than the 7 patterns). It can be suggested that the presence additional image B (that is, the even-numbered pattern) has higher reliability for the big hit and higher reliability for shifting to the variable probability gaming state. Also, for example, when the element related to the color of the decorative pattern is green and the additional image C (that is, 7 patterns), the reliability for the big hit and the transition to the variable probability gaming state are higher than in the case of other combinations It can be suggested that the reliability is high.

Since the additional displays A to C are attached to the decorative patterns of the first mode and the decorative patterns of the second mode, they are always displayed when the decorative patterns are displayed during the variable display of the special patterns. In the normal modes A and B (during the normal game state) and the variable probability modes A and B (during the variable probability game state), the numbers that make up the decorative pattern are the same, and the additional images A to C can be displayed. be. Thereby, a sense of unity can be given to these different production modes.

Note that the additional image A and the additional image B may be images with different colors, or may be images having the same form in one part and different form in the other part.

Further, a plurality of additional images may be associated with one number forming the decorative pattern. For example, when the additional image A or the additional image C is added to one number, the higher the reliability of the big win, the easier the additional image C is added, and the lower the reliability, the easier the additional image A is added. good. Note that the additional image C may be added in the case of a big win, but may not be added in the case of a loss.

[Modification of Reliability Suggestion Effect]
In another embodiment, the following effects may be executed as the reliability suggesting effects that can be executed during the display of the decorative symbols of the first mode.

For example, instead of the background effect, a dialogue image representing the dialogue of the character may be displayed together with a predetermined character, thereby executing a dialogue effect suggesting the reliability of the big win. The dialogue production includes weak dialogue, strong dialogue, and a rainbow dialogue functioning as a jackpot prediction that definitely predicts that a big win will occur, and the reliability of the jackpot is high in this order. For example, according to the operation during the operation prompting effect, a weak line may be executed instead of the bird background, a strong line may be executed instead of the night background, and a rainbow line may be executed in the case of a big win. Note that the dialog effect differs from the background effect in which a background image with a wide display area is displayed in that a dialog image whose display area is narrow relative to the entire screen is displayed.

Alternatively, for example, in place of the background effect, a step-up effect is executed in which a predetermined upper limit number of steps (for example, 4) is set as the upper limit, and step-up effects are executed in which the step progresses stepwise to any step below the upper limit number of steps and ends. good too. In the step-up effect, for example, by sequentially switching and displaying a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance, an effect display is performed in which the effect mode changes in a plurality of stages. The step-up effect is a effect that suggests the degree of reliability for a big win depending on how many steps the effect develops. When the game progresses to a large number of steps (eg, 3), the reliability is higher than when the game progresses to a small number of steps (eg, 1). For example, a step-up effect may be executed instead of the background effect according to the operation during the operation promotion effect. Note that the step-up effect is different from the background effect of displaying a background image with a wide display area in that a effect image with a narrow display area is displayed.

Incidentally, for example, the normal pseudo-continuous effect may be executable only in the normal mode A, and the story pseudo-continuous effect may be executable only in the normal mode B. Further, the pseudo-continuous effect, the chance effect, and the pattern background effect may be executed only in the normal mode A, or may be executed only in the normal mode B. Further, the operation promotion effect (weak mode) can be executed in the normal modes A and B, while the operation promotion effect (strong mode) can be executed only in the normal mode A.

Also, depending on the value of the set value related to the jackpot probability, the execution ratio of all the reliability suggesting effects may be changed, or the execution ratio of some reliability suggesting effects (for example, only the background effect) may be changed. good too. For example, the execution ratio of the predetermined reliability suggesting effect may be higher (or lower) in the order of the set values "1" to "3". As an example, if the setting value is "3", the background effect can be executed in normal mode A, and if the setting value is "2" or "1", the background effect is not executed even in normal mode A ( That is, the appearance rate of 0%) may suggest that the set value is set to "3" by executing the background effect.

In addition, as another embodiment, the production control board 130 is caused to execute a part of the processing executed in the image sound control board 140 (or the lamp control board 150), or the processing executed in the production control board 130 A part of it may be executed by the image sound control board 140 (or the lamp control board 150). In addition, the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 are integrally configured, and the process executed in the effect control board 130, the process executed in the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 You may make it perform by one control board.

Also, the above embodiments are applicable to each other. For example, the present invention may be realized by a configuration in which the first embodiment, a modified example of the first embodiment, and the second embodiment are combined.

Further, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations. In addition, the order of processing, set values, thresholds used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be implemented with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The explanatory diagrams and the like exemplified in the above embodiment are also merely examples, and other aspects may be possible.

Also, the effects described above are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. Moreover, the above embodiments and modifications are mutually applicable, and the present invention may be implemented in various combinations.

[Configuration and Operational Effects of Pachinko Machine According to the Present Invention]
As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment may have the following configuration.

A gaming machine (for example, 1) according to one embodiment determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. machine and
Equipped with a production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
displaying a corresponding display (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the announcement performance,
A first notice effect (for example, background effect) executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
a second announcement effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.

According to such a configuration, the corresponding display is the normal mode or the special mode in the common effect, and the advance notice effect can be appropriately executed according to which mode it is in the advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to execute the notice effect so as to be effectively conspicuous. In addition, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity from occurring when the display of the correspondence display and the execution of the advance notice effect are executed at the same time.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Selection means (e.g., 100) for selecting a variation pattern of the identification information from a plurality of types of variation patterns including a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern, based on the result of the determination;
A production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
displaying a corresponding display (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the announcement performance,
A first notice effect (for example, background effect) executed when the corresponding display is in the normal mode (for example, the decorative pattern of the first mode);
a second announcement effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
When the first variation pattern is selected, it is possible to execute the first notice effect,
When the second variation pattern is selected, it is possible to execute the first notice effect and the second notice effect,
If it is determined to run the special game,
The second variation pattern is more likely to be selected than the first variation pattern.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate advance notice effect according to the type of variation pattern. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent execution of an effect that seems redundant or excessive. Further, when the special game is executed, more advance notice effects can be executed than when the special game is not executed, so that an interesting effect can be realized while the corresponding display is being displayed.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the announcement performance,
A first notice effect (for example, background effect) executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
a second announcement effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
It is possible to execute the first notice effect before the start of the common effect,
It is possible to execute the second notice effect after the start of the common effect.

According to such a configuration, different effects can be executed before and after the common effect. As a result, a lively performance can be realized.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the announcement performance,
A first notice effect (for example, background effect) executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
a second announcement effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
It is possible to execute the first notice effect before the start of the common effect,
It is possible to execute the second notice effect after the start of the common effect,
The first notice effect is less likely to be executed after the start of the common effect than before the start of the common effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the effects before and after the common effect different, and furthermore, it is possible to expect that the first notice effect will be executed after the common effect is started.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the announcement performance,
A first notice effect (for example, background effect) executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
a second announcement effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
A specific effect (e.g. promotion effect) in which the corresponding display is displayed in a specific mode (e.g. jackpot mode) after executing a common effect (e.g. ready-to-win effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode. and
The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on at which of a plurality of timings the common effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to make the player interested in what timing the common effect was executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect until the common effect is started.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the announcement performance,
A first notice effect (for example, background effect) executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
a second announcement effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
A specific effect (e.g. promotion effect) in which the corresponding display is displayed in a specific mode (e.g. jackpot mode) after executing a common effect (e.g. ready-to-win effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode. and
Depending on whether or not the display mode of the corresponding display in the common effect is the special mode, the rate at which the specific effect is executed differs.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to make the player interested in what kind of corresponding display is displayed in the common effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect during the common effect.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute an effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes including a first effect mode and a second effect mode,
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the announcement performance,
It is controlled to the first production mode (for example, normal mode A), and the corresponding display is either a normal mode (eg, a decorative pattern of the first mode) or a special mode (eg, a decorative pattern of the second mode) A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when one of
A second notice effect (for example, title display), and
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.

According to this configuration, the type of notice effect can be changed or the same according to the type of effect mode, so that the overall effect executed by the game machine can be unified while changing the effect for each effect mode. can be issued.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Selection means for selecting the variation pattern of the identification information from a plurality of types of variation patterns including a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern based on the result of the determination;
A production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the announcement performance,
A first notice effect (for example, background effect) executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
a second announcement effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
When the first variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect can be executed,
When the second variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect is not executed.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Selection means for selecting the variation pattern of the identification information from a plurality of types of variation patterns including a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern based on the result of the determination;
A production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the announcement performance,
A first notice effect (for example, background effect) executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
a second announcement effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
When the first variation pattern is selected, the second notice effect is not executed,
When the second variation pattern is selected, the second notice effect can be executed.

According to the above two configurations, it is possible to execute an appropriate advance notice effect according to the type of variation pattern. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent execution of an effect that seems redundant or excessive.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the announcement performance,
A first notice effect (for example, background effect) executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
a second advance notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
There is a third notice effect (for example, a pending icon change effect),
It is possible to execute the third notice effect during execution of the first notice effect,
without executing the third notice effect during execution of the second notice effect,
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.

According to this configuration, since the third foretelling performance is not executed while the second foretelling performance is being executed, it is possible to effectively prevent the interest of the second foretelling performance from being lowered by the third foretelling performance.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the announcement performance,
A first notice effect (for example, background effect) executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
a second announcement effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
There are a first mode (for example, bird background) and a second mode (for example, night background) in the production mode of the first notice production,
There are a third mode (for example, blue title display) and a fourth mode (for example, red title display) for the production mode of the second notice production,
When the first notice effect and the second notice effect are executed,
The degree of expectation for execution of the special game differs depending on the combination of the performance modes of the first notice effect and the second notice effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of announcement effect to be executed and its effect mode, and to make the player pay attention when the correspondence display is in the normal mode or in the special mode. It is possible.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
Along with the variable display of the identification information, variable display of corresponding display corresponding to the variable display;
stop displaying the corresponding display along with the derivation display of the result of the determination;
From the start of the variable display of the corresponding display to the stop display, a re-variation effect (for example, a pseudo-story continuous effect) is executed a predetermined number of times to temporarily stop the corresponding display and then variably display the corresponding display. is possible and
At any one of a plurality of timings, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed,
In the production that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed,
a first effect (for example, background effect) executed when the corresponding display is in the normal mode (for example, the decorative pattern of the first mode);
a second effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
When the number of re-variation effects is small (for example, once), the first effect and the second effect can be executed,
When the number of re-variation effects is large (for example, twice), the second effect can be executed.

According to such a configuration, there is a notice effect that is not executed according to the number of re-variation effects.

In addition, the game machine (for example 1) is provided with an input means that can be input by the player,
A gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to a player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination,
Equipped with a production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the announcement performance,
a first notice effect (for example, background effect) that can be executed in response to an input to the input means when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decoration pattern of the first mode);
a second announcement effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
There are a first mode (for example, bird background) and a second mode (for example, night background) in the production mode of the first notice production,
There are a third mode (for example, blue title display) and a fourth mode (for example, red title display) for the production mode of the second notice production,
When the first notice effect and the second notice effect are executed,
The degree of expectation for execution of the special game differs depending on the combination of the performance modes of the first notice effect and the second notice effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to give the degree of expectation to the advance notice effect itself, but also to make the degree of expectation different depending on the combination of a plurality of advance notice effects. As a result, it is possible to arouse interest not only in a single announcement effect, but also in a plurality of kinds of announcement effects when the corresponding display is in the normal mode and in the special mode.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) determines whether or not to execute a special game, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game),
Equipped with a production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the announcement performance,
A first notice effect (for example, background effect) executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
a second announcement effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
The corresponding display is
A first element related to color (for example, the color of the numbers that make up the decorative pattern),
a second element (e.g., additional image) to be added to the first element,
The proportion controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the aspect of the element of the corresponding display.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the corresponding display, and as a result, the player's attention is drawn to the advance notice effect when the corresponding display is in the normal mode and in the special mode. It is possible to attract

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) determines whether or not to execute a special game, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, 6R normal) or a second advantageous state (for example, 16R probability variable) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
Equipped with a production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the announcement performance,
A first notice effect (for example, background effect) executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
a second announcement effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
The corresponding display is
A first element related to color (for example, the color of the numbers that make up the decorative pattern),
a second element (e.g., additional image) to be added to the first element,
When the first element and the second element are in a specific mode (for example, the numbers that make up the decorative pattern are red and the additional image C), the second advantageous state is higher than the case where the number is not in the specific mode. easy to control.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the correspondence display, and to give the player a special feeling when the element of the correspondence display is in a specific mode.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
a suggestive effect suggesting that the special game will be executed (for example, the icon change effect of changing the icon to a rainbow color);
a forewarning effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings, and
In the announcement performance,
A first notice effect (for example, background effect) executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
a second announcement effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
After the first announcement effect, it is possible to execute a common effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
When the suggestive effect is executed while the first notice effect is being executed;
In the case where the suggestive effect is not executed while the first notice effect is being executed,
In the common effect, the ratio of displaying the corresponding display in the special mode is different.

According to this configuration, since the suggestive effect may be executed during the execution of the first notice effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention during the first notice effect. Further, since the common effect is executed after the first notice effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the common effect following the first notice effect.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
Equipped with a production control means (for example, 130) that controls the production,
The production control means is
displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any one of a plurality of timings, and a target effect (for example, a preliminary effect),
In the announcement performance,
A first notice effect (for example, a pending icon change effect) executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
a second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, the icon change effect);
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode,
When the target effect is in the first effect mode (for example, blue) in response to the execution of the first notice effect, the ratio of the target effect to the second effect mode (for example, rainbow color) is the first ratio. and
When the target effect is in the first effect mode in response to the execution of the second advance notice effect, the ratio of the target effect to the second effect mode is the second ratio (for example, the first ratio higher percentage).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether the target effect has changed to the first mode due to the first notice effect or to the first mode due to the second notice effect. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's attention when the corresponding display is in the normal mode or in the special mode.

1 game machine 5 liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal screen)
7 production accessories 13 big winning mouth 24 speaker 100 game control board 101 main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
130 effect control board 131 sub CPU
132 sub ROMs
133 sub-RAM
134 RTCs
140 image sound control board 141 general CPU
142 control ROM
143 control RAM
144 VDP
145 Acoustic DSP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to a player, variably displays identifiable identification information, and derives and displays the result of the determination,
Prior determination means for determining in advance whether or not to execute the special game before the determination is made;
Equipped with production control means for controlling production,
The production control means is
A preliminary effect can be executed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means,
Along with the variable display of the identification information, variable display of corresponding display corresponding to the variable display;
stop displaying the corresponding display along with the derivation display of the result of the determination;
It is possible to execute a specific effect using the corresponding display and a suggestive effect suggesting that the special game will be executed, from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display. can be,
At any one of a plurality of timings, it is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed,
In the announcement performance,
a first notice effect executed when the corresponding display is in the normal mode;
a second advance notice effect executed when the corresponding display is a special mode,
A first effect in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode, and a second effect in a mode different from the first effect, in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the special mode, are executed. is possible and
After the end of the first notice effect, it is possible to execute the first effect or the second effect,
The same special effect can be executed when the first effect is executed and when the second effect is executed,
The ratio of execution of the special effect differs between the case where the suggestive effect is executed after the end of the first notice effect and the case where the suggestive effect is not executed after the end of the first notice effect,
This game machine is more likely to execute the advance notice performance when the preliminary performance is executed than when the preliminary performance is not executed.

Images